Loading...
9907-596 (OFC) Project ManualPROJECT MANUAL GREG NORMAN GOLF AMAITNANCOURSE LA QUINTA, CALIFORNIA DFD PROJECT NO. 98215 CITY OF LA OuiNEP BUILDING & SAFETY DT APPROVED FOR CONSTRUCTION DFD ARCHITECTURE 4201 NORTH 24TH STREET LDA'TF- PHOENIX, ARIZONA 85016 (602) 957-4758 ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 D ARcy\ R M!CHAF-L R. � >�r DAVIS BY J�� 6 ofll-*' PROJECT MANUAL GREG NORMAN GOLF COURSE CLUBHOUSE AND MAINTENANCE BUILDING LA QUINTA, CALIFORNIA DFD PROJECT NO. 98215 DFD ARCHITECTURE 4201 NORTH 24TH STREET PHOENIX, ARIZONA 85016 (602) 957-4758 ISSUE DATE JULY 26,.1999 ARcy� w MICHAEL R. C7 DAVIS -I �r OF CA<�F���9 SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 TABLE OF CONTENTS GREG NORMAN GOLF COURSE CLUBHOUSE AND MAINTENANCE BUILDING NO. OF SECTION TITLE PAGES CS Cover Sheet 1 00010 Table of Contents 3 BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, CONTRACT FORMS, AND CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT Provided by Owner DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS f 01110 Summary of Work 3 03200 01230 Alternates 1 Cast -in -Place Concrete 9 Architectural Precast Concrete - Plant Cast 4 01290. 01310 Schedule of Values Project Coordination 1 3 .01312 Project Meetings 1 04085 01320 Construction Schedule 2 Concrete Masonry Units 7 01330 01420 Submittals References 4 5 01430 Testing and Inspection 2 01500 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls 6 01600 Material and Equipment 3 01732 Cutting and Patching 3 01740 Cleaning 2 01770 Project Closeout 2 01780 Guarantees/Warranties 1 01790 Project Record Documents 2 01830 Maintenance Manuals 1 DIVISION 02300 2 - SITEWORK Earthwork 8 02360 Soil Treatment 3 02515 Concrete Pavers 3 02765 Pavement Markings 1 02821 Chain Link Fences and Gates 3 02841 Parking Bumpers 1 DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE I DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/TABLE OF CONTENTS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 00010-1 03100 Concrete Formwork 3 03200 Concrete Reinforcement 2 03300 03450 Cast -in -Place Concrete 9 Architectural Precast Concrete - Plant Cast 4 DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 04065 Mortar and Masonry Grout 3 04085 Masonry Accessories 3 04220 Concrete Masonry Units 7 04402 Exterior Stone 6 I DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/TABLE OF CONTENTS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 00010-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 DIVISION 5 - METALS 05410 Load -Bearing Metal Stud System 3 05500 Metal Fabrications 5 05520 Handrails, Railings and Windscreens 3 05700 Ornamental Metal 3 DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS 06100 Rough Carpentry 5 06173 Wood Trusses 3 06180 Glue -Laminated Construction 3 06200 Finish Carpentry 2 06210 Exterior Siding 2 06400 Architectural Woodwork 4 . 06670 FRP Wall Panels 2 DIVISION 7, THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION 07111 Bituminous Dampproofing 2 07190 Water Repellents 4 07210 Building Insulation 3 07610 Sheet Metal Roofing 3 ' 07840 Firestopping 4 07900 Joint Sealers 5 .DIVISION 8 -DOORS & WINDOWS 08100 Steel Doors and Frames 3 08215 Wood Doors 3 08310 Access Doors and Frames 1 08330 Coiling Doors 2 08551 Aluminum Clad Wood Windows and Doors 2 08710 Door Hardware 7 08800 Glazing 5 DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09100 Metal Support Assemblies 4 09220 Portland Cement Plaster 4 09250 Gypsum Board 4 09310 Ceramic Tile 4 09330 Quarry Tile 3 09510 Acoustical Ceilings 3 09570 Stone Countertops 4 09625 Wood Flooring 3 09680 Carpet 5 09720 Wall Coverings 2 09820 Acoustical Insulation 1 09900 Painting 20 09940 Venetian Stucco Finish 5 DIVISION 10 -SPECIALTIES 10200 Louvers 2 ' 10350 Flagpoles 2 10400 Signage 3 10500 Lockers 2 10520 Fire Protection Specialties 2 10534 Car Shelters 3 10810 Toilet Accessories 3 DFD ARCHITECTURE DFD PROJECT-NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 C -SPECS TM/TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 00010-2 SASC Inc.. Phoenix - Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 DIVISION 11 -EQUIPMENT 11235 Misting System 2 DIVISION 12, FURNISHINGS 12490 Sunscreens • ' DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13121 Pre -Engineered Buildings 6 13123 Chemical Storage Building 1 I13125 Above Ground Storage Tank 2 DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS None in this Project DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 15100 Mechanical Specifications 10 15300 Fire Protection 13 15400 Plumbing Specifications 11 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16010 Electrical General Provisions 5 16050 Raceway Systems 11 16090 Wiring Devices 2 16120 Electrical Wire and Cable 4 16210 Electrical Service Entrance Equipment 2 16230 Electrical Overcurrent Protective Devices 2 16240 Identification 1 16260 Motor Control and Control Devices 2 16450 Grounding 3 16510 Lighting Fixtures 3 16610 Test and Trials 2 16740 Telephone System 2 END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS DFD ARCHITECTURE DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 C -SPECS TM/TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 00010-3 Ir LJ SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 G.' Prior to occupying the site, the Contractor shall submit for the review and approval of the Owner a phased construction plan describing staging areas and site delivery routes. This plan, once approved by the Owner, shall not be changed by the Contractor without written notice to and approval by the Owner including reasons for change. i 1.03 DEFINITIONS PERTAINING TO THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS G A. "Provide" means to furnish, fabricate, complete, deliver, install and erect, and connect, including all labor, materials, equipment, apparatus, appurtenances and expenses necessary to complete in-place; ready for operation and use, under the terms of the specifications. 1 DFD ARCHITECTURE I _ C -SPECS TM/SUMMARY OF WORK DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 01010-1 SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ' A. The work consists of new single story golf clubhouse, maintenance building and pumphouse. ' B. Contractor's duties: 1. Unless specifically noted otherwise, provide and pay for all: a. Labor, materials and equipment. b. Tools, construction equipment and machinery. Water, C. heat and utilities, for both temporary and permanent usage. d. Other facilities and services necessary for proper completion of the work. 2. Pay legally required sales, consumer and use taxes. 3. Give required notices. 4. Comply with codes, ordinances, rules, regulations, orders and other legal requirements of all authorities and agencies which govern the performance and product of the work. 5. Promptly submit written notice to Architect and Owner of any observed variances of contract documents from legal requirements. However, it is not the Contractor's responsibility to verify that the drawings and specifications comply with codes and - regulations. 6. Enforce good order among employees. Do not employ persons unfit or unskilled in their assigned work. 1.02 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES A. Confine operations to areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits, the contract documents and governing authorities. No disturbance of the native desert or work shall be allowed outside of the project limit line. B. Do not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment. C. Do not overload the structure with weight that will endanger it. D. Assume full responsibility for protection and safekeeping of materials and tools stored at the site and at Contractor's off-site locations. E. Obtain and pay for use of all additional storage or work areas needed for construction operations. F. -The Contractor is responsible for the conduct of all persons working on the project under his employ. Any offensive conduct by any such person(s) constitutes grounds for ' dismissal of that person(s) from further work on the project. G.' Prior to occupying the site, the Contractor shall submit for the review and approval of the Owner a phased construction plan describing staging areas and site delivery routes. This plan, once approved by the Owner, shall not be changed by the Contractor without written notice to and approval by the Owner including reasons for change. i 1.03 DEFINITIONS PERTAINING TO THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS G A. "Provide" means to furnish, fabricate, complete, deliver, install and erect, and connect, including all labor, materials, equipment, apparatus, appurtenances and expenses necessary to complete in-place; ready for operation and use, under the terms of the specifications. 1 DFD ARCHITECTURE I _ C -SPECS TM/SUMMARY OF WORK DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 01010-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 B. "As shown", "as detailed", "as indicated" or words of similar import mean as indicated on the drawings C. "As selected", "as approved" or words of similar import mean as selected by, as approved by, or as accepted by the Architect and Owner. D. "Approved equal", "or equal" shall mean as approved and accepted by the Architect and Owner. E. "Shall" means mandatory. F. "As required" means as required by the contract documents. G. "As necessary" means essential to the completion of the work. H. "Concealed" means not visible in the finished work. "Exposed" means visible in the finished work. J. "Days" means calendar days. 1.04 APPROVED APPLICATORS A. Where specific instructions in the Specifications require that a particular product and/or material be applied and/or installed by an "approved applicator" it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to insure that any Subcontractor or Sub -subcontractor used for such Work is in fact currently certified by the particular Manufacturer for this type of installation or application. 1.05 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Each Section includes a list of Manufacturers whose equipment is acceptable as .to manufacture, subject to conformance with the Contract Documents. Careful checking must be made by the Contractor and the manufacturer or equipment supplier to verify that the equipment will meet all capacities, requirements, space allocations and is suitable to the intended purpose. 1.06 REFERENCE DATA A. Reference data made available to the Contractor is for the Contractor's information only, and neither the Owner nor the Architect assume any responsibility for the Contractor's conclusions. B. The Contractor shall establish and maintain all buildings and construction grades, lines, levels, and bench marks. This Work shall be performed by a licensed Civil Engineer or Surveyor (unless otherwise approved by the Owner) under the employ of the Contractor, who shall certify to the Architect that he has performed this service. C. The Contractor shall not remove any property line markers or monuments or data established by the Owner. 1.07 ARCHITECTURAL BARRIERS A. It is the desire of the Owner that the facilities and improvements constructed under this Contract meet or exceed the intent of applicable public law concerning prohibition of discrimination, and that no individual be discriminated against on the basis of disability in the full and equal enjoyment of the goods, services, facilities, privileges, advantages, or accommodations of this completed Project. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/SUMMARY OF WORK DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 01010-2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 B. The designers and drafters of these Documents have intended to incorporate those Owner's intentions into these Documents. C. It is recognized that there may be products not incorporated into these Documents that may more nearly meet the Owner's desires than those included. D. The Owner hereby solicits those providing elements of this Project to bid and contract for the Project as required by these Documents, but at the time of submitting Shop Drawings, or sooner when appropriate, and without causing delay in the Project, to also submit proposals for improving the accessibility of the Project to physically or mentally impaired persons. ; DFD ARCHITECTURE DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 END OF SECTION C -SPECS TM/SUMMARY OF WORK SECTION 01010-3 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 SECTION 01230 ALTERNATES ' 1.01 ALTERNATE BIDS A. Alternates quoted on Bid Forms will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at the Owner's ' option. Accepted Alternates will be identified in Owner -Contractor Agreement. B. Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work as required. C. Schedule of Alternates: 1. Alternate No. 1: State Change to Base Bid provide portland cement plaster (stucco) as specified in Section 09220 at foyer areas as indicated on Drawings in lieu of stone. END OF SECTION I 1 DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ALTERNATES DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 01230-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 ' END OF SECTION ' DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/SCHEDULE OF VALUES DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 01290-1 SECTION 01290 SCHEDULE OF VALUES PART GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY ' A. Submit a schedule of values to the Architect and Owner at least 5 days before submitting the first application for payment. B. Support the values given with data substantiating their correctness upon Architect's request. C. Use the schedule of values for Contractor's applications for payment. 1..02 FORM OF SUBMITTAL A. The form of application for payment will be the AIA Document G702, "Application and 1 Certification for Payment", and where applicable, Document G702A, "Continuation Sheet". B. Identify each line item with a number and title as listed in the index of these specifications. 1.03 PREPARING SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Itemize a separate line item cost for each of the following general cost items: 1� 1. Performance and payment bonds. 2. Field supervision and layout. 3. Temporary facilities and controls. .4. `Additional items as required by Owner. ' B. Itemize line item as a separate cost for work required by each section of the specifications. ' C. Break -down installed costs into: 1. Delivered cost of product, with taxes paid. 2. Total installed cost, with overhead and profit. D. Break -down cost to list major products or operations for each line item which has an installed value of more than $10,000. ' 1.04 REVIEW AND RESUBMITTAL A. Revise and resubmit the schedule (and schedule of material values) after the Architect's review, if required. ' B. Resubmit the revised schedule in the same manner. ' END OF SECTION ' DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/SCHEDULE OF VALUES DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 01290-1 ' SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 F. Cost control: 1. Revise and refine the approved construction cost estimate at a regular period to: a. Monitor and record actual costs, and estimates for completed work. b. Incorporate approved changes as they occur. 1 2. Maintain cost accounting records for authorized work performed under unit costs, actual costs for labor and materials, and other work requiring accounting records. 3. Develop and implement procedures for reviewing and processing applications for progress payments and final payments. Submit to the Owner, in accordance with ' the General Conditions of the Agreement Between Owner and Contractor in effect for this Work, all applications for progress and final payments, and requested copies of paid bills. Submit simultaneously to the Architect, using AIA Document G702, "Application and Certificate for Payment", and if applicable AIA Document G702A, "Continuation Sheet", all applications for progress and final payment, in accordance with the Agreement Between Owner and Contractor. Prior to first application for progress payment being transmitted, prepare a Schedule of Values per specification Section 01290, "Schedule of Values". DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/PROJECT COORDINATION DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 01310-1 SECTION 01310 PROJECT COORDINATION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION ' A. Be responsible for all project coordination. 1.02 DUTIES OF CONTRACTOR A. Coordinate the work of all subcontractors. B. Establish lines of authority and communication. Schedule and conduct progress meetings ' between the Owner's Representatives, the Architect, and the subcontractors. C. Write and distribute meeting minutes for all scheduled meetings. D. Construction schedules: 1. Prepare detailed schedule of operations of all subcontractors performing work on the project. 2. Monitor schedules as work progresses: a. Identify potential variances between scheduled and probable completion dates. b. Recommend adjustments in schedules to meet required completion date. C. Provide summary reports of each monitoring. d. Document all changes in schedule. 3. Observe the work to monitor its compliance with the schedule. a. Verify that labor and equipment are adequate for the work and the schedule. b. Verify that material deliveries are adequate to maintain the schedule. ' C. Report noncompliance to Owner, with recommendations for remedy. E. Temporary facilities: 1. After approval by Owner, allocate space for temporary structures furnished by ' each subcontractor. 2. Monitor the use of temporary utilities. 3. Verify that adequate services are provided to comply with requirements for work and climatic conditions. ' 4. Verify proper maintenance and operation of temporary facilities. 5. Administer traffic and parking controls. F. Cost control: 1. Revise and refine the approved construction cost estimate at a regular period to: a. Monitor and record actual costs, and estimates for completed work. b. Incorporate approved changes as they occur. 1 2. Maintain cost accounting records for authorized work performed under unit costs, actual costs for labor and materials, and other work requiring accounting records. 3. Develop and implement procedures for reviewing and processing applications for progress payments and final payments. Submit to the Owner, in accordance with ' the General Conditions of the Agreement Between Owner and Contractor in effect for this Work, all applications for progress and final payments, and requested copies of paid bills. Submit simultaneously to the Architect, using AIA Document G702, "Application and Certificate for Payment", and if applicable AIA Document G702A, "Continuation Sheet", all applications for progress and final payment, in accordance with the Agreement Between Owner and Contractor. Prior to first application for progress payment being transmitted, prepare a Schedule of Values per specification Section 01290, "Schedule of Values". DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/PROJECT COORDINATION DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 01310-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 G. Changes: 1. Recommend necessary or desirable changes to the Owner and Architect. Implement no changes until approval for same is received in writing from the Architect and Owner. 2. Following issuance by Architect of a Proposal Request, provide requested estimates for revisions, modifications, deletions or additions to the Work in a timely manner, so as to aid the Owner in deciding whether to proceed with that change. 3. Review subcontractor's requests for changes and for substitutions; submit recommendations to the Owner and Architect for their review. Implement no substitutions until approval for same is received in writing from the Architect and Owner. 4. Prepare and process change orders. Insure that the Owner and Architect are made aware of current or pending conditions which may produce a change order. H. Permits, approvals and fees: Verify that subcontractors have obtained all necessary permits or approvals required for inspections and for temporary facilities. I. Interpretation of contract documents: 1. Consult with Architect to obtain interpretations of the documents in case of conflict, and before implementing actions which appear uncertain. 2. Assist in the resolution of questions which arise. 3. Transmit written interpretations to all concerned parties, and maintain a file on the jobsite of this information. J. Administer the processing of shop drawings, product data and samples. K. Maintain the following at or near the site: 1. Daily log of progress of work, available to the Architect and the Owner. 2. Records: a. Contracts. b. Purchases. C. Materials and equipment records. 3. Assemble documentation for handling claims and disputes. L. Verify that specified cleaning is done as the work progresses, and at the completion of each subcontract. M. Start-up: 1. Direct the check-out of utilities, operation systems and equipment. 2. Assist in initial start-up and testing. 3. Record dates of start of operation of systems and equipment. These dates must be as approved by the Owner. N. Substantial completion: 1. Upon determination of substantial completion of the work, as defined in AIA Document A201-1987, the Contractor shall prepare a list of incomplete or unsatisfactory items for the Architect's and Owner's review and notation of required remedial action. 2. Supervise the correction and the completion of the work required above upon the Architect's certification of the date of Substantial Completion. Acceptance of all punchlist items listed shall be in writing by the Owner's Representatives. O. Final completion: 1. Upon determination that the entire project's work has been completed: a. Submit written notice to the Owner, and the Architect, that the work is ready for its final inspection, which inspection shall not occur prior to completion of all required remedial work. b. Obtain and transmit all required closeout submittals to the Architect. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/PROJECT COORDINATION , DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 01310-2 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas P. 1 GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 2. Transmit to the Owner: a. Operations and maintenance data. b. Spare parts and maintenance materials. C. Record Drawings. Efficiency: Minimize wastefulness and inefficient use of copies and blueprints. Contractor shall be supplied with all prints reasonably requested as necessary during construction. END OF SECTION DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/PROJECT COORDINATION DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 01310-3 1 1 11 11 1 1 1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 SECTION 01312 PROJECT MEETINGS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Contractor shall schedule and administer progress meetings. 1. Make arrangements for meetings; prepare agendas and preside at meetings. 2. Record minutes, including significant proceedings and decisions. 3. Distribute copies of minutes to participants and designated representatives within four (4) days after meetings. Furnish three (3) copies of minutes to the Architect. B. The Architect will attend the meetings to aid in expediting the work in accordance with the construction schedule and contract documents, and to administer the Contract. 1.02 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Contractor shall schedule regular progress meetings as mutually agreed. Hold meetings as job progress dictates. The number of meetings shall not be excessive. Hold meetings at the construction office on-site or near the site, or as indicated in the advance notice. B. Attendance: 1. The Architect and his consultants, as pertinent to the agenda. 2. Subcontractors, as pertinent to the agenda. 3. Owner's Representative. C:. Minimum agenda: 1.. Review, approve minutes of the previous meeting. 2. Review work progress since the previous meeting. 3. Note field observations, problems and decisions. 4. Identify problems which impede planned progress. 5. Review any off-site fabrication problems. 6. Develop corrective measures and procedures to regain planned schedule. 7. Revise construction schedule as indicated. 8. Plan progress during next work period. 9. Review submittal schedules, expedite as required to maintain schedule. 10. Maintenance of quality standards. 11. Review any changes proposed by the Owner for effect on construction schedule, cost, and completion date. 12. Complete other current business. END OF SECTION ' DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/PROJECT MEETINGS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 01312-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas ' GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 SECTION 01320 ' CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES PART GENERAL 1.01 � SUMMARY. ' A. Provide projected construction schedules for all work, and revise twice monthly, or as requested by the Owner. 1.02 SCHEDULE FORM A. Prepare construction schedules in horizontal bar chart form. 0 * Provide schedules in format as approved by the Architect and Owner. 2. List the work in the chronological order in which it will be performed. 3. Horizontal time scale: Identify first work day of each week. 4. Scale and spacing: Allow space for up -dating. 1.03 SCHEDULE CONTENT A. Provide complete sequence of construction by activity. 1. Shop drawings, product data and samples: Show submittal dates, and dates ' reviewed/returned copies will be required, for all disciplines where review is specified. 2. Include decision dates for selection of finishes and products specified by allowances, when applicable. 3. Indicate product procurement and delivery dates. 4. Show dates for beginning, and completion of each element of construction. B. Show projected percentage of completion for each item of work as of first day of each month. C. "Provide separate subschedules showing submittals, review items, procurement schedules and delivery dates. ' D. Provide subschedules to define critical portions of entire schedule, when applicable. 1.04 UPDATING ' A. Show all changes occuring since previous submission of updated schedule. ' B. Indicate progress of each activity, and show completion dates. C. Include: 1. All major changes in scope. ' 2. Activities modified since previous updating. 3. Revised projections due to changes. 4. Other identifiable changes. ' D. Provide verbal or written narrative report, including: 1. Discussion of problem areas, including current and anticipated delay factors, and their impact. 2. Corrective action taken, or proposed, and its effect. ' 3. Description of revisions: a. Effect on schedule due to change of scope. b. Revisions in duration of activities. C. Other changes that may affect schedule. ' DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 01320-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit initial schedules within 7 days after issuance of notice to proceed. 1. The Architect will review the schedules and return a review copy within 7 days after receipt of the schedules. 2. Resubmit schedules within 3 days after return of review copy, if required. B. Submit updated schedules twice monthly accurately depicting progress to first day of each month. C. Submit the schedule in the form of 4 blueline prints or equivalent. 1.06 DISTRIBUTION A. Distribute copies of reviewed schedules to Owner and Architect, subcontractors and other concerned parties. Keep one copy of the schedule in the project site file. B. Instruct recipients to report any inability to comply, and provide detailed explanation with suggested remedies. END OF SECTION DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 01320-2 i SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas I GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 ' SECTION 01330 SUBMITTALS PART 1- GENERAL ' 1.01 SUMMARY A. In addition to other requirements of the contract documents pertaining to submittals, submit copies of all shop drawings, product data, samples,. and other submittals required by specification sections to the Architect and Owner. B: Designate in the construction schedule dates for submission, and the dates that reviewed shop drawings, product data and samples will be needed for each product or discipline. ' C. In the interest of lessening the review burden of submittals, the Contractor is requested to submit only that material or information requested by the specifications, or that in his judgement requires review for compliance with the design intent of the contract document. 1.02 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Definition: Original drawings, prepared by Contractor, supplier, or distributor, for this specific project and no other, which illustrate a portion of the work's fabrication, layout, setting or erection details. s 1. Identify details by reference to Architect's sheet and detail numbers shown on the contract drawings. 1.03 PRODUCT DATA A. Manufacturer's standard schematic drawings: 1. Modify drawings to delete information which is not applicable to this specific project. 2. Supplement standard information to provide additional information applicable to this specific project. ' B. Manufacturer's catalogue sheets, brochures, diagrams, schedules, performance charts, illustrations and other standard descriptive data. 1. Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent materials, products or models. 2. Show dimensions and clearances required. 3. Show performance characteristics and capacities. 4. Show wiring diagrams and controls. 1.04 SAMPLES ' A. Submit physical examples illustrating materials, equipment or workmanship, to establish standards by which completed work will be judged, when requested. ' 1. Samples: Unless otherwise specified, samples shall be of sufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate the principal characteristics of the product or material, with integrally related parts and attachment devices and full range of color and texture , when applicable. 2. Field samples and mock-ups: Erect at site, unless specified otherwise, in approved location. Construct each sample or mock-up complete, including work of all trades required in finished work. ' DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS 1M/ SUBMITTALS DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 01330-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 1.05 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Review shop drawings, product data, and samples before submitting them to the Architect. A submittal received in the Architect's office without ready proof (by initialling, marked comments or other method) of the Contractor's review, will be returned noted "Not Reviewed by Architect - Please Resubmit!". B. Verify field measurements, field construction criteria, catalogue numbers, and similar data. C. Coordinate each submittal with the requirements of the work and the contract documents. D. Contractor's responsibility for errors, and omissions in submittals will not be relieved by the Architect's review of submittals. E. Contractor's responsibility for deviations in submittals from requirements of contract documents is not relieved by the Architect's review of submittals, unless Architect gives written acceptance of specific deviations. F. Notify the Architect in writing at time of submission, of deviations in submittals from the requirements of the contract documents. G. Do not begin work which requires submittals until the submittals have been returned, with stamp, initials, or signature indicating their reviewed status. Work begun or installed prior to such reviewed status being granted may be subject to removal and replacement, as well as modifications to adjacent work necessitated by this commencement, at the judgement of the Architect or Owner and at no additional cost to the Owner. H. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned parties. 1.06 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Schedule submittals to allow for a 15 -day period of review before the time when reviewed submittals will be needed. If Contractor-unreviewed submittals are made (see 1.05.A above) , the review shall not commence until a Contractor -reviewed resubmittal is made and received by the Architect's office. B. Submit to the Architect one (1) reproducible transparency (sepia print or vellum xerox) and three (3) blueline prints of shop drawings which are requested. The reproducible and the print shall be stamped, as reviewed, by the Contractor, and shall contain what marks, and noted deviations from contract documents he observes as necessary. A reproducible of any drawing larger than 11" x 17" must be included for the submittal to be reviewed by the Architect. Otherwise, the submittal will be returned noted "Not Reviewed by Architect - Please Resubmit!" C. Submit to the Owner two (2) blueline prints of shop drawings. One (1) print shall be stamped for review by the Owner's Representatives, and shall contain what marks, and I noted deviations from contract documents they observe as necessary. D. As required by the discipline, or material involved, submit the number of copies of product data which the Contractor requires for distribution, plus three (3) copies which will be retained by the Architect. Each copy of product data shall bear a Contractor stamp noting his review. Otherwise, the submittal will be returned noted "Not Reviewed by Architect - Please Resubmit!". DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ SUBMITTALS ' DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 01330-2 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ' ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 E. Submit to the Architect a minimum four (4) samples of material when samples are requested, unless another quantity is otherwise specified or required to allow distribution to all concerned parties, each bearing a Contractor stamp noting his review. Otherwise, the submittal will be returned noted "Not Reviewed by Architect - Please Resubmit!". The Architect shall not be responsible for cutting or creating multiple sample pieces for return to the Contractor in order to satisfy requirements of distribution. 1.09 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES A. The Architect will review the submittals within 3 days, and note "Reviewed", "Reviewed as Noted", "Revise and Resubmit", or "Contractor Review Incomplete", as applicable, commensurate with his interpretation of the contract documents. An indication of "Reviewed" or "Reviewed as Noted" constitutes satisfactory compliance of the submittal with the contract documents and shall be considered "reviewed", and unless noted otherwise, requires no resubmittal. Note the text of the Architect's Submittal Review ' Stamp: "Reviewed for conformance with the design concept of the work and with the information given in the Contract Documents" Contractor is responsible to confirm dimensions and quantities at the site, and coordination of affected means, methods, sequences and procedures of construction." DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ SUBMITTALS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 01330-3 F. Submittals shall include: 1. Date and revision dates, if any, for this actual submittal material, if previously sent ' for review. 2. Project title and number, and Contractor's submittal number. 3. The names of the Architect, Contractor, subcontractor, supplier, manufacturer, and separate detailer, when pertinent. 4. Identification of product or material, with the appropriate part of the building's construction described briefly. 5. Relation to adjacent structure or materials. 6. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such. The Architect shall not provide ' dimensions which require field verification even though the shop drawings from suppliers, fabricators or subcontractors may request this information. 7. Specification section number. 8. Applicable standards, such as ASTM number or Federal Specifications. 9. A 2" x 4" blank space for the Architect's review stamp. 10. Identification of all deviations from contract documents, especially those which the Contractor is submitting therein for the Architect's review. 11. Contractor's stamp, initialed or signed, certifying his review of the submittal, verification of field measurements, and its compliance with the contract documents. H. Shop Drawing Review: Deferred submittal requirements to Governing Agency by the ' Contractor to be determined at a later date. 1.07 RESUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS ' A. Shop drawings: Revise the initial drawings as required and resubmit as specified for first submittal within 3 days to allow for a reasonable period of review. B. Product date and samples: Submit new data and samples as required for the first submittal, or as requested by the Architect. 1.08 DISTRIBUTIONS OF REVIEWED MATERIAL A. Distribute copies of reviewed shop drawings and product data to the Contractor's project site file, to the project record documents file, and to subcontractors, supplier and ' fabricator. B. Distribute samples as appropriate. 1.09 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES A. The Architect will review the submittals within 3 days, and note "Reviewed", "Reviewed as Noted", "Revise and Resubmit", or "Contractor Review Incomplete", as applicable, commensurate with his interpretation of the contract documents. An indication of "Reviewed" or "Reviewed as Noted" constitutes satisfactory compliance of the submittal with the contract documents and shall be considered "reviewed", and unless noted otherwise, requires no resubmittal. Note the text of the Architect's Submittal Review ' Stamp: "Reviewed for conformance with the design concept of the work and with the information given in the Contract Documents" Contractor is responsible to confirm dimensions and quantities at the site, and coordination of affected means, methods, sequences and procedures of construction." DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ SUBMITTALS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 01330-3 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 B. The Architect's notation of "Reviewed" regarding a separate item will not constitute acceptance of an assembly in which the item functions. C. Stamp and initial, or by signature indicate his review of the submittal. D. Return to the Contractor the stamped and initialed reproducible print, and one (1) blueline copy of that marked reproducible, for the Contractor's printing and distribution to all concerned parties. 1.10 OTHER SUBMITTALS A. Deliver all keys properly identified to the Owner at one time. B. Deliver all written warranties and guarantees, prepared in duplicate,. certificates of inspection and bonds, for the Architect's review and delivery to the Owner. Provide an index of all warranties and guarantees required by these Specifications. C. Deliver all operating, servicing, maintenance and cleaning instructions, parts list, special tools and other material required by the specifications to the Owner. Provide an index of all instructions, parts lists, special tools, and other material required by these Specifications. END OF SECTION DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ SUBMITTALS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 01330-4 ' 1 1 1 1 CII 1 1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 SECTION 01420 REFERENCES PART GENERAL 1.01 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or Federal Standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B. Comply with referenced standards and specifications' latest revision in effect at the time the bids from subcontractors are received, except comply with issues in effect as listed in governing legal requirements. C. Obtain copies of standards when required by Contract Documents. D. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect/Engineer before proceeding. E. The contractual relationship of the parties to the Contract shall not be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document. 1.02 SCHEDULE OF REFERENCES AA Aluminum Association 818 Connecticut Avenue; N.W. Washington, DC 20006 AABC Associated Air Balance Council 1000 Vermont Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20005 AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials 444 North Capitol Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20001 ACI American Concrete Institute Box 19150 Reford Station Detroit, MI 48219 ADC Air Diffusion Council 230 North Michigan Avenue Chicago, IL 60601 Al Asphalt Institute Asphalt Institute Building College Park, MD 20740 AIA American Institute of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20006 AISC American Institute of Steel Construction 400 North Michigan Avenue Eighth Floor Chicago, IL 60611 DFD ARCHITECTURE DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 C -SPECS TM/REFERENCES SECTION 01420-1 0 SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute 1000 16th Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20036 AITC American Institute of Timber Construction 333 W. Hampden Avenue Englewood, CO 80110 AMCA Air Movement and Control Association 30 West University Drive Arlington Heights, IL 60004 ANSI American National Standards Institute 11 West 42nd Street New York, NY 10036 API American Petroleum Institute 2101 L Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20037 ARI Air -Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute 1501 Wilson Boulevard Arlington, VA 22209 ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers 1791 Tullie Circle, N.E. Atlanta, GA 30329 ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 345 East 47th Street New York, NY 10017 ASPA American Sod Producers Association 4415 West Harrison Street Hillside, IL 60162 ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials 1916 Race Street Philadelphia, PA 19103 AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute 2310 South Walter Reed Drive Arlington, VA 22206 AWPA American Wood -Preservers' Association 7735 Old Georgetown Road Bethesda, MD 20014 AWS American Welding Society 550 LeJeune Road, N.W. Miami, FL 33135 AWWA American Water Works Association 6666 West Quincy Avenue Denver, CO 80235 DFD ARCHITECTURE DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 C -SPECS TM/REFERENCES ' SECTION 01420-2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas - GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 BIA Brick Institute of America 11490 Commerce Park Drive Reston, VA 22091 CDA Copper Development Association 57th Floor, Chrysler Building 405 Lexington Avenue New York, NY 10174 CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute 1101 Connecticut Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20036 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute 933 Plum Grove Road Schaumburg, IL 60195 DHI Door and Hardware Institute 7711 Old Springhouse Road McLean, VA 22102 EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association 25 North Broadway Tarrytown, NY 10591 FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association 3310 Harrison White Lakes Professional Building Topeka, KS 66611 , FM Factory Mutual System 1151 Boston -Providence Turnpike P.O. Box 688 Norwood, MA 02062 GA Gypsum Association 1603 Orrington Avenue Evanston, IL 60201 ICBO International Conference of Building Officials 5360 S. Workman Mill Road Whittier, CA 90601 IEEE Institute of Electrical and:Electronics Engineers 345 East 47th Street New York, NY 10017 MBMA Metal Building Manufacturer's Association 1230 Keith Building Cleveland, OH 44115 MIL 'Military Specification Naval Publications and Forms Center 5801 Tabor Avenue Philadelphia, PA 19120 MUSFA Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association 221 North LaSalle Street Chicago, IL 60601 DFD ARCHITECTURE DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 C -SPECS TM/REFERENCES SECTION 01420-3 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers 221 North LaSalle Street Chicago, IL 60601 NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association P.O. Box 781 Herndon, VA 22070 NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau 8224 Old Courthouse Road Vienna, VA 22180 NFPA National Fire Protection Association Battery March Park Quincy, MA 02269 NFPA National Forest Products Association 1619 Massachusetts Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20036 NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association 8600 Bryn Mawr Avenue Chicago, IL 60631 NTMA National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association 3166 Des Plaines Avenue Des Plaines, IL 60018 NWMA National Woodwork Manufacturers Association 205 W. Touhy Avenue Park Ridge, IL 60068 PCA Portland Cement Association 5420 Old Orchard Road Skokie, IL 60077 PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute 201 North Wells Street Chicago, IL 60606 PS Product Standard U. S. Department of Commerce Washington, DC 20203 RIS Redwood Inspection Service One Lombard Street San Francisco, CA 94111 RCSHSB Red Cedar Shingle and Handsplit Shake Bureau 515 116th Avenue Bellevue, WA 98004 SDI Steel Deck Institute P.O. Box 9506 Canton, OH 44711 DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/REFERENCES DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 01420-4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 SDI Steel Door Institute 712 Lakewood Center North 14600 Detroit Avenue Cleveland, OH 44107 SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association 111 East Wacker Drive Chicago, IL 60601 SJI Steel Joist Institute 1205 48th Avenue North Suite A Myrtle Beach, SC 29577 SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association 8224 Old Court House Road Vienna, VA 22180 SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council 4400 Fifth Avenue Pittsburgh, PA 15213 TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. Box 326 Princeton, NJ 08540 UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. 333 Pfingston Road Northbrook, IL 60062 WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau 6980 S.W. Varus Road Box 23145 Portland, OR 97223 WWPA Western Wood Products Association 1500 Yeon Building Portland, OR 97204 1.03 ABBREVIATIONS ft. foot (feet) gal. gallon(s) in. inch(es) HVAC Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning lbs. pounds O.C. on center psi pounds per square inch psf pounds per square foot sq. square sf square foot yd. yard(s) FTF finish face -to -finish face FOF face -of -finish END OF SECTION DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/REFERENCES DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 01420-5 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas ' GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 23, 1999 SECTION 01430 TESTING AND INSPECTION PART -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. If determined by the Owner to be necessary, the Owner shall employ and pay an independent testing laboratory to perform test, inspections and sampling for the following work. 1. Earthwork. '2. -Concrete reinforcement. 3. Concrete ingredients. 4. Concrete quality control. 5. Mortar and Grout. �. 6. -Structural steel and welding. 7. Additional tests, inspections and sampling required by the specifications. B. w Owner's employment of testing laboratory shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his obligation to perform work in accordance with contract requirements. C. If any material or item of workmanship should fail to pass a required test or inspection, the cost of subsequent and additional tests and inspections for the failed item shall be paid by the Contractor or deducted from payment due him. D. Material tests to demonstrate compliance with the specifications, and mix designs for concrete and masonry, shall be paid for by the Contractor. 1.02 LABORATORY DUTIES A. Cooperate with the Architect and the Contractor. Provide qualified personnel promptly upon notice. B. Perform specified inspecting, sampling and testing of materials and methods of construction. 1. Comply with specified standards, other recognized authorities, and as specified. 2. Check for compliance with Contract Documents. ' C. Promptly notify the Architect and the Contractor of observed irregularities or deficiencies in the work. The Architect shall immediately notify the Owner. D. Promptly submit reports to the following: 1. Two (2) copies to the Contractor's site office, one (1) copy to the Owner's office, one (1) copy to the Architect's office, and one (1) copy to the Structural Engineer's office, directly. ' E. Reports shall include the date issued and date of test, project title and number, testing laboratory's name and address, name and signature of inspector, date of inspection or sampling, record of temperature and weather, identification of product and specification section, location in project, type of inspection or test, and observation regarding compliance with contract documents. F. Perform additional services as required by the Owner. G. The laboratory is not authorized to release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on, the requirements of the contract documents, approve or accept any portion of the work, or perform any of the Contractor's duties. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ TESTING AND INSPECTION DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 01430-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 23, 1999 1.03 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Cooperate with the testing laboratory's personnel. Provide access to work and to supplier's operations. B. Furnish the testing laboratory with preliminary representative samples of materials to be tested, in required quantities. C. Furnish copies of mill test reports. D. Furnish casual labor and facilities: 1. To provide access to the work to be tested, to obtain and handle samples at the site, and to facilitate inspections and tests. 2. For the testing laboratory's exclusive use for storage and curing of test samples. E. Notify the testing laboratory sufficiently in advance of operations to allow for its assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests. F. Arrange with the testing laboratory and pay for: 1. Additional samples and tests required for the Contractor's convenience. 2. Additional tests when initial test indicates work does not comply with contract documents. END OF SECTION DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ TESTING AND INSPECTION DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 01430-2 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 SECTION 01500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. - Provide all temporary facilities and controls required for the performance of the work and as approved by the Owner. B. Maintain strict supervision of use of all temporary facilities and controls. Enforce compliance with applicable standards and prevent abuse of services. C. Definition: 1. Temporary utilities shall include: a. Temporary electric lighting and power, for the building proper and for the site. b. Temporary water. C. Temporary heat and ventilation. d. Temporary telephone service. e. Temporary sanitary facilities. f. Temporary first aid, fire protection and other temporary facilities in accordance with applicable legal requirements. 2. Construction aids. 3. Barriers. 4. Special controls. 5. Traffic regulations. 6. Temporary project identification, only as approved by Owner and Architect. 7. Field offices and storage sheds as approved by the Owner. D. Cost of Governmental reviews and approvals, installation, operation and removal of all temporary facilities shall be borne by the Contractor. 1. Pay the costs of electricity used during construction, including the costs of its installation, maintenance and removal. 2. Pay the costs of additional temporary heat and ventilation used during construction, including the costs of its installation, fuel, operation, maintenance and removal of the equipment. 3. Pay the costs for temporary telephone service, including the costs of its installation, use charges, maintenance, and removal. 4. Pay the costs of temporary water services, including the costs of its installation, maintenance and removal of pipe and equipment. a. Pay the costs for water used by all trades. 5. Pay the costs of temporary sanitary facilities, including the costs of its installation, maintenance and removal. a. Pay the service charges for use of portable units. b. Pay the service charges for connection and use of sewerage system. E. Comply with codes and regulations regarding potable drinking water, sanitation, dust control, fire protection, and other temporary controls, including E.P.A. stormwater retention and pollution requirements. 1.02 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY A. Provide and pay for power service required from Utility and make arrangements for such service. B. Maintain in a safe manner and utilize so as not to constitute a hazard to persons or property. Y C -SPECS TM/ CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES .DFD ARCHITECTURE AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 01500-1 A. Provide adequate number of fire extinguishers to protect the Work. B. Comply with fire insurance and governing regulations. C. Provide UL labeled ABC all-purpose fire extinguishers adequate in size and number. C -SPECS TM/ CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES DFD ARCHITECTURE AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 01500-2 SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 C. Provide temporary electric power throughout the construction period, so that power can be secured at any desired point within the building with not more than a 100'-0" extension cord. 1. Power centers for miscellaneous tools and equipment used in the work. 2. Power for construction site offices and for other temporary storage and construction buildings. 3. Power for testing and checking equipment. D. Comply with all legal requirements. 1.03 TEMPORARY LIGHTING A. Lighting for safe and adequate working conditions, as required for each trade to perform their work to standard of quality specified, not withstanding more stringent legal requirements. ' B. Provide adequate floodlights, clusters and spot illumination to work areas after dark. C. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors, pigtails, and lamps as required. D. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs. 1.04 TEMPORARY HEATING AND VENTILATING A. Provide and pay for heat devices and heat as required to maintain specified conditions for construction operations. B. Prior to operation of permanent equipment for temporary heating purposes, verify that installation is approved for operation, equipment is lubricated and filters are in place. Provide and pay for operation, maintenance, and regular replacement of filters and worn or consumed parts. C. Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F. in areas where construction is in progress, unless indicated otherwise in specifications. D. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. 1.05 TELEPHONE SERVICE A. Provide, maintain and pay for telephone service to field office if required at time of project mobilization and throughout construction period. A pay phone is not acceptable. ' 1.06 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE A. Provide and maintain suitable quality water service required for drinking and construction operations from source provided and paid for by Owner. B. ' Extend branch piping throughout the site to provide outlets for hoses with threaded connections. ' 1.07 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide and maintain temporary portable toilets and other sanitary facilities for all workmen on the project as required by, and in accordance with, legal requirements. ' 1.08 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION A. Provide adequate number of fire extinguishers to protect the Work. B. Comply with fire insurance and governing regulations. C. Provide UL labeled ABC all-purpose fire extinguishers adequate in size and number. C -SPECS TM/ CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES DFD ARCHITECTURE AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 01500-2 SASC Inc, Phoenix •las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 B. Protection: 1. Continuously maintain protection as necessary to protect the work as a whole ' - and in part, and adjacent property and improvements from accidents, injuries or damages. 2. Properly protect the work: a. Provide lights, guard rails, temporary covers, and barricades. b. Enclose excavations with proper barricades. C. Brace and secure all parts of the work against storm and accident. d. Provide such additional forms of protections which may be necessary under existing circumstances. C -SPECS TM/ CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES DFD ARCHITECTURE AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 01500-3 D. Provide temporary office and storage areas with fire extinguishers. E. Obtain and comply with Owner's rules for construction and fire protection. 1.09 PERMANENT SYSTEMS USED AS TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. When any portions of the permanent systems are in operating condition, that part of the system may be used as a temporary facility provided the Contractor: 1. Obtains the Owner's prior written approval, having made the Owner aware first of all warranties which will be placed in effect by such a use. 2. Assumes full responsibility for the system used. 3. Pays all costs for maintenance, cleaning and restoration of the system. 4. Operates the system under the supervision of the subcontractor responsible for the system's installation and ultimate performance. 1.10 MISCELLANEOUS TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION AIDS A. Provide and maintain all miscellaneous temporary construction aids required for the proper execution of the work, such as: 1. Ladders, ramps and railings. 2. Scaffolds, hoists, and bunkers. 3. Chutes, barricades, enclosures. 4. Platforms, swing staging, walks, etc. B. Locate temporary construction aids in and about the project as is practicable and where they will not interfere with the progress of the work. Remove promptly when no longer needed. C. Provide openings where required for moving in large pieces of equipment specified. Close and restore all openings and finish after the equipment is in place, in accordance with Section 01732, "Cutting and Patching". 1.11 BARRIERS A. Security: 1. The Owner may provide such watchman service as he deems necessary during the progress of the work. Any protection provided by the Owner shall not in any way relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for the protection or safety of the work. 2. The Contractor shall employ such watchman service as he may deem necessary to properly protect and safeguard the work. The Owner shall not in any way be liable or responsible for the damage or loss to the work due to trespass or theft. 3. Provide protection for materials, tools, and equipment used on the project, including workmen's tools. The Owner shall not be held to have incurred any liability for loss of, and damage to, materials, tools and equipment of the Contractor, or of those employed by him, by contract or otherwise. B. Protection: 1. Continuously maintain protection as necessary to protect the work as a whole ' - and in part, and adjacent property and improvements from accidents, injuries or damages. 2. Properly protect the work: a. Provide lights, guard rails, temporary covers, and barricades. b. Enclose excavations with proper barricades. C. Brace and secure all parts of the work against storm and accident. d. Provide such additional forms of protections which may be necessary under existing circumstances. C -SPECS TM/ CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES DFD ARCHITECTURE AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 01500-3 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 3. Provide and maintain in good condition all protective measures as may be required to adequately protect the public, workmen, employees, etc. from hazards resulting from the work and to exclude unauthorized persons from the work. When regulated by Code or other authority, such legal requirements for protection shall be considered as minimum requirements; be responsible for protection in excess of such minimum requirements as required. The Contractor shall designate a Safety Captain(s) who shall be on site during working hours, organize safety programs and report to the Owner on a monthly basis. C. Construction fence or barricade: 1. If required by Owner, provide and maintain a minimum 6' high chain link fence or other stable barricade around the perimeter of the project site, to the limits of the property, as approved by the Owner. 2. Equip vehicular and pedestrian gates with locks, located for access to work areas, as required. Close and lock after working hours. 3. As required, remove and relocate components of the fence during construction to make way for parts of the work, keeping intact at all times a line of barrier from public access to construction area. 1.12 NOISE AND DUST CONTROL A. Exercise controls to keep noise and dust during construction to a minimum. Traffic or construction areas shall be sprinkled with water or chemicals as required and in accordance with applicable County requirements. B. Notify the Owner prior to using noise generating equipment in sufficient time to permit removal of occupants affected by such disturbances. Screen noisy equipment with temporary enclosures to shield adjacent areas. 1.13 WATER CONTROL A. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate and maintain pumping equipment. B. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site from soil erosion. C. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate and maintain pumping equipment 1.14 TRAFFIC REGULATIONS A. Traffic maintenance: Determine the routing of construction vehicles before starting work, and the safeguards and procedures necessary to carry out the work. Confirm requirements with lodge manager prior to commencing Work.. 1. In addition: a. Be responsible for controlling construction traffic within and adjacent to the site. Construction traffic is not allowed south and west of the site. b. Provide all entrances, lifts and safeguards required or necessary to the progress of the work, and effectively control such traffic to provide minimum hazard to the work and all persons. C. Route all construction equipment, trucks, and similar vehicles via existing public streets to and from the site as approved by the agency with jurisdiction and the Owner. d. Obtain and pay for all required permits and inspections made necessary by use of public streets, sidewalks, curbs, and paving. Post any required guarantees and bonds, and repair and make good all damages in accordance with the requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. e. Keep streets adjacent to the site open to vehicular and pedestrian traffic. f. Maintain constant access for police, fire and ambulance service. g. Provide and maintain for proper control of traffic and safety of all concerned: 1) All necessary barricades, suitable and sufficient lights, reflectors, and danger signals. 2) Warning and closure signs, directional and detour signs. C -SPECS TM/ CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES DFD ARCHITECTURE AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 01500-4 A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. ' D. Regularly remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site and dispose off-site. Do not allow to accumulate. 1.18 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION A. Provide temporary construction signage as approved by Owner, and designed by Architect. -� B. Erect on site at location established by Architect. C. No other signs, including temporary or permanent signs on Contractor and subcontractor trailers,are allowed without Owner's permission except those required by law. C -SPECS TM/ CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES DFD ARCHITECTURE AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 01500-5 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 3) Whatever additional measures may be necessary. h. Indicate all restricted and dangerous conditions existing on or adjacent to the site on a 24-hour basis. 1) Illuminate barricades, danger signals, warning signs and obstructions at night. 2) Keep warning lights burning from one hour before sunset until one hour after sunrise. B. Parking: Parking for workmen employed on the work may be provided on or near the site. All additional parking space required by the Contractor shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Submit a parking location and management plan to Owner for approval. 1.15 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary weather -tight closure of exterior openings to accommodate acceptable working conditions and protection for products, to allow for temporary heating and maintenance of required ambient temperatures identified in individual specification Sections, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. Provide access doors with self- closing hardware and locks. 1.16 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual specification Sections. B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to minimize damage. C. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. D. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or heavy movement of objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. E. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. F. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas. 1.17 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. ' D. Regularly remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site and dispose off-site. Do not allow to accumulate. 1.18 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION A. Provide temporary construction signage as approved by Owner, and designed by Architect. -� B. Erect on site at location established by Architect. C. No other signs, including temporary or permanent signs on Contractor and subcontractor trailers,are allowed without Owner's permission except those required by law. C -SPECS TM/ CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES DFD ARCHITECTURE AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 01500-5 END OF SECTION C -SPECS TM/ CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES DFD ARCHITECTURE AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 01500-6 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 D. Keep the premises free from all other posters, signs, advertisements, etc. 1.19 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS A. General: Locations shall be at the project site at locations approved by the Owner. 1. The Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain a field office for his own use, and as a place to hold job meetings. Equip the office with lights, heat, air conditioning, desks, chairs, plan racks, telephones and other items necessary for the performance of the work. Provide a table of sufficient size to serve job meeting purposes. Provide janitorial service as required to keep the field office neat and clean. 2. Furnish, install and maintain storage sheds needed for construction. a. Dimensions and number of sheds: Per storage requirements of products. b. Ventilation: Meet specified, and code requirements for products stored. C. Heating: Maintain temperatures specified in respective specification sections for products stored. B. Requirements of regulatory agencies: 1. Comply with requirements of regulatory agencies having jurisdiction. 2. Obtain and pay for permits required by governing authorities, where applicable. C. Job conditions: 1. Locate temporary structures to avoid interfering with the work. 2. Relocate temporary structures as required by job progress. D. Removal: 1. Remove temporary field offices, and their contents, upon completion of the work. 2. Remove storage sheds when they are no longer needed. 3. Remove foundations, debris; grade to required elevations and clean area. E. Trailers may be used in lieu of the previously specified site -constructed field office and storage sheds. END OF SECTION C -SPECS TM/ CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES DFD ARCHITECTURE AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 01500-6 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas 1 GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 SECTION 01600 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT PART GENERAL 1.01 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver manufactured materials in the original packages, containers or bundles, with the seals unbroken, identified by the name and mark of the Manufacturer. B_ Deliver fabrications in as large assemblies as practicable. Fabrications specified to be shop -primed or shop -finished shall be packaged or crated as required to preserve such priming or finish intact and free from abrasion. C. Store materials in a manner to properly protect from damage. Materials or equipment damaged by handling, weather, dirt or other cause will not be acceptable. Comply with: 1. Material and equipment manufacturer's instructions regarding storage and temperature limitations. ■ 2. Other environmental conditions necessary to maintain the original quality of the materials and equipment. D. Store materials so as to cause no obstructions. Store off sidewalks, roadways, and underground services. The Contractor shall be responsible for protecting materials and equipment.furnished under the Contract. E. When a room in the Project is used as a shop or store room, the Contractor shall be responsible for all repairs, patching or cleaning necessary due to such use. Location of such storage space shall be subject to approval of the Architect and Owner. F. Remove all damaged or otherwise unsuitable material and equipment promptly from the site and dispose of it legally. Note the removal and disposal on a list at the field office, and replace with identical undamaged material at no additional cost to the Owner, as soon as possible to prevent delays incurred to the project schedule. 1.02 PROTECTION A. Protect finished surfaces, including jambs and soffits of openings used as passageways. B. Protect finished floor surfaces in traffic areas before moving material and equipment over these finished surfaces. C. Keep finished surfaces clean and unmarred until their acceptance. D. Refer to individual specification sections for additional specific protection requirements. 1.03 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS ,J• A. Whenever a product is specified by using a proprietary name or the name of a particular Manufacturer or Vendor, the specific item mentioned shall be understood as establishing ' type, function, dimension, appearance, and quality desired. Other manufacturers' products may be accepted provided sufficient information is submitted to allow the Architect and Owner to determine that products proposed are equivalent to those named. The Owner shall make the final decision on the acceptability of proposed substitutions. B. Contractor's Options: 1. For products specified only by reference standards, select any product meeting standards, by any manufacturer. 2. For products specified by several products or manufacturers, select any product manufacturer named. ' DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 01600-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26,1999 3. For products specified by one or more products, but indicating the option of selecting equivalent products by stating "or equal", "equal to", "or approved equal", or "equivalent to", Contractor must submit a written request, as required for substitutions , for any product not specifically named. C. All substitutions must be approved in writing by the'Owner and Architect. The Architect will consider written requests for substitutions from the Contractor that are received, in clear form, with a subcontract proposal. If subcontract proposals are accepted by the Owner, a written acceptance or rejection of the substitution shall be made by the Architect in each case. Requests received after that time will not be considered except for the following reasons: 1. Specified product discontinued. 2. Insufficient quantity, except that the following will not be considered as a valid cause for substitution: a. Failure to award subcontract in sufficient time, or failure to place orders for products in time to insure delivery without delaying the work. 3. Delays beyond Contractor's control, such as strikes, lockouts, storms, fires, or acts of God, which may prevent the delivery of specified products without delaying the work. 4. Other reason as the Owner may deem acceptable. D. Submit four (4) copies of requests for substitutions, to the Architect. Include in request: 1. Complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with contract documents. Lack of sufficient data for a fair comparison with specification requirements may be grounds for rejection of request. 2. For products: a. Product identification, include manufacturer's name and address. b. Manufacturer's literature including product description, performance and test data, and reference standards. C. Samples. d. Name and address of similar projects on which product was used, within the local vicinity of the project if possible, and date of their installation. 3. For construction methods: a. Detailed description of proposed method. b. Drawings illustrating methods. 4. Itemized comparison of proposed substitution with product or method specified. 5. Data relating to changes in construction schedule. 6. Accurate cost data on proposed substitution in comparison with product or method specified. 7. Relation to separate contracts, when applicable. E. Prior Approvals: Requests for substitutions will be considered when written request has been submitted to the Owner for approval at least 5 days prior to the date for receipt of bids. Each such request shall include all information requested below. If the Owner approves any proposed substitution, such approval shall be set forth in an Addendum. Requests for substitutions submitted after the date for receipt of bids will only be considered at Owner's discretion. F. Requests for approval of substitutions after award of a Contract shall be made only if the specified product is not available and shall be in the hands of the Architect a minimum of 7 days prior to date Contractor is required to place an order for the product. Contractor shall request approval of such substitution, in writing, to the Architect and the request shall specifically state the reason that the product is unavailable with evidence to substantiate the reason. Architect will approve or reject substitution in writing, and in such form as the Architect directs. Substitutions will not be considered if they are indicated or implied on Shop Drawings or if acceptance will require substantial revision to the Contract Documents. G. In submitting a substitution, the Contractor makes the following representations: 1. The proposed product is equal or superior in every respect to that specified. 2. The same warranty will be provided for the substitution as for the product specified. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 01600-2 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 3. Contractor will coordinate installation of the accepted substitution into the Work, making such changes as may be required for the Work. 4. Claims for additional costs related to the substitution which consequently become apparent will be waived. 5. Cost data is complete and includes related costs under the Contract but excludes costs under separate contracts and design consultant's redesign. H. Substitutions will not be considered if: 1. They are indicated or implied on shop drawings or project data submittals without formal request submitted in accordance with this specification section. 2. Acceptance will require substantial revision of the contract documents. 3. Review of the submitted data for substitution will require, in the view of the Architect, extensive additional research and coordination time on the part of the Architect to fairly compare with specified information, with lack of appreciable cost benefit to the project. 1.04 REIMBURSEMENT A. The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for costs of additional architectural services necessitated by substitutions, where determined by the Architect to be significant. END OF SECTION 1 DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 01600-3 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 _ SECTION 01732 CUTTING AND PATCHING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cutting, fitting and patching, including attendant excavation and backfill required to complete Work, and for: 1. Making several parts fit together properly. 2. Uncovering portions of Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work. 3. Removing and replacing work not conforming to the Architect's or Owner's interpretation of the Contract Documents. 4. Removing samples of installed Work required for testing. 5. Providing routine penetrations of non-structural surfaces for installation of piping and electrical conduit. B. In addition to contract requirements, upon written instructions of the Architect: 1. Uncover work to permit the Architect's observation of covered work. 2. Remove samples of installed materials for testing. C. Do not endanger any work by cutting or altering work or any part of it. 1.02 SUBMITTALS ' DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ CUTTING AND PATCHING DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 01732-1 A. In advance of executing any cutting or alterations, submit written request to Architect requesting consent to proceed with cutting which affects: 1. Work of Owner or other trades. 2. Structural value or integrity of any element of Project. 3. Integrity or effectiveness of weather -exposed or moisture -resistant elements or systems. 4. Efficiency, operational life, maintenance or safety of operational elements. 5. Visual qualities of sight -exposed elements. B. Include in request: 1. Identification of Project. 2. Description of affected Work. 3. Necessity for cutting, alteration or excavation. 4. Effect of Work of Owner or other trades, or structural or weatherproof integrity of Project. 5. Description of proposed Work: a. Scope of cutting, patching, alteration, or excavation. b. Trades which will execute Work. C. Products proposed to be used. d. Extent of refinishing to be done. - 6. Alternatives to cutting and patching. 7. Cost proposal, when applicable. 1 8. Written permission of trades whose Work will be affected. C. Submit written notice to Architect and Owner designating time Work will be uncovered to provide for observation. D. Submit cost estimate to Owner for approval before cutting and patching performed at the Architect's request. ' DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ CUTTING AND PATCHING DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 01732-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 E. Should conditions of work or schedule indicate change of materials or methods, submit written recommendations to the Architect, including: 1. Conditions indicating change. 2. Recommendations for alternative materials or methods. 3. Submittals as required for substitutions. 1.03 PAYMENT FOR COSTS A. Cost caused by ill-timed or defective Work or Work not conforming to Contract Documents, including costs for additional services of Architect, Owner and Engineer to be , paid by Contractor. B. Cost of Work done on written instructions of Architect, other than defective or nonconforming Work, will be paid by Owner on approval of written Change Order. Provide written cost proposals to Owner prior to proceeding with cutting and patching proposed by Architect. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide for replacement of Work removed. Comply with Contract Documents for type of Work standards and Specification requirements for each specific product involved. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Inspect existing conditions of Work, including elements subject to movement or damage during cutting and patching, and excavating and backfilling. After uncovering Work, inspect conditions affecting installation of new products and verify procedures with Architect. B. Report unsatisfactory or questionable conditions in writing to Arch itect/Engineer. Do not proceed with Work until receiving further instructions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide shoring, bracing and supports as required to maintain structural integrity of Work. B. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of Work from damage, including elements which may be exposed by cutting and patching Work. Maintain excavations free from water. 3.03 ERECTION, INSTALLATION AND APPLICATION A. Performance: 1. Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide finished installation to comply with and match specified tolerances and finishes. 2. Execute cutting and demolition by methods which prevent damage to other Work to provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repairs and new Work. 3. Execute excavating and backfilling by methods which prevent damage to other Work and settlement as specified in Section 02300. B. Employ original installer or fabricator to perform cutting and patching for: 1. Weather -exposed surfaces and moisture -resistant elements such as roofing, sheet metal, sealants and waterproofing. 2. Sight -exposed finished surfaces. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ CUTTING AND PATCHING DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 01732-2 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 C. Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide a finished installation to comply with specified products, functions, tolerances and finishes as shown on Drawings and as specified. D. Fit Work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit and other penetrations through surfaces. Conform to fire code requirements for penetrations and maintain integrity of fire walls and ceilings. E. Restore Work which has been cut or removed. Install new products to provide completed Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents and as required to match surrounding areas and surfaces. END OF SECTION DFD ARCHITECTURE DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 C -SPECS TM/ CUTTING AND PATCHING SECTION 01732-3 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 SECTION 01740 CLEANING PART GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: 1. Keep premises and public properties free from accumulations of waste, debris, and rubbish, caused by operations. 2. At completion of work, remove waste materials, rubbish, tools, equipment, machinery and surplus materials, and clean all exposed surfaces; leave project clean and ready for occupancy. 1.02 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS A. Standards: Maintain project in accordance with State safety and insurance standards. B. Hazards control: 1. Store volatile wastes in covered metal containers, and remove from premises daily. Do not retain volatile wastes over the weekend. 2. Prevent accumulation of wastes which create hazardous conditions. 3. Provide adequate ventilation during use of volatile or noxious substances. C. Conduct cleaning and . disposal operations to comply with local ordinances and anti- pollution laws which may apply. 1. Do not burn or bury rubbish and waste materials on the site. 2. Do not dispose of volatile wastes such as mineral spirits, oil, or paint thinner, etc., in storm or sanitary drains. 3. Drain oil and grease into appropriate containers and remove to a legal dumping site. Do not drain into storm or sanitary sewers. 4. Do not dispose of wastes into streams or waterways. 1■ PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Use only cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer of surface to be cleaned. B. Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by cleaning material manufacturer. 1 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Keep premises and public properties free from accumulations of waste materials and rubbish. B. Wet down materials and rubbish to lay dust and prevent it from blowing. C. At least once a week, or sooner if required, clean site and adjacent off-site areas including streets immediately south and east of the site, and dispose of waste materials, debris and rubbish off the site in a legal manner. Do not bury or bum waste materials at the site. 1 Remove combustible materials such as paper and cardboard daily. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/CLEANING ' DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 01740-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 D. Provide on-site containers for collection of waste materials, debris and rubbish. Provide a collection can at each location used as an eating area. Pick-up all garbage daily. E. Vacuum clean interior areas when ready to receive finish painting, and continue vacuum cleaning on an as -needed basis until building is ready for substantial completion or occupancy. F. Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. 3.02 FINAL CLEANING A. Employ experienced workmen, or professional cleaners, for final cleaning. B. In preparation for substantial completion, or occupancy, conduct final inspection of sight - exposed interior and exterior surfaces, and of concealed spaces. C. Remove grease, dust, dirt, stains, labels, fingerprints and other foreign materials from sight -exposed interior finished surfaces; polish bright surfaces to shine finish, taking exceptional care to avoid scratching from use of unacceptable, or abrasive m aterials. The Contractor will bear responsibility for costs of removal, replacement, and reinstallation of any finished work damaged during the final cleaning. D. Repair, patch and touch up marred surfaces to specked finish to match adjacent surfaces. Employ competent professionals to perform these repairs, as required for the original installation. Do not allow cleaning personnel unskilled in the proper methods to perform repairs. E. Broom clean paved surfaces; rake clean other surfaces of grounds. F. Keep project clean until it is occupied by the Owner. Final cleaning shall be completed to Owner's satisfaction. END OF SECTION DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/CLEANING DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 01740-2 1 1 1 1 GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 SECTION 01770 PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Contractor: 1. Submit written certification to the Architect that the project, or the designated portion of the project, is substantially complete, and has reached the state for which the Owner might then take beneficial occupancy. 2. Submit a list of major items to be completed and corrected. B. The Architect and the Owner, with the Contractor in attendance, will review the work within seven (7) days after receipt of certification and list of items to be completed and corrected. C. Should the Architect and Owner consider that the work is substantially complete: 1. The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a list of items to be completed or corrected ("punch list"), as determined by the review. 2. The Architect will advise the Owner when the Contractor's work is sufficiently complete so that the Owner may file and record a Notice of Completion thereby reducing the lien period to the time prescribed by law. The Notice of Completion shall be signed by the Owner and the Contractor, and shall be accompanied by the Contractor's list of items to be completed or corrected, as verified and amended by the Architect. 3. Owner occupancy of the project or designated portion of the project: a. The Contractor shall: 1) Obtain permission as required by the appropriate governing agencies to allow occupancy of the premises or designated portion thereof. 2) Perform final cleaning in accord with Section 01740, "Cleaning". b. The Owner will occupy the project in accordance with provisions of Article 9 of the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. 4. Contractor: Complete work listed for completion or correction, within a designated time period as agreed to with the Owner and Architect. D. Should the Architect or Owner consider that the work is not substantially complete: 1. He will notify the Contractor, in writing, stating reasons. 2. The Contractor shall then complete the work, and send a second written notice to the Architect, certifying that the project, or designated portion of the project, is substantially complete. 3. The Architect and the Owner, with the Contractor in attendance, will review the work within seven (7) days after their receipt of the certification. 1.02 FINAL REVIEW A. The Contractor shall submit written certification stating: 1. The contract documents have been reviewed. 2. The project has been inspected for compliance with the contract documents. 3. The work has been completed in accordance with the contract documents. 4. Equipment and systems have been tested in the Owner's presence, and are fully operational. 5. The project is completed and ready for its final review. B. The Architect and the Owner will make a final review of the work within seven (7) days after receipt of certification. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ PROJECT CLOSEOUT DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 01770-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas 1 PART GENERAL 1.01 COMPLETION OF WORK 1 1 1 1 GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 SECTION 01770 PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Contractor: 1. Submit written certification to the Architect that the project, or the designated portion of the project, is substantially complete, and has reached the state for which the Owner might then take beneficial occupancy. 2. Submit a list of major items to be completed and corrected. B. The Architect and the Owner, with the Contractor in attendance, will review the work within seven (7) days after receipt of certification and list of items to be completed and corrected. C. Should the Architect and Owner consider that the work is substantially complete: 1. The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a list of items to be completed or corrected ("punch list"), as determined by the review. 2. The Architect will advise the Owner when the Contractor's work is sufficiently complete so that the Owner may file and record a Notice of Completion thereby reducing the lien period to the time prescribed by law. The Notice of Completion shall be signed by the Owner and the Contractor, and shall be accompanied by the Contractor's list of items to be completed or corrected, as verified and amended by the Architect. 3. Owner occupancy of the project or designated portion of the project: a. The Contractor shall: 1) Obtain permission as required by the appropriate governing agencies to allow occupancy of the premises or designated portion thereof. 2) Perform final cleaning in accord with Section 01740, "Cleaning". b. The Owner will occupy the project in accordance with provisions of Article 9 of the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. 4. Contractor: Complete work listed for completion or correction, within a designated time period as agreed to with the Owner and Architect. D. Should the Architect or Owner consider that the work is not substantially complete: 1. He will notify the Contractor, in writing, stating reasons. 2. The Contractor shall then complete the work, and send a second written notice to the Architect, certifying that the project, or designated portion of the project, is substantially complete. 3. The Architect and the Owner, with the Contractor in attendance, will review the work within seven (7) days after their receipt of the certification. 1.02 FINAL REVIEW A. The Contractor shall submit written certification stating: 1. The contract documents have been reviewed. 2. The project has been inspected for compliance with the contract documents. 3. The work has been completed in accordance with the contract documents. 4. Equipment and systems have been tested in the Owner's presence, and are fully operational. 5. The project is completed and ready for its final review. B. The Architect and the Owner will make a final review of the work within seven (7) days after receipt of certification. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ PROJECT CLOSEOUT DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 01770-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 C. Should the Architect and the Owner consider the work is finally complete in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents, they will request the Contractor to make project closeout submittals. D. Should the Architect and the Owner consider that the work is not finally complete: 1. They will notify the Contractor, in writing, stating their reasons. 2. The Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy the stated deficiencies, and send a second written notice to the Architect certifying that the work is complete. 3. The Architect and the Owner, with the Contractor in attendance, will review the work within four (4) days after their receipt of the certification. 1.03 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following, with full indices: 1. Project record documents, per Section 01780, "Project Record Documents" 2. Operation and maintenance data (minimum 2 copies). 3. Warranties and bonds. 4. Keys and keying schedules. 5. Spare parts and maintenance materials. B. Deliver evidence of compliance with requirements of governing authorities: 1. Certificates of inspection for elevators, mechanical and electrical work, where applicable. 2. Proof of permission to occupy the premises from the agencies with jurisdiction. C. Deliver certificate of insurance for products and completed operations. 1.04 INSTRUCTION A. Instruct the Owner in the operation of all systems, mechanical, electrical and other equipment installed under the work. 1.05 EVIDENCE OF PAYMENTS AND RELEASE OF LIENS A. Submit Contractor's affidavit of payment of debts and claims and release of liens to the Architect. B. All submittals shall be duly executed before delivery to the Architect. r, 1.06 FINAL ADJUSTMENT OF ACCOUNTS A. Submit final statement of accounting to the Owner. B. Statement shall reflect all adjustments. 1. Original Contract Sum. 2. Additions and deductions resulting from changes to the authorized Contract Sum, in accordance with Article 7 of the General Conditions of Contract for Construction. 3. Total contract sum, as adjusted. 4. Previous payments. 5. Sum remaining due. C. Final Change Order shall reflect approved adjustments to the contract sum not previously ' made by Change Order. 1.07 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT A. Submit final application in accordance with contract requirements. ' END OF SECTION DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ PROJECT CLOSEOUT , DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 01770-2 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 SECTION 01780 ' GUARANTEESMARRANTIES i PART GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. In addition to other requirements of the contract documents regarding the guarantees/warranties, for certain work, as specified in the applicable sections of these specifications, on the following form written on the Contractor's own letterhead. The guarantees/warranties shall commence on the day of substantial completion of the work by the Owner: RE: GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG Date: . 1 We hereby warrant and the Contractor guarantees that the which we have installed in the work has been performed in accordance with the drawings and specifications and that the work as installed will fulfill the requirements of the guarantee/warranty included in the specifications. We agree to repair or replace any or all of our work, together with any or all other work which may be damaged or displaced by so doing, that may prove to be defective in its workmanship, materials, or failure to conform to contract provisions and requirements within years from the date of substantial completion of the Project by the Owner without expenses whatever to the said Owner, ordinary wear and tear and unusual abuse or neglect excepted. In the event of our failure to comply with the previously -mentioned conditions within thirty (30) days after being notified in writing by the Owner, we, collectively or separately, do hereby authorize the Owner to proceed to have said defects repaired and made good at our expense and we will honor and pay the costs and charges therefore upon demand. Signature of General ContractorlDate/Telephone Signature of Subcontractor/Date/Telephone 1 . END OF SECTION DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ GUARANTEE/WARRANTIES DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 01780-1 DFD ARCHITECTURE. C -SPECS TM/ PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 01790-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 SECTION 01790 ' PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART GENERAL' 1.01 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS A. Maintain at site, one copy of: 1. Contract drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. ' 4. Reviewed shop drawings, and other submittals. 5. Memorandum and change orders. 6. Field change authorizations and notices of clarification. 7. Other modifications to the Contract Documents. ' 8. Field test records. B. Provide files and racks for document storage. 1 C. Maintain documents in clean, dry, legible condition. D. Do not use record documents for construction purposes. E. Make documents available at all times for inspection by the Architect and the Owner's Representatives. 1.02 MARKING DEVICES A. Use a fine felt or nylon tip pen with waterproof colored ink for marking on the record documents. 1.03 RECORDING A. Clearly label each document "PROJECT RECORD". Contractor shall review Project record progress with Owner on a monthly basis. B. Keep record documents current. Record changes within 24 -hours after work in affected C. area is completed. Do not permanently conceal any work until the required information has been recorded. Work concealed prior to proper recording shall be uncovered, recorded, repaired and ' D. .replaced at no expense to the Owner. Contract drawings: Legibly mark to record the following: 1. Depths of various foundation elements. 1 2. Horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances referenced to permanent surface improvements. 3. Locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction referenced to visible and accessible features. 4. Field changes of dimensions and details. 1 5. Changes made by change order, field change authorization, or other instrument specific to this project. 6. Details not on the original contract documents. DFD ARCHITECTURE. C -SPECS TM/ PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 01790-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 E. Specifications and addenda: Legibly mark-up each section to record: 1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalogue number, and supplier of each product and item of equipment installed. 2. Changes made by change order, field change authorization and notice of clarification. 3. Other matters not originally specified. F. Shop drawings and other submittals: Maintain as record documents; legibly mark shop drawings and other submittals to record changes made after their approval. 1.04 SUBMITTAL A. Produce, at Contractor's expense, one set of full size xerox vellum reproducible copies of the record drawing documents noted above. B. Deliver reproducible Record Drawing documents and fully marked Specifications, all fully indexed, to the Owner upon completion of the Project. END OF SECTION DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 01790-2 r 1 11 fi 1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 SECTION 01830 MAINTENANCE MANUALS PART GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. General: Prepare all maintenance manuals and operating instructions when specified in various sections of these specifications. B. Bind the manuals and instructions in durable plastic binders as follows: 1. Identify the subject covered by the manual on the front cover. 2: Typewritten index near the front of the manual furnishing immediate information as to locations in the manual of all emergency data regarding the installation. 3. Complete instructions regarding operation and maintenance of all equipment involved, including but not limited to, start-up and shut -down procedures and safety precautions. 4. Complete nomenclature of all replaceable parts, their part numbers, current cost, and name and address of nearest vendor of parts. 5. Copy of all guarantees and warranties issued by the equipment manufacturers. 6. Copy of the approved shop drawings, as applicable to the content of the manual, with all data concerning changes made during construction. 7. Do not use sheets larger than 8 1/2" x 11", except that larger sheets may be used when folded to this size and used as a pullout. C. Extraneous data: Where contents of manuals. include the manufacturer's catalogue pages, clearly indicate the precise items included in this installation and delete, or otherwise clearly indicate, all manufacturer's data with which this installation is not concerned. D. Number of copies required: Unless otherwise specified, deliver one (1) copy of the manuals to the Owner. E. Provide Owner with summary index of all manuals and instructions required per these Specifications. END OF SECTION DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM//MAINTENANCE MANUALS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 01830-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 SECTION 02300 EARTHWORK PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY. A. Section Includes: 1. Site preparation and grading. 2. Building excavating and backfilling. 3. Trenching, backfilling and compacting for building and site utilities. 4. Excavation and grading for site paving, curbs and sidewalks . ' 5. Finish grading. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Native or natural soils: Undisturbed soils present at site in their natural state or conditions. Materials which are essentially free of vegetation or organic matter and do not include trash or other deleterious materials. B. Existing fill soils: Materials present at site that have been disturbed, possibly transported, and are not in their natural undisturbed state. C. Imported fill soils: Materials transported onto site. D. Finished Grade: Floor level for interior footings, and the lowest adjacent grade (either floor level or outside grade) within 5'-0" of foundations for perimeter wall or exterior column footings. E. Building Perimeter: The extreme outer edge of footing. This location of the building perimeter is to be used in determining the required lateral extent of engineered fill. F. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground ' services within building lines. 1.03 SUBMITTALS ' J A. Test Reports: 1. Submit test results for imported fill materials, if required, to be used directly to the testing laboratory with a copy to Architect in accordance with Section 01430. 2. Test results shall clearly indicate: a. Types of materials and composition. b. Hardness C. Compactability. d. Presence of organic contaminants, whether or not below EPA action levels. ., e. Presence of hazardous and/or regulated wastes and contaminants, whether or not below EPA action levels. f. Suitability for proposed usage. 3. Testing laboratory shall notify Architect of non -conforming fill material submittals. B. As -Built Drawings: 1. Maintain previously recorded utilities and accurately record location of: a. Newly encountered utilities remaining. b. Rerouted utilities. C. New utilities by horizontal dimensions, elevations or inverts, and slope gradients. 2. Submit in accordance with Section 01770. C. Product Data: Submit product data for each type of plastic warning tape. ' DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/EARTHWORK DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 02300-1 SASC Inc. ' Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable Federal, State and local ordinances. Where geotechnical report, General Structural Notes, or notes on drawings state more restrictive requirements, the requirements of the geotechnical report, General Structural Notes, or notes on drawings shall govern. B. Staking: Staking shall be performed by a Civil Engineer or Land Surveyor currently registered in the state where the Project is located. One person only shall be responsible for staking the Project, however, additional staff may be used (under direct supervision of responsible person) for larger projects. C. Observation of Geotechnical Engineer: Every phase of the earthwork shall be performed under observation and testing directed by the Geotechnical Engineer. 1.05 SITE CONDITIONS A. Soil Report: 1. Soil report provided by the Owner for design of this Project was prepared by Sladden Engineering; Is included as Document 00320 and is entitled: Geotechnical Investigation Greg Norman Golf Course, project number422-8133. 2. Neither the Owner or Architect guarantees the accuracy of the report nor the continuity of the soil conditions indicated at boring locations. 3. Portions of the soil report incorporated, either by reprint or reference, into these Specifications are those which relate to the quality of materials and workmanship and become a part of the Contract Documents. Quantities of excavation and fill materials shall be as indicated on Drawings, or as required by actual conditions as depicted by the soil borings presented in the Soil Report. B. Existing Conditions: 1. Bidders are expected to visit the site to form their own conclusions as to the character of the Work under this Section. 2. Due to previous site development, special attention shall be given to locating and removing existing subsurface remnants of former facilities, backfilled zones, and soils disturbed by demolition operations. C. Environmental Requirements: Place, spread or roll fill materials during favorable weather conditions. When the Work is interrupted by rain, do not resume fill operations until evidence is furnished which establishes that moisture content and density of the previously placed fill are as specified. 1. Surface drainage: Provide and maintain positive surface drainage during excavation. Prevent infiltration of water into utility or foundation excavations from whatever sources as may exist. 2. Dust control: Comply with requirements of governing authorities. Use whatever means necessary to control dust on and near the Work and on and near off-site borrow, storage and spoil areas, if such dust is caused by the Contractor's operations during performance of the Work, or if resulting from the conditions in which the Contractor leaves the site. Thoroughly moisten surfaces as required to prevent dust being a nuisance to the public, neighbors, and concurrent performance of other Work on the site. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Fill Soil: Existing native soils at the site are suitable for use as engineered fill material below building and paved areas providing that vegetation and debris are removed. Wet soils shall be either dried to near optimum moisture content or mixed with drier soils prior to placement and compaction in accordance with Soils Report. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/EARTHWORK DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 02300-2 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 B. Imported fill materials: 1. Clean, free of: ' a. Vegetation. b. Organic contaminants. C. Debris. d. Oversized material. e. Hazardous and/or regulated wastes and contaminates. 2. The gradation of imported engineering fill material is determined by ASTM C136, and shall be within the following limits: ' Sieve Size Percent Passing (Square Openings) By Dry Weight 6 inches 100 No. 200 50 max. 3. Material shall have a plasticity index of no more than 10 when tested in accordance with ASTM D4318. ' C. Under -Slab Fill: 1. Fill directly under slabs -on -grade shall be granular base having gradation as determined by ASTM C136 within the following limits: Sieve Size Percent Passing (Square Openings) By Dry Weight ' 1-1/8" 100 No. 4 38-65 No. 8 25-60 No. 30 10-40 No. 200 3-12 2. The material shall have a maximum plasticity index of 5 when tested in accordance with ASTM D4318. The coarse aggregate shall have a percent of wear when subjected to the Los Angeles Abrasion Test (ASTM C131) of no greater than 50. D. Backfill: Material excavated from the site, provided it is free of debris or vegetation. E. Pipe Bedding Fill: Granular material containing no pieces larger than 1-1/2 inches and free of broken concrete, broken pavement, wood or other deleterious material. Open graded rock shall not be used. F. Warning Tape: 1. Acid- and alkali -resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for ' marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility. 2. Provide detectable warning tape with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 2'-6" deep for non-metallic utility pipes, conduit or other underground services outside of building line. .3. Tape Colors: Provide tape colors to utilities as follows: a. Red: Electric. ' b. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials. C. Orange: Telephone and other communications. d. Blue: Water systems. e. Green: Sewer systems. LJ DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/EARTHWORK DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 02300-3 SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION t GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ' ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 A. Verify survey data. Stake out work and verify as to location and elevation. Carefully maintain bench marks, monuments, and other reference points; if disturbed or destroyed, replace as directed. B. Strip and remove structural remnants, existing fill, vegetation, debris, loose soil, etc., from the building site. Thoroughly clean and widen depressions to accommodate compaction equipment. C. Building areas shall be overexcavated as follows: 1. Golf Clubhouse Area: To a depth of at least 5 feet below existing grade or 5 feet below the bottom of the footings, whichever is deeper. 2. Maintenance Building Area: To a depth of at least 4 feet below existing grade or 5 feet below pad grade, whichever is deeper. D. Scarify, moisten and compact exposed subgrade in the excavations to a depth of 6 inches. Fill material needed to raise and level the building site shall be Fill soil as specified herein. E. At paved areas scarify and compact the existing surface soils to a 6 inch (150mm) depth. F. Existing Utilities: 1. Identify known below grade utilities. Stake and flag locations. 2. Identify and flag above grade utilities. 3. Maintain, re-route, extend and protect as required existing utilities remaining which pass through Work area as indicated. Utilities which are discovered during the course of construction which are unrecorded on Contract Documents shall be brought to the attention of the Architect immediately upon discovery. 4. Notify utility company to remove and relocate utilities obstructing the Work. 5. Upon discovery of unknown utility or concealed conditions, discontinue affected Work; notify Architect. 6. Pay costs for this Work, except that covered by utility company. 3.02 SUBGRADE A. Prepare subgrade at building areas to proper elevation to receive under -slab fill and sand layer over subgrade barrier membrane. See Section 03300. B. Prepare subgrade at paved areas to proper elevation to receive base course materials. C. Grade as required to bring entire remainder of site to finished grade as indicated on drawings. 3.03 EXCAVATION - GENERAL A. Excavate for foundations and footings to provide vertical walls and corners square. Keep entire excavation free from loose material. Conform to dimensions and elevations indicated with allowances for erection of forms, shoring, waterproofing, and inspection of footings. B. Material to be excavated shall be non -classified and shall include earth or other materials encountered in excavating. C. The use of explosives will not be permitted. D. Drawings show predetermined elevations or depths for bottoms of footings. Should additional depth of excavation be necessary, the Contractor will be paid for the Work in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions. E. Shore and brace excavations if necessary to prevent cave-ins. Remove shoring before backfilling is completed, but not until permanent supports are in place. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/EARTHWORK DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 02300-4 i� SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 F. If excavation is carried below depth indicated, backfilling will not be permitted except ' under floor slabs. Increase foundation depth as required and place backfill below floor slabs (material as specified) without extra compensation. G. Place excess excavated material on the site in the area designated or as directed by ' Architect. H. Protect utility services uncovered by excavation. 1. Remove abandoned utility service lines from areas of excavation; cap, plug or seal such lines and identify at grade. 2. Accurately locate and record abandoned and active utility lines rerouted or extended, on Project Record Documents. 3.04 EXCAVATION - UTILITIES A. Trenching: 1. General: a. Perform trenching required for the installation of items where the trenching is not specifically described in other Sections of these Specifications. b. Excavate for underground utilities, including water, steam, condensate, ' natural gas pipe lines, fire protection lines, sewers, electrical lines, 2. Width: cables, ducts and other electrical items. a. Make trenches open vertical construction with sufficient width to provide ' free working space at both sides of the trench and around the installed item as required for caulking, joining, backfilling, and compacting. b. Provide for a minimum net clearance of 6 inches and a maximum net clearance of 12 inches on each side of the barrel of the pipe and to allow ' the backfill to be placed and properly compacted. Exceptions to these clearances will occur at encasement or special construction. 3. Depth: a. Trench as required to provide the elevations shown on the Drawings. b. Where elevations are not shown on the Drawings or specified in other sections of the specifications, trench to sufficient depth to give a minimum of 18" of fill above the top of the pipe, measured from the adjacent finished grade. ' C. Where the bottom of excavation is found to be soft and cannot support the pipe, the depth shall be extended until solid bearing is reached. Backfill to pipe foundation grade with granular material or earthfill and thoroughly compact to assure a firm foundation for the pipe. d. Where excavation is in rock, or caliche, cut to depth of at least 8 inches below pipe invert elevations. 4. Trench Bottoms: a. Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and ' support of pipes and conduit. b. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. C. Remove stones and sharp objects to avoid point loading. ' d. For pipes or conduit less than 6 inches in nominal diameter and flat-bottomed, multiple -duct conduit units, hand -excavate trench bottoms and support pipe and conduit on an undisturbed subgrade. e. For pipes and conduit 6 inches or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of trench to support bottom 90 degrees of pipe circumference. Fill depressions with tamped sand backfill. 5. Do not disturb any portion of or remove support from a piping system that has thrust blocks or other constraints against movement while the system is in ' service. 6. Correction of faulty grades: Where trench excavation is inadvertently carried below proper elevations, backfill with pipe bedding material and compact to provide a firm and unyielding subgrade or foundation without additional compensation. ' DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/EARTHWORK DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 02300-5 , SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 ' 7. Trench bracing: a. Properly brace and support trenches in accordance with requirements of governing authorities. b. Brace, sheet, and support trench walls in such a manner that the ground , alongside the excavation will not slide or settle, and that existing improvements of every kind, whether on public or private property, will be protected from damage. C. Arrange bracing, sheeting, and shoring so as not to place stress on ' portions of the completed Work until the general construction thereof has proceeded far enough to provide sufficient strength. 8. Repairs and replacement: In the event of damage to such improvements, immediately make repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the ' Architect without additional compensation. 9. Removal of trench bracing: Exercise care in the drawing and removal of sheeting, shoring, bracing, and timbering to prevent collapse and caving of the excavation faces being supported. ' 10. Grading and stockpiling trenched material: Control the stockpiling of trenched material in a manner to prevent water running into the excavations. Do not obstruct surface drainage, but provide means whereby storm water is diverted into existing gutters, other surface drains, or temporary drains. ' B. Crossing Protection 1. Provide adequate temporary crossover for pedestrian and vehicular traffic including guard rails, lamps and flags, as required by agencies having jurisdiction ' and as directed. 2. Remove provisions for crossing protection when they are no longer needed. C. Underpinning: Where excavation work is required under or adjacent to existing footings, ' under -pin as required to prevent damaging existing construction. 3.05 FOUNDATION FOR PIPES ' A. General: Grade the trench bottoms to provide a smooth, firm, and stable foundation free from rockpoints throughout the length of the pipe. B. Foundation material: Place a minimum of 6" of the specified pipe bedding fill material in ' the bottom of the trench. C. Subsurface conditions: In areas where soft, unstable materials are encountered at the surface upon which cohesionless material is to be placed, remove the unstable material ' and replace it with material approved by the Architect. Make sufficient depth to develop a firm foundation for the item being installed. D. Overexcavation: If the need for such overexcavation has been occasioned by an act or ' failure to act on the part of the Contractor, make the overexcavation and replacement without additional compensation. E. Bearing: At each joint in pipe, recess the bottom of the trench as required into the firm , foundation in such a manner as to relieve the bell of the pipe of all load and to ensure continuous bearing of the pipe barrel on the firm foundation. F. Shaping: Accurately shape pipe subgrade and fit the bottom of the trench to the pipe ' shape. Use a drag template shaped to conform to the outer surface of the pipe if other methods do not produce satisfactory results. 3.06 BEDDING FOR PIPES , A. General: Place the specified pipe bedding fill material in the trench, simultaneously on each side of the pipe for the full width of the trench, to a maximum depth of 3 feet and a minimum depth of one foot above the outside diameter of the pipe barrel. Water , consolidation shall not be allowed B. Densification: Take special care to provide firm bedding support on the underside of the pipe and fittings for the full length of the pipe. ' DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/EARTHWORK DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 02300-6 , ' SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ' ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 C. Alternate bedding: Other bedding procedures and materials may be used if prior written ' approval has been obtained from the Civil Engineer through the Architect. 3.07 UNDER -SLAB FILL A. Place under -slab fill to the thickness and grade indicated, smooth and even, free of voids. ' Compact to specified density. Grade to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 10 feet. 3.08 BACKFILLING - GENERAL ' A. After completion of the foundations, walls and other construction, and removal of forms, clean the excavations of trash and debris. B. Place the backfill symmetrically against each side of the walls to prevent eccentric loading. Place backfill in horizontal 6 inch layers with the proper moisture content for the required degree of compaction. C. Backfill pipe and conduit trenches in a manner to prevent disturbance to the pipes or ' conduits. Fill under and around pipes thoroughly to a point approximately 12 inches above the top of the pipe and compact. Backfill remainder of trench in 6 inch layers and compact. ' 3.09 BACKFILLING - UTILITIES A. Backfill pipe and conduit trenches in a manner to prevent disturbance to the pipes or conduits. Fill under and around pipes thoroughly to a point approximately 12 inches above the top of the pipe and compact. Backfill remainder of trench in 6 inch layers and compact. B. Backfilling prior to approvals: Do not allow or cause portions of the work performed or installed to be covered up or enclosed by work of this Section prior to required ' inspections. Should any of the work be so enclosed or covered up before it has been inspected, uncover such work at no additional compensation. C. Backfill simultaneously on both sides of utility to prevent displacement. D. Concrete backfill trenches that carry below or pass under footings and that are excavated within 18 inches of footings. Place concrete to level of bottom of footings. E. Provide 4 -inch -thick concrete base slab support for piping or conduit less than 2'-6" below surface of roadways. After installation and testing, completely encase piping or conduit in a minimum of 4 inches of concrete before backfilling or placing roadway subbase. F. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs. ' 3.10 COMPACTION A. Compacting of fills and foundation soils shall be in horizontal lifts not exceeding 8 inches ' B: in thickness. Compaction of under -slab fill and backfill shall be in horizontal lifts not exceeding 6 inches in thickness. 1 C. Compaction of the materials in the various areas of the Project shall be in accordance with ASTM D1557-91 and accomplished to the density criteria specified in the Soils Report. D. Compaction of soils with clay content (P.I. over 7) shall have a moisture content between optimum minus 2 and optimum plus 4 percent. E. Soil disturbed during construction shall be compacted to the applicable percent ' compaction as specified herein. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/EARTHWORK DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 02300-7 ' 1 DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/EARTHWORK DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 02300-8 ' ' SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 ' F. Utilize mechanical compaction equipment in grading operations. In no case shall water settling or "jetting" be employed. Vibratory compaction equipment employed shall be subject to the approval of the Architect to ensure that vibrations will not be created that , will affect existing construction or slopes. 3.11 FINISH GRADING A. After construction and final clean-up of exterior, and removal of debris, grade building site to slopes and elevations directed. B. Leave graded areas raked smooth. , C. Remove excess material from the site. D. At areas designated as lawn, place topsoil to a depth of 2 inches and grade to within a ' tolerance of 0.10 foot to required elevations. E. At areas designated as planting or planters, place topsoil to a depth of 12 inches to required elevations. ' 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Earthwork, footings depths, and excavations for foundations shall be inspected by the ' Geotechnical Engineer to verify allowable soil bearing and low settlement and swell potential, and to make any additional recommendations. B. Tests: Inspection and testing of earthwork shall be performed by a testing laboratory in ' accordance with Section 0143. 1. Provide free access to Work and cooperate with appointed firm. 2. Tests of materials may be performed to ensure conformance with specified requirements. 3. Provide one field density test of under -slab fill for every 2,000 square feet of building area. 4. Provide two field density tests of backfill at locations and elevations directed. 5. Provide one field density test of prepared subgrade for every 2000 square feet of ' site area. 6. Soil compaction which does not meet the specified requirements shall be recompacted and reworked as directed by the Geotechnical Engineer through the Architect. ' 3.13 PROTECTION A. Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion, keep areas free of trash and debris. ' Repair and establish grades in any areas settled, rutted or eroded. END OF SECTION , 1 DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/EARTHWORK DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 02300-8 ' 1 [l 1 11 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 SECTION 02360 SOIL TREATMENT PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pretreatment to provide chemical barrier to protect buildings and contents against attack by subterranean termites. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit label indicating Manufacturer's chemical analysis of treatment materials prior to application. Submit evidence of EPA approval and State registration. B. Test Reports: Submit reports of field tests for termite treatment. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Registered applicator with 5 years experience and licensed by the applicable agency in the state where the project is located. B. Regulatory Requirements: Chemicals shall be approved for use and registered by Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and the applicable agency in the state where the project is located. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING ' A. Conform to Manufacturer's instructions and Governmental Agencies' requirements. B. Deliver materials to Project in original sealed and labeled containers of Manufacturer. 1.05 SITE CONDITIONS A. Do not apply chemicals in inclement weather or when there is a possibility of rain. ' 1.06 WARRANTY 1 1 A. Upon completion of soil treatment, and as a condition of final acceptance, provide Owner with written unlimited warranty providing: 1. Application was made at concentration, rate, and method in compliance with Specifications contained herein. 2. Warrants effectiveness of the soil treatment against subterranean termite infestation for a period of not less than 5 years from acceptance and completion date of Project. B. Upon evidence of subterranean termite activity within warranty period, re -treat area to stop infestation of affected areas and repair damage to building and contents at no cost to Owner. 1. Re -treatment under warranty sufficient to prevent termites from attacking building or its contents during remainder of initial warranty period, plus one additional year for each time re -treatment under warranty is required. 2. Complete re -treatment of the building shall be as specified herein and shall be rendered upon the third recurrence of subterranean termites in the same structure within 5 year period from the date of project acceptance. 3. Damage caused by infestations and by re -treatment shall be repaired at no cost to the Owner. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS rm/SOIL TREATMENT DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 02360-1 A. Termite Treatment: Apply one of the following chemicals as a water emulsion (no oil solutions ' permitted): 1. Dragnet FT (Permethrin), FMC Corporation. 2. Torpedo (Permethrin); ICI Americas, Inc. 3. Biflex TC (3rd generation synthetic pyrethroid), FMC Corporation 4. Prelude (Permethrin); Zeneca Professional Products, Wilmington DE 5. Prevail FT (Cypermethrin); FMC Corporation B. Mix solutions in accordance with Manufacturer's directions to highest concentration allowable I by label. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION - TERMITE CONTROL A. Time of Application: 1. Notify Architect to be present during application, at least 24 hours prior to application of materials. 2. Apply chemical treatment during normal working hours in order to be subject to observation. 3. Do not treat soil and fill areas that are excessively wet or after heavy rains to avoid surface flow of toxicants. B. Application: In accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations, local codes and U.S Department of Agriculture Forest Service Home and Garden Bulletin 64, revised 1986. 1. Provide applicator trucks with approved measuring flow meters. 2. Apply chemicals on soils and compacted ABC fill materials under entire subsurfaces of concrete floor slabs in minimum quantities stated on label. a. Under slabs on grade. b. Along exterior perimeter of slab, apply in strip one foot wide. C. Apply at basement slab next to perimeter in a strip one foot wide. d. Foundation walls of structures with crawl spaces: Apply from finished grade to top of footings in a strip one foot wide on exterior with 1/2 of application near level of top of footings before any backfill is placed and remainder just below finished grade. e. Applied adjacent to interior side of foundation of buildings. f. Applied beneath sidewalk(s), entrance(s) and other slab(s) abutting the structure for a distance not less than X-0" extending from and adjacent to the building 3. Apply a strip one foot wide along interior and exterior sides of foundation stem walls. 4. Provide treatment on both sides of interior partitions where slab has been thickened or at stem foundation walls. 5. Treat expansion and cold joints, and other areas where concrete slabs will be penetrated by plumbing mechanical, electrical or other construction features. 6. Treat interior cell voids within concrete masonry unit (CMU) foundation walls and piers below floor line and apply with emulsion type treatment that will adhere to interior surfaces of block cavities. 7. Vertical barriers shall be established around the base of foundations, plumbing lines, foundation walls, along expansion/contraction and cold joints, at slab penetrations and wherever required by the manufacturer's instructions. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/SOIL TREATMENT ' DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 02360-2 ' SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 ' C. Draft warranty in favor of Owner, successors or assigns. 1. Pre-printed FHA or VA guarantee forms shall not be acceptable. 2. The Owner and the applicator reserve the option to renew termite protection on ' an annual basis after the expiration of the warranty. PART PRODUCTS ' 2.01 MATERIALS A. Termite Treatment: Apply one of the following chemicals as a water emulsion (no oil solutions ' permitted): 1. Dragnet FT (Permethrin), FMC Corporation. 2. Torpedo (Permethrin); ICI Americas, Inc. 3. Biflex TC (3rd generation synthetic pyrethroid), FMC Corporation 4. Prelude (Permethrin); Zeneca Professional Products, Wilmington DE 5. Prevail FT (Cypermethrin); FMC Corporation B. Mix solutions in accordance with Manufacturer's directions to highest concentration allowable I by label. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION - TERMITE CONTROL A. Time of Application: 1. Notify Architect to be present during application, at least 24 hours prior to application of materials. 2. Apply chemical treatment during normal working hours in order to be subject to observation. 3. Do not treat soil and fill areas that are excessively wet or after heavy rains to avoid surface flow of toxicants. B. Application: In accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations, local codes and U.S Department of Agriculture Forest Service Home and Garden Bulletin 64, revised 1986. 1. Provide applicator trucks with approved measuring flow meters. 2. Apply chemicals on soils and compacted ABC fill materials under entire subsurfaces of concrete floor slabs in minimum quantities stated on label. a. Under slabs on grade. b. Along exterior perimeter of slab, apply in strip one foot wide. C. Apply at basement slab next to perimeter in a strip one foot wide. d. Foundation walls of structures with crawl spaces: Apply from finished grade to top of footings in a strip one foot wide on exterior with 1/2 of application near level of top of footings before any backfill is placed and remainder just below finished grade. e. Applied adjacent to interior side of foundation of buildings. f. Applied beneath sidewalk(s), entrance(s) and other slab(s) abutting the structure for a distance not less than X-0" extending from and adjacent to the building 3. Apply a strip one foot wide along interior and exterior sides of foundation stem walls. 4. Provide treatment on both sides of interior partitions where slab has been thickened or at stem foundation walls. 5. Treat expansion and cold joints, and other areas where concrete slabs will be penetrated by plumbing mechanical, electrical or other construction features. 6. Treat interior cell voids within concrete masonry unit (CMU) foundation walls and piers below floor line and apply with emulsion type treatment that will adhere to interior surfaces of block cavities. 7. Vertical barriers shall be established around the base of foundations, plumbing lines, foundation walls, along expansion/contraction and cold joints, at slab penetrations and wherever required by the manufacturer's instructions. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/SOIL TREATMENT ' DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 02360-2 r SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 8. If the above specified method(s) of treatment are not possible, rodding and trenching may be used only under the observation(s) of the Architect, and if rodding and trenching is approved by the Architect prior to proceeding. Rodding and trenching shall extend from the finished floor to the top of the footings and special care shall be taken not to disturb applied waterproofing or other buried facilities. Rodding and trenching applications shall be done in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. C. Do not disturb aggregate base course and treated soil between application of poison and pouring of concrete. ' 1. Re -treat soil or compacted fill which has been disturbed after soil poisoning, due to plumbing and electrical changes or omissions. 2. Should rainy weather occur prior to pouring concrete slab over treated ABC, re- treat the complete area at the discretion of Architect, and at no additional cost to Owner. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests: Chemical analysis tests shall be made of materials used on the basis of one test for each 10,000 square feet of treated area. Samples and test may be taken of both concentrates and the dilute materials as being applied. See Section 01430 for provisions covering payment for testing. ' 3.03 PROTECTION A. Adjacent property, trees and plants shall be protected from injury and damage as result of operations in this Section. END OF SECTION 1 C n 1 El 11 DFD ARCHITECTURE DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 C -SPECS TM/SOIL TREATMENT SECTION 02360-3 ' A. Manufacturer's literature: Submit manufacturer's literature, showing product data, including test reports, certificates, and installation instructions. B. Samples: Submit two samples of each paver indicated on the Drawings to be supplied on the Project. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer qualifications: Materials, preparation and installation shall conform to NCMA Standards as listed and the detailed installation of the material manufacturer insofar as applicable. B. Installer Qualifications: The firm executing the Work of this Section shall have 5 years experience in work of similar scope and nature to that specified. C. The firm executing the Work of this Section shall design and engineer the base course to ' withstand an ASSHTO H2O wheel loading so that their will be no wheel tracking depressions in the concrete paver surface. D. Mock-up: Provide 10'-0" x 10'-0" mock-up sample laid up in the field for pattern approval. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Acceptance: Concrete pavers shall be delivered and unloaded at the job site on pallets and bound in such a manner that no damage occurs to the product during hauling, handling or unloading. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Specification is based on products manufactured by Pavestone Supply Company, Inc., ' Phoenix, AZ. - DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/CONCRETE PAVERS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 02515-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 SECTION 02515 CONCRETE PAVERS PART GENERAL ' 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Interlocking concrete pavers over sand laying course as shown on ' Drawings and as specified herein. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM: ' 1. C 33-93 - Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 2. C 67-94a - Test Methods of Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile. 3. C 131-89 - Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small -Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine. ' 4. C 136-95a - Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. 5. C 140-94a Method of Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units. 6. C 150-95 - Specification for Portland Cement. 7. C 936-82 (1988) - Specification for Solid Concrete Interlocking Paving Units. 8. D 4318-93 - Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils. - B. National Concrete Masonry Association (NCMA): 1. TEK 11-2 - Pavement Construction with Interlocking Concrete Pavers 1.03 SUBMITTALS ' A. Manufacturer's literature: Submit manufacturer's literature, showing product data, including test reports, certificates, and installation instructions. B. Samples: Submit two samples of each paver indicated on the Drawings to be supplied on the Project. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer qualifications: Materials, preparation and installation shall conform to NCMA Standards as listed and the detailed installation of the material manufacturer insofar as applicable. B. Installer Qualifications: The firm executing the Work of this Section shall have 5 years experience in work of similar scope and nature to that specified. C. The firm executing the Work of this Section shall design and engineer the base course to ' withstand an ASSHTO H2O wheel loading so that their will be no wheel tracking depressions in the concrete paver surface. D. Mock-up: Provide 10'-0" x 10'-0" mock-up sample laid up in the field for pattern approval. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Acceptance: Concrete pavers shall be delivered and unloaded at the job site on pallets and bound in such a manner that no damage occurs to the product during hauling, handling or unloading. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Specification is based on products manufactured by Pavestone Supply Company, Inc., ' Phoenix, AZ. - DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/CONCRETE PAVERS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 02515-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 2.02 MATERIALS A. Concrete pavers: In accordance with ASTM C 936 and as follows. 1. Holland Stone as manufactured by Superlite Block, Inc. 2. Size: 4 inches x 8 inches. 3. Thickness: 60 mm. 4. Color: To be selected by Architect 5. Finish: As selected by Architect. 6. Composition: a. Portland cement: ASTM C 150 b. Aggregates: ASTM C 33 for Normal Weight Concrete Aggregate (no expanded shale or lightweight aggregates), except that grading requirements shall not necessarily apply. C. Admixture: Accelerating plasticizer and integral water repellant, Paver Plus, as manufactured by Addiment, Doraville, GA. 7. Physical properties: a. Compressive strength: Average compressive strength shall not be less than 8,000 psi with no individual unit strength less than 7,200 psi, with testing procedures in accordance with ASTM C 140 b. Absorption: The average absorption shall not be greater than 5% with no individual unit absorption greater than 7%. C. Permissible Variations in Dimension: Length or width of units shall not differ by more than +1/16" from approved samples. Heights of units shall not differ by more than +1/8" from standard specified dimensions. d. Joint Spacer Bars: Provide one 1/16" spacer bar per vertical face to facilitate a uniform nominal 1/8" joint dimension upon installation. e. Efflorescence: Units shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C 67 and shall have no efflorescence. 8. Method of Manufacturing: a. Individual layers on production pallets. b. Produce a homogeneous matrix in the produced unit (face mix/surface mix product not allowed.) B. Aggregate base course: Clean mineral aggregate with particle size grading within limits as determined by ASTM C 136. Plasticity index of the fraction of material passing the No. 40 sieve should be nonplastic when tested by ASTM D 4318. Coarse aggregate should have a percent of wear, when subjected to the Los Angeles abrasion test (ASTM C 131), of no greater than 40. C. Sand laying course: Clean washed Concrete sand or similar with 100% passing a 3/8" sieve and a maximum of 2% passing a No. 200 sieve, containing no more than 10% of acid soluble material. D. Joint filling sand: Clean washed sand with 100% passing a No. 4 sieve and a maximum of 5-10% passing a No. 200 sieve, containing no more than 10% of acid soluble material. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Subgrade Base: 1. Compacted fill beneath aggregate base course, including recompacted existing fill and backfill shall be minimum 90% compaction. 2. Compact the aggregate base course to a minimum 95% compaction. 3. Shape to grade and cross section with an allowable tolerance of 0-1/4" (5mm) within a 10'-0" straight edge. 4. The compacted base shall be the thickness of the paver, plus one inch, below final grade. B. Concrete Slab: Cracks, voids and honeycombs shall be patched with a non- shrinking, quick -setting grout and allowed to cure. Cut off high spots and grind smooth. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/CONCRETE PAVERS DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 02515-2 3.03 ADJUSTING & CLEANING A. Adjusting: Adjust any misaligned or out of level pavers by removing and resetting to the correct position. B. Cleaning: Upon completion of this portion of the work, wash down and clean exposed portions to provide a clean finished installation. END OF SECTION t ' DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/CONCRETE PAVERS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 02515-3 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG t ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 C. Surface preparation: In accordance with NCMA TEK 11-2 and as follows: 1. Spread the sand evenly over the area to be paved. 2. Screed the sand to a level that shall produce a one inch thickness when the paving stone have been placed and vibrated. 3. Pull a striking board over the screeds, several times and reseed low porous spots with additional sand to produce a smooth, firm and even setting bed. 4. Provide the proper level of sand such that the final elevation of paving stone shall be nominally 1/4" to 3/8"higher than the adjacent curb, gutters, or other paving to allow for free drainage from chamfers on block edges. 5. Do not disturb the sand laying course once screeding and leveling to the desired ' elevation is achieved. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Placement: In accordance with NCMA TEK 11-2 and as follows: 1. Pattern shall be as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Pavers shall be placed in such a manner that the desired pattern is maintained and the joints between the pavers are nominally 1/8" with no individual gap exceeding 3/16". 3. Use string lines to hold pattern true. Lines shall not deviate more than +1/2 of an inch in 100 linear feet. 4. Gaps at the edge of the paver surface shall be filled with standard pavers or with pavers cut to fit. 5. Alternately selected pavers from at least 3 pallets, working from top to bottom of each pallet stack. B. Cutting: 1. No pavers shall be installed which are less than 1/3 of the original unit's surface area. 2. The cutting of pavers, using a doubleheaded breaker or a masonry saw shall leave a maximum 1/4" underbite. 3. Masonry saw shall be used when cutting Precision designed area(s). C. Compaction and Joint Filling: 1. Vibrate pavers into the sand laying course using a vibrator capable of 3,000 to 5,000 pounds compaction force with the surface clean and the joints open. 2. After vibration, joint filling sand shall be spread over the paving stone surface, allowed to dry, and vibrated into the joints with additional vibrator passes and ' brushing so as to completely fill the joints. 3. Surplus material shall be swept from the surface. 3. Surplus material shall be left on the surface during construction to ensure complete filling of joints during initial use and to provide surface protection from construction debris. Sweep surface just prior to Owner occupancy. D. The finished elevation of pavers shall not deviate more than 1/4" within a 10'-0" straightedge. E. Provide additional sanding of paver joints for a period of 90 days after completion of work. 3.03 ADJUSTING & CLEANING A. Adjusting: Adjust any misaligned or out of level pavers by removing and resetting to the correct position. B. Cleaning: Upon completion of this portion of the work, wash down and clean exposed portions to provide a clean finished installation. END OF SECTION t ' DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/CONCRETE PAVERS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 02515-3 1 SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 SECTION 02765 PAVEMENT MARKINGS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Traffic marking and striping for pavement and curbs as shown on Drawings. 1.02 SUBMITTALS ' A. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's specifications for paint. t DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS rm/PAVEMENT MARKINGS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 02765-1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Traffic Surface Paint: Provide one of following or as approved. ' 1. Dunn -Edwards: Vin -L -Stripe W8D1 Series acrylic latex. 2. Sherwin-Williams: Acrylic Waterborne Traffic Marking Paint. 3. Sinclair: 160. B. 4. Frazee: 502 Traffic Line Paint - Acrylic. Colors: As follows: 1. Stall Striping and Traffic Markings: Traffic White 2. Handicap Markings: Traffic Blue 3. Fire Lanes: Red PART 3 EXECUTION ' 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Prepare chalk layout and obtain Architect's approval prior to start of marking and striping. ' 3.02 PREPARATION A. Thoroughly clean surfaces of substances which may inhibit bonding. 3.03 _ APPLICATION A. Apply paint with equipment suited for that purpose in accordance with Manufacturer's tdirections. B. Paint lines straight and true to pattern layout. Correct errors by sandblasting. Apply two coat minimum or more if required to obtain complete opacity. Dry film thickness: 8 mils ' minimum. C. Stall Divisions: Provide .between standard size parking stalls, a single 4 inch wide stripe, stall width as shown on Drawings. D. Arrows and Pavement Signs: Paint directional arrows with stencils or other approved method. Strokes of letters, islands and "No Parking" areas to have 3 inch wide strips. ' E. Handicap Stalls: Provide symbol and other markings as approved by Architect. F. Fire Lanes: Provide red painted curbs as required. G. Protect completed Work until dry. END OF SECTION t DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS rm/PAVEMENT MARKINGS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 02765-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 SECTION 02821 ' CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES PART GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's data for fencing and gate materials, including details of construction and concrete footings. B. Certificates: Submit certification from Manufacturer that galvanizing and coatings conform to the requirements in this Section. PART PRODUCTS ' 2.01 MATERIALS A. Chain Link Fabric: 1. ASTM A392, fabricated with 0.148 inch (9 gauge) nominal uncoated wire diameter woven in a 2 inch diamond mesh. 2.. Top and bottom edges shall have a knuckled finish. 3. Fabric shall be continuous width for full height of fence. 4. Splicing of fabric for fence height shall not be permitted. 5. Hot -dip galvanize before fabrication. 6. Height: As indicated on drawings. B. Posts: Type I shall be Schedule 40 steel pipe conforming to ASTM F1083 or Type II shall ' be steel pipe conforming to F669, Group IC, with coating conforming to the requirements of ASTM F1234 Type B exterior and Type B galvanized interior, galvanized before forming. 1. Intermediate Line Posts: 2.375 inch O.D. zinc coated steel pipe; Type I weighing 3.65 pounds per lineal foot or Type II weighing 3.12 pounds per lineal foot. 2. Terminal and Corner Posts: End, corner and pull posts shall be 2.875 inches O.D. zinc coated steel pipe; Type I weighing 5.79 pounds per lineal foot or Type II weighing 4.64 pounds per lineal foot. 3. Gate Posts: 4 inches O.D. zinc coated steel pipe; Type I weighing 9.10 pounds per lineal foot or Type II weighing 6.56 pounds per lineal foot. 4. Brace Struts: 1.660 inches O.D. nominal 1-1/4 inch zinc coated steel pipe; Type I weighing 2.27 pounds per lineal foot or Type II weighing 1.82 pounds per lineal foot, with couplings and heavy duty, spring-loaded couplings. 5. Top Rails: As specified for brace struts. 6. Post Tops: Galvanized, heavy malleable iron with base apron to fit over posts, and designed for use with top rail. C. Truss Rod: 3/8 inch round steel rod fitted with turnbuckle. D. Tension Wire: No. 7 steel wire; ASTM A824 Type II, Class 2 zinc coating. E. Fittings: Galvanized, malleable cast iron or pressed steel meeting ASTM F626. F. Gate Hardware: Provide the following hardware and accessories for each gate: 1. Hinges: Pressed steel or malleable iron to suit gate size, non -liftoff -type, offset to ' permit 180 -degree gate opening. 2. Latch: Forked type or plunger -bar type to permit operation from either side of gate. Provide padlock eye as integral part of latch. 3. Keeper: Provide keeper for vehicle gates, which automatically engages the gate - leaf and holds it in the open position until manually released. 4. Guide and Guide Channel: Steel, including required brackets, channels, mounting angles and mounting hardware. Roller guides shall be heavy duty, neoprene wheels. G. Zinc Coating: Hot dip method, using zinc conforming to ASTM B6. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES tDFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 02821-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 1. Chain link fabric: 1.2 ounces per square foot. 2. Rails, posts and braces: 1.8 ounces per square foot for Type I steel pipe and a minimum weight of 0.90 ounces per square foot for Type II steel pipe. Type II steel pipe shall have an exterior chromate conversion and a minimum of .3 mils clear polymer applied over the zinc coating. H. Concrete Footings: 2500 psi unless otherwise noted on Drawings, and meet requirements of Section 03300. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Swing Gates: 1. Fabricate gate frames from 1-1/2 inch, (1.900 inch nominal outside diameter) steel pipe; Type I nominal weight 2.72 pounds per foot or Type II nominal weight 2.28 pounds per foot of welded construction or constructed with heavy malleable iron or pressed steel corner fittings securely riveted. Weld areas shall be cleaned and repaired using 2 coats of zinc rich paint. 2. Install wire fabric to match the fence in frame by means of tension bars and hook bolts. 3. Each frame to be equipped with 3/8 inch diameter adjustable truss rods. 4. Bottom hinges to be ball and socket type designed to carry the weight of the gate on the post footing. 5. Upper hinge to be wrap around adjustable type. 6. Equip gates with a positive type latching device with provision for padlocking. 7. Drive swinging gates to be provided with center plunger rod, catch and semi- automatic outer catches to secure gates in opened position. 8. Equip rolling gates with stops, keepers, rollers and roller tracks. B. Galvanizing: Except where otherwise noted, materials shall be heavily galvanized after fabrication by hot -dip process. C. Welding: 1. Conform to requirements of American Welding Society, "Specification for Iron and Steel Arc -Welding Electrodes". 2. Electrodes shall be suitable for conditions of intended use. 3. Make joint surfaces free from fins and tears and grind rough surfaces smooth. 4. Clean welded surfaces and treat with two coats of galvanized paint applied per paint Manufacturer's directions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING A. Perform excavation and backfilling required for setting of concrete post footings. Generally conform to applicable requirements of Section 02300. 3.02 CONCRETE FOOTINGS A. Concrete Footing Sizes shall be as follows: 1. End Gate and Corner Posts: 12 inches diameter by 36 inches deep post embedment. 2. Line Posts: 9 inches diameter by 36 inches deep post embedment. 3. Footing Tops: Shall be troweled smooth and beveled or crowned to drain moisture away from posts. Lower edge of bevel shall meet established finish grade. 3.03 ERECTION A. Securely anchor fencing plumb, true to line, complete with necessary standard fittings specified and recommended by Manufacturer and in accordance with ASTM F567. B. Posts: Embed in concrete footings, to depths specified and accurately located as to alignment and grade. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 02821-2 ' I SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas 11 3.04 t 1 GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 C. Line Posts: Space equally at 10 feet on centers maximum, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. D. Top Rail: Pass through top of line posts and provide a continuous brace from end to end of each stretch of fence. Install outside sleeve type couplings at not more than 20 feet (6m) on center, with every 5th coupling a spring-loaded coupling. Fasten to terminal posts with suitable steel connections. E. Brace, Struts: Install at mid -point between top of fence and ground, and extend from terminal post with tension return rods. F. Fencing: 1. Erect in accordance with ASTM F567 so bottom of fabric is 2 inches above level of the ground or paving and top of fabric is aligned with tops of fence post or top rail. 2. Stretch fabric and securely attach to framework. 3.. Fabric: Secure to line posts with fabric bands and top rail. G. Tension Wire: Stretch along bottom of fence in lengths not exceeding 150 feet and securely tied to fabric 18 inches on center. Provide turnbuckles for each 150 lineal feet of wire. Secure ends of tension wire to posts in a manner to prevent slipping and insure proper tension. Secure tension wire shall be secured to fabric with No. 12 gauge galvanized tie wire, double -wrapped at 18 inch intervals. H. Tie Wires: Double -knuckle so exposed ends will not present a hazard. CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion of the Work, remove excess materials, equipment and debris and dispose of away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. END OF SECTION DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES ' DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 02821-3 SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 SECTION 02841 PARKING BUMPERS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS + A. Precast Parking Bumpers: 1. Commercially produced precast units 2. Smooth surface finish 3. 3 pad bearing surfaces. 4. Construct of 3000 psi (at 28 days) concrete. 5. Length: 72 inches long curb 6. Configuration: 8 inches wide by 6 inches high with one chamfered corner and a 3/4 inch minimum to 1 inch maximum radius at top corners 7. Provide two No. 3 reinforcing bars conforming to Section 03200 continuous through the length of the curb (69 inch overall length, each.) 8. Provide 5/8 inch diameter hole at 4 inches from each end to allow for a pin. B. Hold-down Pins: ASTM A615, Grade 40, plain steel bar, %2 inch diameter, 24 inches long. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION ' A. Install bumpers at locations indicated on Drawings. B. Asphalt Pavement Areas: Install each unit with hold-down pins driven through pavement. END OF SECTION Y DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/PARKING BUMPERS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 02841-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 SECTION 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK PART1 GENERAL. 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Formwork for cast -in-place concrete, including, but not limited to: 1. Shoring, Bracing and Anchorage, including openings for other Work 2. Form Accessories 3. Form Stripping. 1.02 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Design, engineer and construct formwork, shoring and bracing to conform to design and code requirements; resultant concrete to conform to required shape, line and dimension. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data on accessory materials and installation requirements. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE - A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 347R - Guide to Formwork for Concrete. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site to prevent deterioration and damage. B. Store off ground in ventilated and protected manner to prevent deterioration from moisture. 1.06 COORDINATION A. Coordinate this Section with other Sections of Work which require attachment of components to formwork. B. If formwork is placed after reinforcement resulting in insufficient concrete cover over reinforcement, request instructions from Architect before proceeding. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 FORM MATERIALS A. Plywood: Douglas.Fir species; APA grade -trademarked; BB Plyform, Class 1, Exterior Grade as per PS1: B. Lumber: Spruce, Pine or Fir species; construction grade; with grade stamp clearly visible. 2.02 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES A. Form Ties: Removable or snap -off type, free of defects that could leave holes larger than one inch in concrete surface. B. Form Release Agent: Colorless, which will not stain concrete, or impair natural bonding or color characteristics of coating intended for use on concrete C. Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts, Anchorages: Sized as required, of sufficient strength and character to maintain,formwork in place while placing concrete. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/CONCRETE FORMWORK ' DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 03100-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG , ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify lines, levels and centers before proceeding with formwork. Ensure that dimensions agree with Drawings. 3.02 EARTH FORMS A. Hand trim sides and bottom of earth forms. Remove loose soil in pour cavity prior to placing concrete. 3.03 ERECTION - FORMWORK A. Erect formwork, shoring and bracing to achieve design requirements, in accordance with requirements of ACI 301. B. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Shore or strengthen formwork subject to overstressing by construction loads. C. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling and stripping. Do not damage concrete during stripping. D. Align joints and make watertight. Keep form joints to a minimum. E. Obtain approval from Architect before framing openings in structural members which are not indicated on Drawings. 3.04 APPLICATION - FORM RELEASE AGENT A. Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations. B. Apply prior to placement of reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded items. C. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces will receive applied coverings which are effected by agent. Soak inside surfaces of untreated forms with clean water. Keep surfaces coated prior to placement of concrete. 3.05 INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS A. Provide formed openings where required for items to be embedded in or passing through concrete work. B. Locate and set in place items which will be cast directly into concrete. C. Coordinate Work of other Sections in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets, recesses, chases, sleeves, bolts, anchors, and other inserts. D. Install accessories in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions, straight, level and plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement. E. Provide temporary ports or openings in formwork where required to facilitate cleaning and inspection. Locate openings at bottom of forms to allow flushing water to drain. F. Close temporary openings with tight fitting panels, flush with inside face of forms, and neatly fitted so joints will not be apparent in exposed concrete surfaces. 3.06 FORM CLEANING A. Clean and remove foreign matter within forms as erection proceeds. B. Clean formed cavities of debris prior to placing concrete. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/CONCRETE FORMWORK DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 03100-2 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 C. Flush with water or use compressed air to remove remaining foreign matter. Ensure that water and debris drain to exterior through clean-out ports. 3.07 FORMWORK TOLERANCES A. Construct formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 301. 1 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect erected formwork, shoring, and bracing to ensure that Work is in accordance -;with ,t formwork design, and that support, fastenings, wedges, ties and items are secure. B. Do not reuse wood formwork more than 3 times for concrete surfaces to be exposed to view. Do not patch formwork. 3.09 FORM REMOVAL A. Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its own weight and imposed loads. Forms shall be removed in accordance with the requirements of the General Structural Notes. B. Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or tools against finish concrete surfaces scheduled for exposure to view. C. Store removed forms in manner that surfaces to be in contact with fresh concrete will not be damaged. Discard damaged forms. D. Formwork for stem walls and other parts not supporting the weight of the concrete may be removed as soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage. E. Cure exposed concrete in accordance with Section 03300 whenever the formwork is removed during the curing period. 3.10 REMOVAL STRENGTH A. When formwork removal is based on the concrete reaching its specified 28 day strength (or a specified percentage thereof), the concrete shall be presumed to have strength when either of the following conditions has been met: 1. When test cylinders, field cured under the most unfavorable conditions prevailing for any portion of the concrete represented, have reached the required strength. 2. When the concrete has been cured for the same length of time as the age, at test, of laboratory cured cylinders which reach the required strength. The length of time concrete has been cured in the field shall be determined by the cumulative number of days or fractions thereof, not necessarily consecutive, during which the temperature of the air in contact with the concrete is above 50 degrees F. and the concrete has been damp or thoroughly sealed from evaporation and loss of moisture. END OF SECTION 11 1 DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/CONCRETE FORMWORK DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 03100-3 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 SECTION 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Concrete reinforcement as shown on the Drawings and as specified. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with ACI -301, Chapter 5, except where more exacting requirements are specified. B. Comply with requirements in AWS -D12.1, except where more exacting requirements are specified in the Contract Documents. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit Drawings showing bending and placing of reinforcing. Include diagrammatic elevations of walls at a scale sufficiently large to show clearly the position and erection marks of marginal bars and their dowels and splices and bar arrangement for more than one layer of reinforcing steel in concrete sections. B. Certificates: Submit certified mill test reports for review prior to fabrication. - 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Shipping: Deliver reinforcement to the Project site bundled, tagged and marked to facilitate sorting and placing. Tags shall indicate bar sizes, lengths, grade and other information corresponding to markings shown on placement diagrams. B. Storage and Protection: Store reinforcement at the site off the ground and in a manner to prevent damage to the materials. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Steel: New billet -steel, deformed bars conforming to ASTM A615, Grade 60, 1 (ASTM A615M, Grade 400) with a minimum yield of 60,000 psi for bars #6 (#20) and larger and ASTM A615, Grade 40, (ASTM A615M, Grade 300) with a minimum yield of 40,000 psi for bars #5 (#15) and smaller, unless noted otherwise on Drawings. B. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185 using bright steel wire meeting the requirements of ASTM A82. Gauges and dimensions as noted on the Drawings. C. Chairs: Galvanized steel or plastic tipped. 1 D. Tie Wire: ASTM A82, 16 gauge or heavier, black annealed. E. Welding Rods: E-70 Series for A615 Grade 40 (ASTM A615M, Grade 300) reinforcing, and E-90 Series for A706 reinforcing; low hydrogen conforming to AWS A-5.1. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Shop fabricate bars as far as is practical. Bend bars cold. Make bends for stirrups and ties around pins having diameters at least 2 times the thickness of the bars; for other bars 1 inch diameter and smaller, 6 times the thickness; for larger bars 8 times the thickness. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 03200-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Determine weldability of reinforcing steel by laboratory chemical analysis of steel. Only steel conforming to chemical requirements specified in AWS D12.1 may be welded. 3.02 PLACING REINFORCEMENT A. General: 1. Place in accordance with ACI 318 and as shown. 2. Accurately place reinforcement and securely tie at intersections with 16 gauge black annealed wire. 3. Maintain reinforcing in proper position by chairs, bar supports or other approved devices. 4. Bars in footings shall be supported on precast concrete blocks. 5. The bending or field cutting of bars around openings or sleeves will not be permitted. 6. Reinforcing steel in beams and slabs shall not be placed until after concrete in walls and columns has been poured. B. Bars shall lap in accordance with General Structural Notes. C. Concrete protection of reinforcing shall be not less than the following: 1. Concrete is poured against and permanently exposed to ground: 3 inches. 2. Concrete is poured against forms but may be in contact with ground: a. #5 and under: 1-1/2 inches. b. #6 and larger: 2 inches. 3. Exterior face of exterior walls (exposed to weather but not in contact with ground): 1-1/2 inches minimum. 4. Interior walls and interior face of exterior walls: 3/4 inch minimum. 5. beams, girders and columns: 1-1/2 inches. 6. Interior Slabs: 1 inch. D. Clear distance between bars shall be not less than 1-1/2 times the maximum size of coarse aggregate unless noted otherwise. E. Bars may be moved as necessary to avoid interference with other reinforcing steel, conduits or embedded items. If bars are moved more than one bar diameter or enough to ; exceed code tolerances, resulting arrangement of bars shall be subject to review of Architect. F. Bars with kinks or bends not indicated shall not be used. Reinforcement shall not be bent or be straightened in a manner that will weaken the material, or be bent after being partially embedded in hardened concrete. G. Wire mesh in slabs: 1. Lap welded wire fabric at least 1-1/2 meshes plus end extension of wires but not less than 12 inches in structural slabs. 2. Lap fabric at least 1/2 mesh plus end extension of wires but not less than 6 inches in slabs on ground. 3. Extend mesh across supporting beams and walls. 3.03 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove excess materials, equipment I and debris and dispose of off premises. Leave Work in clean condition. END OF SECTION I DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT DFD PROJECT NO. 982151SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 03200-2 , 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Rain protection: Do not place concrete during rain unless adequate protection has been provided. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 03300-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 SECTION 03300 • CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Cast -in-place concrete including, but not limited to, the following: •.1. Building foundations and slabs on grade. 2. Sidewalks and driveways. 3. Site structures including, but not limited to, site lighting supports, electrical and mechanical equipment support pads, and other site furnishing and equipment requiring cast -in-place concrete items. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03100 — Concrete Formwork 2. Section 03200 — Concrete Reinforcement 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Mix Design: 1. Submit mix design for each class of concrete to the Architect for review. B. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's Specifications and performance data for accessory products. ' C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawing showing proposed location of construction joints, expansion/contraction joints and control joints and obtain approval of same from Architect prior to construction. D. Samples: Submit 4 inch long samples of expansion/contraction joint and control joint. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: 1. Standard for measuring, mixing, transporting and placing of concrete shall be ACI -301 and ACI -304. 2. Standard for measuring, mixing and delivery of ready mixed shall be ASTM C94, 1 except that time in mixer after water has been added at batch plant is limited to 1- 1/2 hours. 3. Job -mixed concrete shall be subject to Architect's review of design, mixing and handling procedures. B. Field Samples: .1. Provide on-site sample(s) of each type of exposed flatwork concrete finish showing texture and color before proceeding with finish to be used on this Project. 2. Sample(s) shall be minimum 4'-0" square and have at least one longitudinal and one transverse joint. 3. Construct sample panels in ample time to allow for finishing and curing before requesting Architect to review. 4. Construct where directed by Architect and prepare successive sample panels as required until finish acceptable to Architect is produced. .5. Since sample panels will constitute a basis of acceptance or rejection of the completed Work, do not remove sample panels until authorized in writing by the Architect. Dispose of sample panels in a legal manner when authorized. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Rain protection: Do not place concrete during rain unless adequate protection has been provided. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 03300-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 B. Cold weather protection: 1. Comply with ACI -306R. 2. Provide sufficient protection material in advance of the time when daily mean temperatures are expected to drop below 40 degrees F. 3. Provide strong and secure weather protection around the building for at least one story above and one story below the floor being concreted to prevent infiltration of wind. 4. Distribute unit heaters throughout the floor to maintain temperatures between 50 degrees F and 70 degrees F. 5. Obtain one temperature reading of air at floor level for each 600 square feet of floor area just prior to concreting and provide additional heat should the measured temperature be less than 50 degrees F. 6. Record and submit temperature readings for Architect's review no later than 24 hours after concreting. C. Hot weather protection: 1. Comply with ACI -305R. 2. When air temperature or form temperature exceed 100 degrees F, control concreting as follows. a. Cool forms to a maximum 90 degrees F; b. Cool concrete to a maximum 90 degrees F leaving the mixer; C. Adjust concrete mix to retard set with retarding admixture if included in design mix and adequately tested; and d. Take additional measures as directed by concrete supplier. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type II, alkali content not to exceed 0.6 percent. Use one brand and type of cement throughout Project unless otherwise specified. B. Aggregate: 1. Structural Concrete: Clean, coarse aggregate and gravel, free from foreign matter, conforming to ASTM C33. Aggregate shall be graded from coarse to fine in accordance with ASTM C33, Size 67. 2. Exposed Aggregate Concrete: Clean, river run crushed course aggregate and gravel, free from foreign matter conforming to ASTM C 33, Class 5S. Gradation to be ASTM C 33, Size 8, except that the aggregate shall be "gap -graded". C. Admixtures: 1. Air entraining admixture: ASTM C260. 2. Use of calcium chloride is not permitted. 3. Use of fly ash is not permitted. 4. Use set -retarding admixtures during hot weather only when approved by Architect. D. Water: Potable. E. Coloring Agent: 1. ASTM C979. 2. As manufactured by Frank Davis Company or L.M. Scofield Company or Solomon Grind -Chem Service, Inc.. Provide colors as selected by Architect. 3. Color weight shall not exceed 10% of the weight of the cement. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Bonding Agent: 1. Interior Only (PVA): Sika Sikadur 32, Hi -Mod 300 series 2. Exterior and Interior (acrylic latex): Euclid Eucobond, or Dayton Bond J40. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 03300-2 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 B. Non -Shrink Grout: 1. Premixed or prepackaged, non-metallic, non-gaseous, bleed free compound; non -shrink when tested in accordance with ASTM C 1107, Grade B at a fluid (flow cone) consistency of 20 to 30 seconds. 2. Attain minimum compressive strength of 7,500 psi in 28 days at above fluid consistency. 3. Fluid grouts: Remain workable, flow through flow cone after 30 minutes with slight agitation, in temperatures from 40 to 90 degrees F. 4. Acceptable manufacturer and products: Dayton Superior (Suregrip High Performance), Sika (Sikagrout 212), Master Builders (Masterflow 928) and L&M Construction Chemicals (Crystex). C. Formed Construction Joint: As indicated on Structural Drawings. D. Preformed Expansion Joint Filler: ASTM D994. E. Expansion Joint Filler: MAG Section 729. F. Liquid Curing Compound: 1. VOC compliant, ASTM C309, Type 1, Class B; acrylic type. 2. W. R. Meadows Sealtight VOCOMP-20, L&M Construction Chemicals Dress & Seal WB or Dayton Superior J-18 are acceptable products. 3. Verify that specified curing compound is compatible with the floor finish material(s) and adhesive(s) that will be applied to floor surface prior to delivery of curing compound to jobsite. If it is determined that the curing compound is not compatible with the floor finish material(s) and adhesive(s) that will be applied to floor surface, Contractor shall immediately notify Architect. G. Sealer: VOC compliant, acrylic copolymer type. 1. Interior: W. R. Meadows Sealtight VOCOMP-25, Euclid Flor Seal VOX, L&M Construction Chemicals Dress & Seal WB #30 or Dayton Superior J-24 are acceptable products. 2. Exterior: Euclid Diamond Seal VOX, or L&M Construction Chemicals Lumiseal WB are acceptable products. H. Liquid Hardener: Provide one of the following types. 1. Siliconate densifier: Ashford Formula, L&M Construction Chemicals Seal Hard, or Dayton -Superior J-17 Surehard. 2. Magnesium fluosilicate: Burk -O -Lith, L&M Construction Chemicals Fluo Hard, Sonneborn Lapidolith, Euclid Surfhard, Dayton -Superior J-15 Day Chem Hardener or W.R. Meadows Penalith. 3. Sodium silicate: L&M Construction Chemicals Chem Hard, W.R. Meadows Cure - Hard, Dayton -Superior J-13, Sonneborn Sonosil, Euclid Eucosil. I. Leveling Agent: Sonneborn Sonoflow, Euclid Flo -Top, Ardex K-15, L&M Construction Chemicals Levelex or Dayton -Superior Levelayer 1 are acceptable products. J. Abrasive Aggregate: Sonneborn Frictex NS, Euclid Non -Slip, L&M Construction Chemicals Grip -It, or Dayton -Superior Emery Non -Slip are acceptable products. K. Vapor Barrier: 6 mil. polyethylene conforming to ASTM D2103. L. Fiber Reinforcement: Polypropylene fibers engineered and designed for secondary reinforcement of concrete slabs, complying with ASTM C1116, Type III, not less than 3/4 inch long. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Fieberstrand 100, Euclid Chemical Co. b. Fibermesh, Fibermesh Co., Div. Synthetic Industries, Inc. C. Forta, Forta Corp. d. Grace Fibers, W.R. Grace & Co. M Concrete Accessories: Gateway Engineering Company, Dayton -Superior Corporation, or Burke Concrete Accessories. 1 DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 03300-3 SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 N. Evaporation Retarder: 1. Type: Monomolecular film, compatible with subsequent coatings and floor finishes. 2. Acceptable Manufacturer and Products: L&M Construction Chemicals (E -Con), Master Builders (Confilm), or Dayton Superior (Surefilm J-74). O. Exposed Aggregate Concrete Retarder: 1. Horizontal: Rugasol-S, Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ (800) 222-7452 or Preco EAC -S, Preco, Plainview, NY (800) 645-1237, or Euclid Concrete Surface Retarder "S." 2. Vertical: Preco Tuf-Cote, Preco, Plainview, NY; (800) 645-1237, or Euclid Concrete Surface Retarder "S." 2.03 MIXES A. Design of Mixes: ACI 301 and ACI 304, except as otherwise specified. B. Selection of proportions for normal weight concrete: ACI 301. C. Mix and deliver ready -mixed concrete in accordance with requirements of ASTM C94, Option A. 1. Not more than 90 minutes shall elapse from time water is introduced into the concrete mixture until completion of placement. 2. Do not add water to mix that has stiffened to increase its workability. 3. At no time shall concrete mix exceed a bulb thermometer reading of 90 degrees F. or over. 4. Use ice or other method as reviewed by Architect, to keep concrete below 90 degrees F. temperature. D. Air Entraining Admixture: 1. Concrete such as exterior slabs, perimeter foundations, and exterior curbs and gutters which will be subject to freezing temperatures while wet during the life of the structure, shall have a water cement ratio not exceeding 0.53 and contain entrained air in accordance with ACI 212.3R. E. Compressive strength (28 day): As shown on Drawings. F. Slump: 1. For consolidation by vibration: As shown on Drawings. 2. For exposed aggregate concrete: 7 inches to 8 inches. G. Mix coloring agent for integrally colored exposed aggregate concrete in strict compliance with the Manufacturer's printed instructions. H. Fiber Reinforcement: Add at manufacturer's recommended rate but not less than 1.5 Ib/cu.yd. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Prior to placing concrete: 1. Clean equipment involved. 2. Remove debris and foreign material from the forms. 3. Remove concrete laitance from reinforcing steel. 4. Wet wood forms and masonry units in contact with concrete. B. No wood other than built-in bucks or nailing blocks will be permitted to remain permanently inside the forms. C. Coordinate the necessary Trades as required to provide the sleeves, bolts, anchors, holes, etc., to be built in. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 03300-4 SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG 1 ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 D. Place vapor barrier over subbase with 2 inch covering of sand immediately prior to placing E. of floor slab at locations indicated on Drawings. Remove soft or unsuitable material to a depth of not less than 18 inches below subgrade under access drives and truck parking areas, and 12 inches below subgrade under automobile parking areas. Replace with approved materials. F. Remove concrete driveways, sidewalks and which are necessarily disturbed by - construction to a distance, required to maintain a slope as indicated by Standard Details or not to exceed one inch per foot where sidewalks are concerned. 3.02 PLACING OF CONCRETE A. Concrete Work shall be performed in accordance with ACI -301 except as amended by this Section. B. Convey concrete from the mixer to place of final deposit by methods which will prevent segregation of aggregate or loss of material. Place concrete at such a rate that concrete is at all times plastic and to insure a practically continuous flow of concrete. Concrete not in place 1-1/2 hours after water has been added at batch plant may be rejected by Architect. C. Place concrete as nearly as practicable in its final position to avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing. Do not deposit concrete that has partially hardened or been retempered. D. Do not place concrete during rain unless adequate protection has been provided. E. Thoroughly compact concrete by suitable means during the placing, and work around the reinforcement and embedded items into the corners of the forms. 1. Use vibrators to aid in the placement of the concrete, operated by experienced 1 personnel. 2. Keep at least one spare operating vibrator on the job at all times during the concrete operations. 3.03 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS, EXPANSION/CONTRACTION JOINTS AND CONTROL JOINTS A. Construction Joints: Provide as required to facilitate construction in accordance with reviewed shop drawings. B. Expansion/Contraction and Control Joints: Place expansion/contraction joints and control joints where required to ensure that undesirable thermal and shrinkage cracking of slabs is minimized. 1. See Drawings for locations of expansion/contraction joints and control joints in slabs -on -grade and in topping pours. 2. If drawings do not indicate locations, verify with Architect prior to placement of slabs -on -grade and topping pours. 3. At exterior slabs -on -grade provide a 1/2 inch wide expansion/contraction joint wherever slabs abut vertical construction elements whether indicated or not. 4. Unless otherwise noted or directed by Architect, locate joints at mid -span of structural beam and slab pours. C. Additional reinforcing may be required at some construction, expansion/contraction and control joints, and shall be supplied and installed at no additional cost. D. Reinforcing shall be continuous through construction joints. No concrete pour shall be 'longer than 100 feet or more than 4,000 square feet in area. Provide shear keys as detailed. 3.04 FINISHING HORIZONTAL SURFACES A. Rake concrete into place, screed and compact with a light tamp, except do not tamp topping and slabs not on grade. -Screed with sawing motion and float surface to bring fines to the top. 1 DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 03300-5 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 B. Mix and apply evaporation retarder in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions immediately after floating. In extreme drying conditions, apply additional material as needed. Apply lightly on hard to trowel floor areas. C. When concrete has hardened sufficiently so that excess fines will not be brought to the surface, trowel slab with a steel trowel to a smooth surface free of pinholes and other imperfections. A mechanical trowel with rotating steel blades, approved by Architect, may be used for this operation. D. After the surface has hardened sufficiently to ring under a trowel, trowel again with a steel trowel to a hard, burnished surface free of blemishes. A mechanical rotating trowel will not be permitted for this operation. E. Concrete slabs scheduled to receive roofing, ceramic tile, concrete topping or similar finishes shall have a screeded finish but true and even to plane with no sharp projections or ridges. F. Use a small radius edger on edges of exposed Work. Use a deep cutting, scoring tool to provide scoring as indicated. G. Exterior flatwork to receive medium broom finish unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. H. Finished floors to meet 1/4 inch in 10 feet tolerance unless noted otherwise. Floors scheduled to receive thin -set tile applications shall meet 1/8 inch in ten feet tolerance. 3.06 SLABS A. Saw cut pattern indicated on Drawings. Use 3/16 inch thick blade, cutting 1/4 of depth of slab thickness. B. Slope to drains 1/4 inch per foot nominal across entire room or area to be drained. 3.07 SPECIAL FINISHES A. General: 1. Obtain cement and aggregates from a single source for specialty concrete finishes to provide uniformity in appearance and color. 2. Place concrete at a maximum slump of 5 inches. Rake concrete into place, screed and float. Do not tamp. B. Integral Colored Concrete 1. Provide cement, aggregate, and pigment as required to produce consistent colors matching approved mock-up using the materials specified. 2. Plant -Mixed Concrete: Schedule delivery of concrete to provide consistent mix times from batching until discharge. 3. Concrete Paving: Schedule placement to minimize exposure to wind and hot sun before curing materials are applied. Avoid placing concrete if rain, snow or frost is forecast within 24 hours. Protect fresh concrete from moisture and freezing. 4. Formed Surfaces a. Stripping: Leave forms in place as long as practical. Remove forms when concrete has reached a consistent age to maintain uniformity of curing conditions throughout Project. 5. Floors and Paving a. Broomed Finish: Do not dampen brooms. b. Trowel Finish: Do not over -trowel or start troweling late. 6. Patching Concrete a. Fill holes and defects in concrete surface within 48 hours of form removal. b. Use the same patching materials and techniques that were approved on mock-up. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 03300-6 D. Protection: Protect specially finished concrete slabs from damage, by covering with a one inch layer of clear, dry sand. Provide planking whenever scaffolding or wheeled equipment may be required to be erected over slabs. Damage to slabs prior to acceptance of the Work will be cause for rejection of slabs and replacement will be required. 3.08 3.08 REPAIR OF SURFACE DEFECTS A. Modify or replace concrete not conforming to required lines, detail and elevations. B. Repair or replace concrete not properly placed, resulting in excessive honeycombing and other defects. Do not patch, repair or replace exposed architectural concrete except upon express direction of Architect. C. After forms are removed, fill tie rod holes, correct honeycomb spots, remove fins and clean and finish damaged surfaces. Wipe off excess mortar and rub to match adjoining surfaces. D. When excessive honeycombing is revealed, remove the defective material immediately after stripping forms to a depth of 3/4 inch to 1 inch. Cut edge of area perpendicular to surface to avoid feathered edges. Saturate with water for several inches beyond cutout and brush -in a grout consisting of equal parts Portland cement and sand. Follow immediately with the patching mortar. Leave the patch slightly higher than the surrounding surface. After an hour or two, finish flush with the adjoining surface. Wipe and rub patch to match adjoining surfaces. Keep patches moist for 7 days. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 03300-7 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 C. Make patches with a stiff mortar made with materials from the same sources as the concrete. Adjust mortar mix proportions so dry patch matches dry adjacent concrete. Add white cement to mortar mix if necessary to lighten it. 7. Curing a. Maintain concrete between 65 and 85 degrees F. during curing. b. Cure concrete using curing compound; apply curing compound in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 8. Minor variations in appearance of colored concrete, which are similar to natural variations in color and appearance of unpigmented concrete, are acceptable. C. Exposed Aggregate Concrete Finish: Conform to PCA Publication No. IS171.01A "Exposed Aggregate Concrete." Produce and finish in following manner: 1. Horizontal Exposed Aggregate Slabs: Produce by use of retarder agent applied to concrete surface as per Manufacturer's printed instructions for penetration of 3/16 inch. After finishing and removing water puddled on surface, apply retarder with pressure spray at approximately 100 square feet per gallon . 2. Vertical Formed Exposed Aggregate Concrete: Exposed aggregate shall be produced by use of a retarder brushed, sprayed or rolled on forms in accordance with Manufacturer's printed instructions. Coated forms shall not be exposed to direct rays of sun between time of coating and the time of concrete pour. Care shall be used in the placing of concrete in forms to avoid horizontal "lift" lines between pours on exposed face of concrete. 3. Exposed Aggregate Finishing: Remove surface retarded mortar with water pressure stream from hose and a stiff brush within a period of 12 to 24 hours after placement, depending upon temperature and climatic conditions at time of placement. Follow retardant Manufacturer's Specifications to obtain deep exposed aggregate finish to match sample approved by Architect. 4. Curing: a. Upon completion of placement and finishing, and not more than 24 hours after placing, apply specified curing compound. Plastic sheeting, other curing compounds or fine water fog mist shall not be used which would be detrimental to color uniformity. D. Protection: Protect specially finished concrete slabs from damage, by covering with a one inch layer of clear, dry sand. Provide planking whenever scaffolding or wheeled equipment may be required to be erected over slabs. Damage to slabs prior to acceptance of the Work will be cause for rejection of slabs and replacement will be required. 3.08 3.08 REPAIR OF SURFACE DEFECTS A. Modify or replace concrete not conforming to required lines, detail and elevations. B. Repair or replace concrete not properly placed, resulting in excessive honeycombing and other defects. Do not patch, repair or replace exposed architectural concrete except upon express direction of Architect. C. After forms are removed, fill tie rod holes, correct honeycomb spots, remove fins and clean and finish damaged surfaces. Wipe off excess mortar and rub to match adjoining surfaces. D. When excessive honeycombing is revealed, remove the defective material immediately after stripping forms to a depth of 3/4 inch to 1 inch. Cut edge of area perpendicular to surface to avoid feathered edges. Saturate with water for several inches beyond cutout and brush -in a grout consisting of equal parts Portland cement and sand. Follow immediately with the patching mortar. Leave the patch slightly higher than the surrounding surface. After an hour or two, finish flush with the adjoining surface. Wipe and rub patch to match adjoining surfaces. Keep patches moist for 7 days. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 03300-7 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 E. Patching mortar shall consist of the same materials and proportions as the original concrete except that the coarse aggregate shall be omitted. When color match is required, adjust mixture to produce a finished color to match the adjoining concrete surfaces. F. Cracks caused by expansion, shrinkage and the like that occur in natural color concrete up through final acceptance of building shall be carefully patched with floorstone, epoxy grouting mortar or other method acceptable to the Architect. 3.09 CURING A. Protect freshly deposited concrete from premature drying and maintain without drying at a relatively constant temperature for the period of time necessary for the hydration of the cement and proper hardening of the concrete. B. Curing Methods: Cure concrete surfaces receiving finish materials, including (but not limited to) cementitious toppings, paint, and flooring, using one of the following two methods immediately after finishing operations. Consideration shall be given to the construction schedule impact and the compatibility of finish materials with the concrete when selecting a method. 1. Keep concrete continuously moist for at least 7 days using polyethylene film or other acceptable covering. 2. Apply liquid curing compound in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Remove curing compound before finish materials are applied unless it has been demonstrated that the curing compound can satisfactorily serve as a base for finish materials. Method of removal shall result in a satisfactory base for finish materials. C. Prevent rapid drying of the concrete at the end of the curing period. D. During the curing period, protect the concrete from damaging mechanical disturbances, particularly load stresses, heavy shock, and excessive vibrations. Protect finished concrete surfaces from damage caused by construction equipment, materials or methods. 3.10 LEVELING AGENT A. Apply leveling agent to correct unsatisfactory floor surface due to undue settlement, shrinkage or cracking. B. Apply material when, in the opinion of Architect, it is necessary to provide an acceptable surface. C. Application to be in accordance with Manufacturer's directions 3.11 FLOOR SEALER A. At areas indicated on Drawings, provide 2 coats of sealer. B. Surface must be clean, dry and free of loose dirt, oil, wax, curing and parting compounds and other foreign matter. C. Apply each coat in accordance with Manufacturer's printed instructions. 3.12 FLOOR HARDENER A. Where indicated on Drawings, provide 2 coats of hardener. B. Surface must be clean, dry and free of loose dirt, oil, wax, sealers, curing and parting compounds, and other foreign matter. C. Apply each coat in strict accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 03300-8 1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests: Inspection and testing of concrete mix will be performed by a testing laboratory in accordance with Section 01430. 1. Provide free access to Work and cooperate with appointed firm. 2. Tests of cement and aggregates may be performed to ensure conformance with specified requirements. 3. Four concrete test cylinders shall be taken for every 100 or less cubic yards of concrete placed. One cylinder shall be tested after 7 days for information. Test two cylinders after 28 days. Hold one cylinder for additional information, as required. 4. Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, and cure on job site under same conditions as concrete it represents. 5. Take one slump test for each set of test cylinders taken. 6. Concrete which does not meet the compressive strength requirement at 28 days will be rejected and removed from the Project, and disposed of in a legal manner. 3.14 PROTECTION A. Protect finished surfaces from stains or abrasions. Protect surfaces or edges by leaving forms in place or by providing temporary covers. Protect concrete from rain, flowing water or mechanical injury. B. Protect floor slabs from the droppings of plaster, paint, dirt, and other marring by covering with polyethylene plastic sheet; well lapped and sealed. Maintain covering In good condition until danger of damage is past. 3.15 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion of the Work, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. END OF SECTION ' DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 03300-9 e 1 SASC Inc. Phoenix . Las Vegas R GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 SECTION 03450 ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE - PLANT CAST PART 1 SUMMARY 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Architectural precast concrete members, including supports, anchors and attachments as shown on the Drawings and as specified. 1.02 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Design units to withstand design loads and erection forces. Calculate structural properties of units in accordance with ACI -301. B. Design units to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural . , members and clearances of intended openings. C. Design component connections to accommodate building movement and thermal movement. Provide adjustment to accommodate misalignment of structure without unit distortion or damage. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout, unit locations, configuration, unit identification marks, reinforcement, connection details, support items, location of lifting devices, dimensions, openings, and relationship to adjacent materials. Provide erection drawings. B. Samples: Submit two, 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating various surface finishes, color and texture. Architect shall select desired finish from submitted samples. C. Calculations: Submit design calculations and design mix. D. Maintenance Data: Submit instructions for surface cleaning. 1.04 ' QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Perform Work in accordance with PCI MNL -117, PCI MNL -123, PCI MNL - 120, PCI Manual for Structural Design of Architectural Precast Concrete, and ACI -318. B. Welding: AWS D1.1. C. Qualifications: 1. Fabricator: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum 5 years documented experience. 2. Precast Manufacturer and Erectors: Qualified in accordance with PCI MNL -117. 3. Welder: Qualified within previous 12 months in accordance with AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.4. D. Design units under direct- supervision of.a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of.this work and licensed in the State where the project is located. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. ' Handle precast units to position, consistent with their shape and design. Lift and support only from support points. B. Lifting or Handling Equipment: Capable of maintaining units during manufacture, storage, transportation, erection, and in position for fastening. C -SPECS TM/ ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST DFD ARCHITECTURE CONCRETE - PLANT CAST DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 03450-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 C. Blocking and Lateral Support During Transport and Storage: Clean, non -staining, without causing harm to exposed surfaces. Provide temporary lateral support to prevent bowing and warping. D. Protect units to prevent staining, shipping, or spalling of concrete. E. Mark units with date of production in location not visible to view when in final position in structure. 1.06 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Shop Drawings. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM C150, Portland Type I — Normal, gray color. Use same brand throughout. B. Aggregate: ASTM C33. C. Water: Potable. D. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615 (Fy — 60ksi), bars requiring welding shall be ASTM A706 (Fy = 60 ksi).deformed steel bars, plain finish, strength and size commensurate with precast unit design. E. Admixtures: Water reducing, retarding, accelerating ASTM C494 and air -entraining ASTM C260, as recommended by the precast manufacturer. F. Surface Finish Aggregate: Sand finish, acid etched, to match selected sample finish. G. Coloring Agent: 1. ASTM C979. 2. As manufactured by Frank Davis Company or L.M. Scofield Company or Solomon Grind -Chem Service, Inc.. Provide colors as selected by Architect. 3. Color weight shall not exceed 10% of the weight of the cement. H. Grout: Non -shrink, minimum 10,000 psi, 28 day strength. 2.03 SUPPORT DEVICES A. Connecting and Support Devices: ASTM A36 weldable steel. B. Bolts, Nuts and Washers: ASTM A307. C. Primer: Zinc rich alkyd type, unless prohibited by VOC requirements. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Bearing pads: High density plastic, 1/8 inch thick smooth both sides. 2.05 MIX A. Concrete: Minimum 5000 psi, 28 day strength, air entrained to 5 to 7 percent in accordance with ACI -301. 2.06 FABRICATION A. Fabrication procedure to conform to PCI MNL -117. C -SPECS TM/ ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST DFD ARCHITECTURE CONCRETE - PLANT CAST DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 03450-2 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 B. Maintain plant records and quality control program during production of precast units. Make records available upon request. rC: Use rigid molds, constructed to maintain precast unit uniform in shape, size and finish. Maintain consistent quality during manufacture. D. ' Fabricate connecting devices, plates, angles, items fit to steel framing members, inserts, ' bolts, and accessories. Fabricate to permit initial placement and final attachment. E. Embed reinforcing steel, anchors, inserts plates, angles, and other cast -in items as ' indicated on Shop Drawings. - . F. Locate hoisting devices to permit removal after erection. G. Cure units to develop concrete quality, and to minimize appearance blemishes such as 1 non-uniformity, staining, or surface cracking. H. Minor patching in plant is acceptable, providing structural adequacy and appearance of units is not impaired. 2.07 FINISH - PRECAST UNITS A. Finish: Ensure exposed -to -view finish surfaces of precast units are uniform in color and 1 appearance. 2.08 FINISH - SUPPORT DEVICES A. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter. B. Galvanize after fabrication to 2.0 oz./sq.ft. in accordance with ASTM A386. ' 2.09 FABRICATION TOLERANCES - A. Conform to PC[ MNL -117. 2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Plant Quality Control Program: Sampling, testing and inspections shall be conducted by the precast concrete manufacturer's plant and personnel currently certified by the PCI, Plant Certification Program. B. Testing shall be in compliance with applicable testing provisions in MNL -117, Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Architectural Precast Concrete Products. PART 3 EXECUTION ' 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that building structure, anchors, devices, and openings are ready to receive work of 3.02 PREPARATION this Section. A. Provide for erection procedures and induced loads during erection. Maintain temporary fbracing in place until final support is provided. B. Provide necessary hoisting equipment. ' 3.03 ERECTION A. Erect units without damage to shape or finish. Replace or repair damaged panels. B. Erect units level and plumb within allowable tolerances of MNL -117. C -SPECS TM/ ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST DFD ARCHITECTURE CONCRETE - PLANT CAST DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 03450-3 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 C. Align and maintain uniform horizontal and vertical joints as erection progresses. D. When units require adjustment beyond design or tolerance criteria, discontinue affected work; advise Architect. E. Fasten and weld units in place. Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.1 F. Touch-up field welds and scratched or damaged galvanized surfaces. G. Set vertical units dry, without grout, attaining joint dimension with lead or plastic spacers. Pack grout to base of unit. H. Exposed Joint Dimension: 1/2 inch. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Protect units from damage. B. Provide non-combustible shields during welding operations. 3.05 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. B. After erection is completed clean precast members with brushes, soap and water, then rinse with clear water. C. Remove stains in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION C -SPECS TM/ ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST DFD ARCHITECTURE CONCRETE - PLANT CAST ' DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 03450-4 DFD ARCHITECTURE . C -SPECS T"^/MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 04065-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ' ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 SECTION 04065 ' MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT PART GENERAL ' 1.01 SUBMITTALS , A. Mix Designs: 1. Submit mix designs and samples to the Architect for review prior to delivering materials to the site or commencing the Work. a. Mortar Mix Design: Furnish in accordance with ASTM C270. b. Grout Mix Design: Furnished by either the grout supplier or an independent testing laboratory. Submit comprehensive strength data 1 with mix design submittals when pozzolans are used. 2. Submit written colored mortar proportions for each color of mortar to be supplied for review by the Architect. B. Samples: Submit mortar channels for color selection. 1.02 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 1 A. Storage and Protection: Cementitious materials shall be stored off the ground, under cover and shall be kept dry. 1.03 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Hot Weather Requirements: Wet mortar board before loading and cover mortar to retard drying when not being used. 2. Cold Weather Requirements: In accordance with 'Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction" by IMIAC; provide adequate equipment for heating the mortar and grout materials, when air 'temperature is below 40 degrees F.. Temperatures of the separate materials, including water, shall not exceed 140 degrees F. when placed in the mixer. When air temperature is below 32 degrees F., maintain mortar temperature on boards above freezing. ' PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Mortar: 1. Cement: Type II Portland cement conforming to ASTM C150. 2, Aggregate: Clean, sharp and well graded and free from injurious amounts of dust, lumps, shale, alkali, surface coatings and organic matter, conforming to ASTM C144, except that no less than 3 percent nor more than 10 percent shall pass a No. 100 sieve. 3. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. 4. Water: Clean and potable. 5. Admixtures: a. Chemical: The use of accelerator admixtures, water reducing plasticizers and other chemical admixtures shall not be allowed. ' b. Mineral: Pozzolans must conform to ASTM C 618, Type C or F. C. Water -Repellent Admixture: In accordance with Section 04221. 6. Mortar Color: a. Provide limeproof, inorganic compounds which shall not exceed 15% by weight of the cement, unless otherwise directed by Manufacturer. b. Carbon black shall not exceed 3% by weight of the cement. C. Factory blend color for full color saturation of mortar joint and factory package for unitized jobsite mixing at a ratio of one unit of color per sack of cementitious material, (portland cement, lime, or masonry cement). DFD ARCHITECTURE . C -SPECS T"^/MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 04065-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 Color: Bostik #327 -Flash Walnut as manufactured by Hydromet. B. Grout: 1. Cement: Type II Portland cement conforming to ASTM C150. 2. Aggregate: ASTM C404 and as follows: a. Sand: Size No. 1 for fine aggregate. b. Pea Gravel: Size No. 8 for coarse aggregate. 3. Water: Clean and potable. 2.02 MIXES A. Mortar: ASTM C 270, Type S. 1. Measurement: Accurately measure materials by ASTM C270 by the Property Method per Table 2.. 2. Mix cementitious materials and aggregates 3 to 5 minutes in a mechanical mixer. Small amounts of mortar may be mixed by hand. Adjust consistency of the mortar depending on the absorptive quality of the units being laid, and to the satisfaction of the mason. 3. If mortar begins to stiffen, it may be retempered by adding water within a basin formed by the mortar, and remixing. 4. Use within 2-1/2 hours of initial mixing and no mortar shall be used after it has begun to set or after is has become harsh or non -plastic. 5. Mix color in a specific and exacting ratio in accordance with the Architect's reviewed submittals. B. Grout: 1. Job -Site Mixed: In accordance with ASTM C476. 2. Transit -Mixed: a. Designed by the supplier or an independent testing laboratory with a minimum compressive strength of 2000 psi in 28 days, unless higher strength is required by the Structural Drawings and Notes. b. Slump: Not to exceed 8 inches, unless otherwise noted on Drawings. C. Use within 1-1/2 hours of initial mixing and use no grout after it has begun to set or after it has become harsh or non -plastic. d. Course grout may be used in cavity walls with a horizontal dimension of 2 inches or more, and in hollow cell construction 4 inches or more in both horizontal directions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Installation of mortar and grout shall be as specified under each of the following Sections and in accordance with AMG Standard 108: 1. Section 04220 — Concrete Unit Masonry 2. Section 04402 — Exterior Stone B. Colored Mortar: Consistency of appearance shall be maintained throughout the Project. C. Temperature: Mortar and grout shall have a temperature between 50 degrees F. and 90 degrees F. while being used. D. Grout may be poured by hand bucket, concrete hopper or though a grout pump. Grout spaces shall not be wet down prior to pouring grout. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General: Tests and inspections as necessary to verify quality and strength of mortar and grout. Laboratory tests shall conform to applicable ASTM standards and tests. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 04065-2 li 1 1 t 1 1 1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 B. Tests: 1. Frequency: As determined by the Architect based upon total time for construction of masonry with not less than two tests per each level of masonry construction, foundation to roof or floors. 2. Testing Laboratory: Inspection and testing of concrete mix will be performed by a testing laboratory in accordance with Section 01430. The testing laboratory, in - addition to meeting requirements of ASTM E329, must be an approved laboratory competent to perform cement physical testing. 3. Distribution of Results of Tests: Within 24 hours of results of tests, copies of the results shall be submitted to the Architect, Contractor, masonry contractor, and the grout supplier if applicable. C. Mortar: 1. Property Specification (ASTM C270): Testing in accordance with ASTM C 780. 2. For determining hardened mortar properties, prepare 3 test specimens for each test age and property. A strength test shall be the average of the strengths of the specimens tested at the age specified. Specimens shall be tested at 7 and 28 days. D. Grout: 1. Testing per ASTM C1019. 2. Three test specimens shall constitute one sample. A strength test shall be the average of the strengths of the specimen tested at the age specified. 3. Specimens shall be tested at 7 and 28 days. 4. The compression strength will be considered satisfactory if the average of three consecutive tests of the grout is equal to or greater than the specified strength and no individual strength test falls below the specified strength by more than 500 psi. 3.03 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. END OF SECTION DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 04065-3 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas ' PART 1 1.01 1 ' 1.02 1.03 1 1 GENERAL SUMMARY GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 SECTION 04085 MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Section Includes: Furnishing the following items for installation under Sections 04220 and 04402: 1. Ties. 2. Anchors. 3. Control joints. 4. Through wall flashings. 5. Weep holes. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's brochures depicting each of the masonry accessories which will be used prior to delivering materials to the site or commencing the Work in this Section. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Storage and Protection: Store metal items at the site off the ground and in a manner to prevent damage to the materials. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Masonry accessories as manufactured by the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Dur -O -Wall Inc. 2. Heckmann Building Products, Inc. 3. Hohmann and Barnard, Inc. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Steel Wire: ASTM A82, diameter as specified for accessory. B. Flat and Corrugated Sheet Steel: ASTM A653 or ASTM A568. C. Bar Anchor Material: ASTM A36. D. Galvanized Finish: ASTM A641, Class 1, mill galvanized for interior walls, or ASTM A153, Class B-2, hot dip galvanized for exterior walls. E. Reinforcing Steel: As specified in Section 03200. 2.03 ACCESSORIES. A. General: Anchors and ties shall be steel with zinc coated finish or shall be of other non- corrosive metal. B. Ties: 1. Adjustable Wall Ties (Facing over CMU): a. 3/16 inch diameter steel wire of approved shape, machine fabricated. b. Provide 2 piece "rectangular' strut compression and tension, eye and pin tie as required by Code. 2. Veneer Anchors (Facing over Framing): a. 3/16 inch diameter steel wire of approved shape, machine fabricated, designed to be screw fastened. b. Provide 2 piece "Rectangular' or "Triangular' strut, compression and tension, eye and pin tie. ' DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/MASONRY ACCESSORIES DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 04085-1 SASC Inc. ' Phoenix - Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ' ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 C. Screws shall have a copolymer corrosion resistant coating or be Type 304 stainless steel, suitable for attachment of veneer anchors, length as required. ' 3. Sheet Metal Ties: 22 gage corrosion resistant corrugated sheet metal, not less than 7/8 inch wide by 7 inches long, pre -punched for wire ties to horizontal steel. 4. Metal Lath Ties: 3.4 Ib. copper -bearing expanded plaster lath. C. Joint Reinforcing: Ladder type, galvanized steel rods of width 2 inches less than wall ' thickness conforming to UBC Standard 21-10, Part 1. D. Control Joints: , 1. Rubber: Extruded, solid section, ASTM D2000 2AA-805 with a durometer hardness of 70 or 80 when tested per ASTM D2240. 2. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC): ASTM D2287, Type PVC 654-4 with a durometer hardness of 85 (+5) when tested per ASTM D2240, minimum tensile strength of , 1750 psi with minimum 300 percent elongation per ASTM D638, and cold crack brittleness of 50 degrees F per ASTM D746. 3. Sizes and Profiles: As indicated on Drawings. E. Joint Filler: Closed cell neoprene rubber conforming to ASTM D1056, Class RE41, , oversized 50 percent, self expanding, 2-3/4 or 3 inch width by maximum length. F. Through -Wall Flashing: 1. Self-sealing, self -healing, fully adhering, composite flexible flashing consisting of 32 mil thick pliable and highly adhesive rubberized asphalt compound bonded completely and integrally to 8 mil thick, high-density, 4 plies of cross -laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall 40 mil thickness; protected from contamination from dust or dirt by a silicone -coated release sheet, to be removed immediately before installation. 2. Perm -A -Barrier Wall Flashing as manufactured by W.R. Grace & Co. - Conn., Cambridge, MA (800) 558-7066. 3. Provide wall flashing accessories (surface conditioner, termination mastic) as required to provide a complete installation. G. Weep Holes: Round plastic tubing, 3/8 inch diameter. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Installation of masonry accessories shall be as specified under each of the following Sections. 1. Section 04220 — Concrete Masonry Units 2. Section 04402 — Exterior Stone B. Control Joints: Provide control joints as indicated on Drawings and in accordance with the requirements of Specification Section for the masonry units. C. Through Wall Flashing: 1. Provide through -wall flashings as indicated on Drawings and in accordance with the requirements of Specification Section for the masonry units. 2. Specified flashing and accessories are not designed for use as a finished surface or for use in areas where they will be exposed to sunlight. Prevent contact with products containing fresh coal tar or coal tar pitch. Prevent contact with sealant products containing polysulfide polymers due to incompatibility. 3. Remove deleterious materials from surfaces to be flashed. 4. Apply surface conditioner by spray, brush or roller at the rate recommended by manufacturer to dirty or dusty surfaces or surfaces having an irregular or rough texture before installing flashing membrane. 5. Remove silicone -coated release paper and position flashing carefully before placing it against the surface. When properly positioned, place against surface by pressing firmly into place by hand roller or blunt object, such as the backside of a utility knife. Fully adhere flashing to substrate to prevent water from migrating under flashing. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/MASONRY ACCESSORIES ' DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 04085-2 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 6. Overlap adjacent pieces 2 inches and roll overlaps with a steel hand roller or a blunt object. Fully seal overlaps to prevent water leakage through laps. Trim bottom edge 1/2 inch back from exposed face of the building. 7. At heads and sill where flashing is indicated to be placed, turn up ends a minimum of 2 inches and make careful folds to form a pan, with the pan seams sealed with compatible mastic acceptable to flashing manufacturer. 8. Apply a bead or trowel coat of compatible mastic acceptable to flashing manufacturer along top edge, seams, cuts and penetrations. Seal penetrations through flashing with compatible mastic acceptable to flashing manufacturer. D. Weep Holes: Provide weep holes as indicated on Drawings and in accordance with the requirements of Specification Section for the masonry units. 3.02 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. END OF SECTION DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/MASONRY ACCESSORIES DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 04085-3 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 SECTION 04220 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS PART GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit samples to Architect for review prior to constructing job -site mock-ups, delivering materials to Site or commencing Work in this Section. 1. Provide 2 samples of each type of concrete masonry units, (stretcher units), to be used on Project showing range of texture and/or color variations of exposed surfaces for units. 2. Units provided to Project shall match these samples. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: 1. Comply with the requirements of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 "Specifications for Masonry Structures", except as otherwise indicated. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Masonry materials and workmanship shall meet requirements of building codes which are applicable to jurisdiction in which Project is located. 2. Fireplace Construction: In conformance with NFPA 211, "Chimneys, Fireplaces, Vents and Solid Fuel Burning Appliances." 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Transport and handle masonry units in such a manner as to prevent chipping and breakage. B. Deliver and store materials in dry, protected areas. C. Keep free of stain or other damage. D. Locate storage piles, pallets, stacks or bins to avoid or protect material from heavy or unnecessary traffic. E. Replace damaged material at no cost to Owner. 1.04 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Hot Weather Requirements: 1. When ambient air temperature exceeds 100 degrees F., or when ambient air temperature exceeds 90 degrees F. and wind velocity is greater than 8 mph, Masonry Contractor shall implement hot weather protection procedures as submitted to Architect. 2. Do not spread mortar beds more than 4 feet ahead of placing block units. 3.- Place block units within one minute of spreading mortar. B. Cold Weather Requirements: 1. .Fully protect concrete masonry units against freezing by a weather -tight covering Which shall also prevent accumulation of ice. 2. Do not lay concrete masonry units when temperature of surrounding atmosphere is below 40 degrees F. or is likely to fall below 40 degrees F. in the 24 hour period after laying, unless adequate protection is provided. C. Field Measurements: 1. Verify measurements shown on Drawings by taking field measurements. 2. Proper fit and attachment of concrete masonry units is required. DFD ARCHITECTURE C SPECS TM/CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 04220-1 SASC Inc. ' Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ' ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 1.05 SCHEDULING AND SEQUENCING A. Coordination: Coordinate with other Trades whose Work relates to concrete masonry unit I installation for placing required blocking, backing, furring, conduits and other items. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.02 MATERIALS A. General Requirements for Concrete Masonry Unit: 1. Concrete masonry units shall meet ASTM C90, Grade I requirements except that when CMU will be exposed in final construction, ASTM C90-98, paragraph 7.2.1 shall be modified to read: "Three percent of a shipment containing chips not larger than 1/2 inch in any dimension, or cracks not wider than 0.02 in. and not longer than 10% of the nominal height of the unit is permitted." 2. Units shall be in the same condition in wall as they were upon delivery. 3. Unit sizes shall be 8 by 8 by 16 inches or as shown on Drawings. 4. Surface of units shall be clean and free from dirt when laid in walls. 5. Units not complying with the appropriate ASTM Standards shall not be laid in the wall where exposed to view. Any unit that is chipped in excess of the requirements will be rejected and shall be removed and replaced. 6. Provide special block sizes and shapes required or as shown on Drawings. B. Hollow CMU Classifications: The following requirements shall apply to all shapes, colors, textures and sizes of CMU provided. 1. Normal weight units: a. Weighing 125 lbs. per cubic foot or more and manufactured with sand conforming to ASTM C33. b. These units may be used for exterior construction in an exposed condition with a water repellent coating or using an integral water repellent (when approved by integral water repellent manufacturer). C. Accessory Units: Provide units as required for window sills and jambs, doors, control joints, bond beams, lintels, pilaster, caps and other locations as indicated on Drawings with a minimum of block cutting. Accessory units shall match adjacent unit color and texture unless noted otherwise. D. Fireplace: 1. Firebrick: ASTM C27, Medium Duty, charcoal color as selected by Architect. 2. Clay Flue Liner: ASTM C315, 5/8" wall thickness, shape as indicated on drawings. 3. Damper: Manufacturer acceptable to Architect, size as required for fireplace opening(s). 4. Refractory Mortar: Medium -duty mortar as determined by ASTM C199. Provide at firebrick locations . 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Joint Reinforcing: Ladder type, galvanized steel rods of width 2 inches less than wall thickness conforming to 1997 UBC Standard 21-10, Part 1. B. Reinforcing Steel: As specified under Section 03200. C. Control Joints: 1. Rubber: Extruded, solid section, ASTM D2000 2AA-805 with a durometer hardness of 70 or 80 when tested per ASTM D2240. 2. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC): ASTM D2287, Type PVC 654-4 with a durometer hardness of 85 (+5) when tested per ASTM D2240, minimum tensile strength of 1750 psi with minimum 300 percent elongation per ASTM D638, and cold crack brittleness of 50 degrees F per ASTM D746. 3. Sizes and Profiles: As indicated on Drawings. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS , DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 04220-2 1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ' ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 D. Mortar and Grout: As specified under Section 04065. E. Nailing Strips: See Section 06100. F. Sheet Metal Flashings: See Section 07600. G. Steel Lintels: As indicated or scheduled on Structural Drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION ' 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Installer shall examine supporting structure and conditions under which unit masonry is to be installed, and notify Contractor, in writing, conditions detrimental to proper and timely ' completion of Work. Do not proceed with the installation of unit masonry Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. B. Do not use units with chips, cracks, or other defects which might be visible in the finished ' Work unless otherwise acceptable to the Architect. C. Do not build on frozen Work; remove and replace unit masonry Work damaged by frost or freezing: D. Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not lower freezing point of mortar by use of admixtures or anti -freeze agents, and do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protection: Protect sills, ledges, offsets and other projections from dropping of mortar and grout. 3.03 ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION A. General Requirements for Concrete Masonry Walls: 1. Workmanship: a. Concrete masonry units which will be exposed in the finished work shall be treated as an architectural finish and shall be handled carefully to ' ensure that chippages do not occur during handling and laying. Handling shall be minimized on the jobsite to eliminate chances for chippage. 2. Lay units in uniform and true courses, level and plumb to height indicated on Drawings. 3. Lay concrete unit masonry in such a way that cracks are not formed at time unit is placed in wall. 4. Units shall not be wetted before being used and shall be laid dry. ..5. Adjusting Units: a. Units shall be adjusted to be level, plumb and straightened into final position in wall while mortar is still soft and plastic enough to ensure a good bond. b. Avoid over -plumbing and pounding of corners and jambs to fit stretcher units after they are set in position. C. If position of unit is shifted after mortar has stiffened, or bond is broken or cracks are formed, re-lay unit in new mortar. 6. Bearings on Walls: Provide 3 courses of solid units or grouted hollow masonry below units steel bearing plates or beams bearing on walls. Extend bearings each side of contact with load as required to properly transfer loads into wall. 7. Openings: Provide openings in masonry walls where required or indicated. Steel lintels shall be provided unless otherwise noted. ' 8. Cutting of masonry: When required, exposed block units shall be cut with a power driven Carborundum or diamond disc blade saw. When using "wet" cutting methods, clean water shall be used on exposed units. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 9M7-3 SECTION 04220-3 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 9. Anchor masonry units facing against or abutting concrete members to concrete by use of dovetailed flat bar anchors inserted in slots built into concrete. a. Space anchors not more than 16 inches vertically and 24 inches horizontally. b. Maintain a space not less than 1/2 inch width between masonry and concrete members, keeping space free of mortar or other rigid materials so as to permit differential movement. B. Bonding: 1. Bond pattern shall be regular running bond unless indicated otherwise on the drawings. 2. Bond shall be plumb throughout face of wall. C. Bearing Wall Intersections: 1. Intersecting block bearing walls shall not be tied together in a masonry bond, except at corners. 2. One wall shall terminate at face of other wall with a control joint at intersection. 3. Tie intersecting wall together with a metal tie bar, 1/4 inch x 1-1/4 inches x 2'-4" long with a 2 inch right angle bend at each end of bar, spaced vertically at 2 feet on center. 4. Bends at ends of tie bars shall be embedded in grouted cells. 5. Rake out vertical joint between intersecting walls to a depth of 3/4 inch after mortar has stiffened. 6. Provide sealing of control joint as specified in Section 07900. D. Non -Bearing Wall Intersections: 1. Tie non-bearing wall together with strips of metal lath or galvanized 1/4 inch mesh hardware cloth placed across joint between 2 walls placed in alternate horizontal block courses. 2. Rake out vertical joint between intersecting walls to a depth of 3/4 inch after mortar has stiffened. 3. Provide sealing of control joint as specified in Section 07900. E. Joining of Work: 1. Where fresh masonry joins partially set masonry the exposed surface of the set masonry shall be cleaned and lightly wetted so as to obtain the best possible bond. 2. Remove loose concrete block and mortar. 3. Stop -off a horizontal run of masonry by racking back 1/2 brick length in each course and, if grout is used, stopping the grout 4 inches back of the rack. 4. Toothing will not be permitted, except upon written approval of the Architect._ F. Mortar Joints: 1. Joints shall be straight, clean and a uniform 3/8 inch thickness on exposed wall face. 2. Exposed vertical and horizontal joints shall be as indicated on the Drawings. 3. Joints shall be struck flush at surface to receive dampproofing, waterproofing, ceramic tile, or other finishes requiring flush joints that are to be concealed. 4. Where interior walls are to receive plaster or other finishes, strike joints flush. 5. Solidly fill joints from face of unit to depth of face shell, except where specified otherwise. 6. Full bedding to be provided for first course on foundation and wherever maximum strength is required. 7. Butter vertical head joints well and shove these joints tight so that mortar bonds Well to both units. 8. Full coverage to be provided on bed of face shells and webs surrounding cells to be filled. 9. Bee -holes or other open joints shall be filled and tooled with mortar while mortar is still fresh. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 04220-4 ' 1 1 1 n 1 1 1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 G. Control Joints: 1. Provide control joints, as detailed, at vertical masonry walls where such walls exceed 40 feet in length. In long length of walls, provide joints at approximately 24 feet on center or as detailed. 2. Control joints shall be continuous full height of walls. 3. At bond beams, control joints shall separate both block and grout; however, steel reinforcing shall be continuous. 4. Horizontal wire reinforcing shall not run through control joint. 5. Control joints shall not occur at wall corners, intersections, ends, within 24 inches of concentrated points of bearing or jambs or over openings unless specifically indicated on Structural Drawings. 6. Control joint materials shall be held back from finished surface as required to allow for sealant and back-up materials. H. Horizontal Joint Reinforcing: 1. Place horizontal joint reinforcing every 16 inches vertically throughout wall construction. 2. Continuously reinforce first bed joint immediately above and below openings. Provide reinforcing in second bed joint above and below openings which extends 2 feet beyond each side of opening. 3. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches at splices. 4. Cut and bend reinforcing at corners. Vertical Reinforcing and Bond Beam Reinforcing: 1. Place in accordance with requirements of Drawings. 2. Vertical Reinforcement: Provide continuous reinforcing full height of wall at wall ends, corners, intersections, jambs of openings and each side of control joints. Vertical reinforcing shall match and lap dowels which are at top of foundation walls and precast concrete beams. 3. Bond Beams: Provide horizontal reinforcing of 2 bars in minimum 8 inch deep grouted continuous bond beam at roof and elevated floor lines. 4. Parapets: Provide horizontal reinforcing of 1 bar in minimum 8 inch deep grouted continuous bond beam at top of parapets. 5. Bond Beam and Parapet Reinforcing at Vertical Control Joints: Place bars continuous through control joint and wrap mastic tape around bars for 18 inches each side of control joint. 6. Bond Beam and Parapet Reinforcing at Comers and Wall Intersections: Provide bent bars to match reinforcing at corners and wall intersections. 7. Lap splices in reinforcing in accordance with General Structural Notes. 8. Use spacers to position reinforcing steel in center of grout at center of wall as required by code. J. Grouting: 1. Reinforcing steel is to be in place and inspected before grouting starts. 2. Vertical cells to be filled shall have vertical alignment to maintain a continuous cell area. 3. Keep cell to be grouted free from mortar. 4. Fill cells solidly with grout in lifts not to exceed 4 feet. 5. Grout may be poured by hand bucket, concrete hopper or through a grout pump. 6. Do not wet down grout space prior to pouring of grout. 7. Stop pours 1-1/2 inches below top of cell to form a key at pour points. 8. Grout shall be consolidated by mechanical vibration during placing before loss of plasticity in a manner to fill grout space. Grout pours greater than 12 inches shall be reconsolidated by mechanical vibration to minimize voids due to water loss. Grout pours 12 inches or less in height shall be mechanically vibrated, or rodded. 9. Grout barrier below bond beams shall be continuous wire lath or other approved material. 10. Grout beams over openings and bond beams in a continuous operation. 11. Solidly grout in place bolts, anchors and other items within wall construction. 12. Fully grout jambs and head of metal door frames connected to masonry. Filling of frames shall be done as each 2 feet of masonry is laid. 13. Use extreme care to prevent grout or mortar from staining face of the masonry. 14. Immediately remove grout or mortar which is visible on face of masonry. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS rm/CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 04220-5 SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 K. Provisions for Other Trades and Built-in Items: 1. Build in items required and indicated, including; but not limited to, reinforcing steel, anchors, flashings, sleeves, frames, structural steel, loose lintels, anchor bolts, nailing blocks, door and window frames and miscellaneous iron. 2. Enclosures for pipes, stacks, ducts and conduits: a. Construct slots, chases, cavities, and similar spaces as required. b. Where masonry is to enclose conduit or piping, bring it to proper level indicated and as directed. C. Cover no pipe, conduit chases or enclosures until advised that Work has been inspected and approved. L. Tolerances: 1. Standard and Economy Level of Quality: a. External corners and other conspicuous lines and levels: +/- 1/2 inch in any 10'-0" section. b. Line of sealant filled movement joints (allowable deviation from specified or indicated): +/- 1/2 inch in any 10'-0" section. C. Actual cross sectional dimension of columns and walls (allowable deviation from specified or indicated): - 3/8 inch, + 3/4 inch. d. Adjacent unit faces in plane (allowable deviation from specified or indicated): +/- 3/16 inch. e. Mortar bed joint thickness (allowable deviation from specified or indicated): -1/8 inch, +1/4 inch. f. Mortar head joint thickness (allowable deviation from specified or indicated): -1/4 inch, + 3/8 inch. g. Vertical alignment of the centerline of corresponding head joints in alternate courses when using other than stack bond (allowable deviation from specified or indicated): +/- 5/8 inch. h. Vertical alignment of the centerline of all head joints in a total wall height not to exceed 30'-0" when using other than stack bond (allowable deviation from specified or indicated): +/- 2 inches. i. Vertical alignment of the centerline of all head joints in total wall height not to exceed 30'-0" when using stack bond: (allowable deviation from specified or indicated): +/- one inch. M. Joint and Crack Control: In accordance with NCMA TEK 10-1. N. Flashing: In accordance with NCMA TEK 19-2 and 19-4 and as per manufacturer's flashing and weep hole diagrams. O. Fireplace construction: 1. Support for extended hearth and combustion chamber: a. Corbel masonry foundation wall, or provide concrete slab as indicated. b. Supporting concrete slab shall be reinforced, capable of resisting thermal stresses resulting from exposure to high temperatures and shall have blockouts for external combustion air dampers and ash drops. C. Permanent forming materials shall be non-combustible. 2. Firebox and Chimney: a. Isolate firebrick and clay flue liner from concrete masonry by a nominal one inch air space. b. Provide fiberglass batt insulation or other non-combustible material in air space to ensure that air space does not become filled with mortar. C. Height of chimney shall be as indicated on drawings and in accordance with building code requirements. d. Mortar joints for refractory mortar shall not exceed 1/4 inch. 3. Lintel and damper installation: Do not solidly embed ends in mortar to allow for expansion. 4. Smoke chamber: a. Provide damper, smoke shelf, smoke dome and surrounding concrete masonry as indicated on drawings. b. Smoke shelf shall be constructed of mortar and shall be curved to assist in checking down drafts. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS T'M/CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS ' DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 04220-6 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 C. Smoke dome shall be constructed so that the side walls and front wall taper inward to form the support of the chimney and shall be parged to reduce friction and to prevent leakage of gases and smoke. 5. Void Areas: Provide void areas at base for form air passageway for external combustion air or ash pit as indicated. Non-essential void areas shall be solidly filled with masonry. t3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Masonry Tests: Inspection and testing of masonry will be performed by a testing laboratory in accordance with Section 01430. 1. Provide free access to Work and cooperate with appointed firm. 2. A set of 3 masonry prisms shall be built and tested in accordance with ASTM C1314 (formerly E447) Method B for each 5,000 square feet of wall area, but not less than one set of 3 masonry prisms for the Project. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Furnish temporary protection for exposed masonry corners subject to injury. B. Carefully cover tops of walls left incomplete at conclusion of day's Work with tarpaulins or other approved covering. C. In hot and dry weather, protect masonry against too rapid drying. D. Protect finished Work against freezing for a period of not less than 48 hours by means of enclosures, artificial heat, or such other protective methods as may be required. END OF SECTION DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 04220-7 A. Pointing of Mortar Joints: ' 1. Point and fill holes and cracks in exposed mortar joints. 2. Cut out defective mortar joints to a depth of at least 1/4 inch. 3. When cutting is complete, remove dust and loose material by brushing or vacuuming. 4. Prehydrate mortar for pointing by mixing dry ingredients with only sufficient water to produce a damp mass of such consistency that it will retain its form when it is pressed into a ball with hands, but will not flow under trowel. 5. Allow mortar to stand for a period of not less than one hour nor more than 2 hours, after which remix with addition of sufficient water to produce satisfactory workability. 6. Pointing mortars shall be identical to adjacent mortar in similar joints and finish results shall match and be indistinguishable from original mortar used. ' 7. Premoisten joint and apply mortar tightly. 8. Tool to match adjacent joints. 9. Moist cure for 72 hours. B. Patching: If approved by Architect, patching of exposed masonry walls shall be done at conclusion of general Work and shall conform as closely as possible to similar surrounding or adjoining Work. 3.06 CLEANING A. Daily Cleaning: Keep walls clean. Soiled masonry from mortar and grout spills which will exposed to view at completion of Project shall be cleaned immediately with stiff fiber brushes until wall is free of dropped or spattered mortar. B. Remove scaffolding and equipment used in Work. ' C. Clean up debris, refuse and surplus material and remove from premises. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Furnish temporary protection for exposed masonry corners subject to injury. B. Carefully cover tops of walls left incomplete at conclusion of day's Work with tarpaulins or other approved covering. C. In hot and dry weather, protect masonry against too rapid drying. D. Protect finished Work against freezing for a period of not less than 48 hours by means of enclosures, artificial heat, or such other protective methods as may be required. END OF SECTION DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 04220-7 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas ' GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 SECTION 04402 EXTEROR STONE ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. -Section Includes: Stone construction as shown on the Drawings and as follows: 1. Exterior Stone Veneer 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ' A. Design Responsibility: The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the design, structural engineering, calculations, shop drawings, fabrication, installation, warranties, certification and submittal procedures. ' B. Performance Requirements: 1. The component parts shall be properly designed or selected for the application. 2. The installation methods shall be proper and adequate for the conditions of installation and use. C. Stone veneer system designed, fabricated and installed to withstand normal loads from wind, gravity, movement of building structure, and thermally induced movement, and to resist deterioration under conditions of normal use including exposure to weather, without failure.- Comply with UBC Chapter 14. D. Connections: Design, detail and fabricate connections of stone veneer system to the ' building making allowance for fabrication and erection tolerances and for structural. deflections from loads. E. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with non -compatible materials. ' 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: ' 1. Indicate layout, pertinent dimensions, anchorages, reinforcement, head, jamb and sill opening details, and jointing methods. 2. Submit Manufacturer's installation instructions and field erection or setting drawings. 3. Provide product data on stone units. B. Samples: Submit samples to the Architect for review prior to constructing job -site mock- ups, delivering materials to the site or commencing the work in this Section in accordance with Section 01330. 1 1. Stone Samples: Provide 2 samples of stone, 8 inches square, to be used on the - Project showing range of texture and/or color variations of the exposed surfaces. Units provided to the Project shall match these samples. ' 2. Mortar Color Samples: In accordance with Section 04065. C. Procedures: Submit requirements for hot and cold weather protection. D. Stone Maintenance: Submit stone supplier's literature or instructions for preventive care ' and maintenance measures pertinent to the specific stone finishes for normal maintenance and special cleaning procedures. 1 11 DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/EXTERIOR STONE DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 04402-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ' ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Materials and workmanship shall meet requirements of the building codes which are applicable to the jurisdiction in which Project is located. C. Subcontractor's Qualifications: The firm executing the work under this Section shall have five years experience in work of similar scope and nature to that specified. D. Stone shall be sound, durable and free of visible defects which will impair the strength, durability or appearance; or concentrations of material that will cause objectionable staining or weakening under normal environments of use. E. All stone shall be obtained from a single quarry having adequate capacity and facilities to meet the specified requirements, and by a firm equipped to process the material promptly and in accordance with the Specifications. The Owner and/or Architect reserve the right to approve the material supplier for stone prior to award of Contract. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Mark each unit with an identifying piece mark correlated with Shop Drawings. Carefully pack and load each stone for shipment. Do not use material for blocking or packing which will cause staining or discoloration. B. Transport and store stone on a stable bed and with sufficient battens, bracing and supports to prevent overstressing by vibration or impact loading. C. Deliver other materials (except bulk materials) in manufacturer's unopened containers fully identified with manufacturer's name, trade name, type, class, grade and color. D. Storage of materials and equipment: Store materials and equipment in unopened. containers. Store off ground and under cover, protected from damage. 1.06 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Hot Weather Requirements: 1. When the ambient air temperature exceeds 100 degrees F., or when the ambient air temperature exceeds 90 degrees F. and the wind velocity is greater than 8 mph, the Masonry Contractor shall implement hot weather protection procedures as submitted to the Architect. 2. Do not spread mortar beds more than 4 feet ahead of placing stone. 3. Place stone within one minute of spreading mortar. B. Cold Weather Requirements: 1. Fully protect stone against freezing by a weather -tight covering which shall also prevent accumulation of ice. 2. Do not lay stone when the temperature of the surrounding atmosphere is below 40 degrees F. or is likely to fall below 40 degrees F. in the 24 hour period after laying, unless adequate protection is provided. C. Field Measurements: 1. Verify measurements shown on Drawings by taking field measurements. 2. Proper fit and attachment of stone is required. 1.07 SCHEDULING AND SEQUENCING A. Coordination: Coordinate with other work relating to stone installation for placing required ' blocking, backing, furring, conduits and other items. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/EXTERIOR STONE ' DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 04402-2 G. Cut stones to produce pieces of thickness, size and shape indicated or required and within fabrication tolerances recommended by applicable stone association; or, if none, stone source for faces, edges, beds and backs. 1. Thickness: In accordance with Drawings. 2. Control depth of stones and back -check to maintain minimum clearances ' indicated between backs of stones and surfaces or projections of structural members, fireproofing, back-up walls and other work behind stones. 3. Dress joints (bed and vertical) straight and at 90 degree angle to face, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Cut stones to produce joints of uniform width and in locations indicated. a. Joint width: See Drawings. 5. Clean sawn backs of stones to remove rust stains and free iron particles. H. Contiguous Work: Provide chases, reveals, reglets, openings and similar features as required to accommodate contiguous work. L Finish exposed faces and edges of stones to comply with requirements indicated for finish under each type and application of stone required and to match approved samples and field -constructed mock-ups. ' DFD ARCHITECTURE . 'C -SPECS TM/EXTERIOR STONE DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 04402-3 SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 PART PRODUCTS 2.01 STONE MATERIALS A. Stone Veneer: Honey Lodge Smooth, 3 inches wide as distributed by White Water Rock & Supply (760) 325-7247. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Ties, Anchors, Control Joints, Through Wall Flashings and Weep Holes: In accordance with Section 04085. B. Setting Buttons: Plastic. C. Mortar and Grout: As specified under Section 04065 - Mortar and Masonry Grout. D. Steel Lintels: As indicated or scheduled on Structural Drawings. ' E. Sealants: Comply with requirements of Section 07900. 2.03 STONE FABRICATION ,! A. - Fabricate stonework in sizes and shapes required to comply with requirements indicated, including details on Drawings and final shop drawings. B. Cut and drill sinkages and holes in stones for anchors, fasteners, supports and lifting devices as indicated or needed to set stonework securely in place; shape beds to fit supports. C. Cut external corners to quirk -miter joint profile: Cut other joints and edges square and at right angles to face, and with backs parallel to face. Make arrises straight, sharp, true, and continuous at joints. D. Slope exposed top surfaces of stone and horizontal sill surfaces for natural wash. E. Coat back and cavity surfaces of stone with bituminous back coating to surfaces not in contact with mortar. Allow coating to cure. F. Allow for expansion and contraction within the limits of the joint material when cutting for anchorage devices. G. Cut stones to produce pieces of thickness, size and shape indicated or required and within fabrication tolerances recommended by applicable stone association; or, if none, stone source for faces, edges, beds and backs. 1. Thickness: In accordance with Drawings. 2. Control depth of stones and back -check to maintain minimum clearances ' indicated between backs of stones and surfaces or projections of structural members, fireproofing, back-up walls and other work behind stones. 3. Dress joints (bed and vertical) straight and at 90 degree angle to face, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Cut stones to produce joints of uniform width and in locations indicated. a. Joint width: See Drawings. 5. Clean sawn backs of stones to remove rust stains and free iron particles. H. Contiguous Work: Provide chases, reveals, reglets, openings and similar features as required to accommodate contiguous work. L Finish exposed faces and edges of stones to comply with requirements indicated for finish under each type and application of stone required and to match approved samples and field -constructed mock-ups. ' DFD ARCHITECTURE . 'C -SPECS TM/EXTERIOR STONE DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 04402-3 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 A. Verification of Conditions: 1. Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental conditions in writing to Architect. 2. Failure to observe this requirement constitutes a waiver to subsequent claims to the contrary and holds Contractor responsible for correction(s) Architect may require. 3. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. 4. Verify, before proceeding with this Work, that required inspections of existing conditions have been completed. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordinate placement of inserts, flashing reglets and similar items in stonework. Furnish installers of other work with drawings or templates showing locations of these items. B. Protection: Protect sills, ledges, offsets and other projections from dropping of mortar and grout. C. Establish lines, levels, and coursing. Protect from disturbance. D. Clean stone surfaces which have become soiled or stained prior to setting to remove soil, stains and foreign materials. Clean by thoroughly scrubbing stones with fiber brushes followed by thorough drenching with clear water. Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or harsh filler or abrasive. 3.03 EXTERIOR STONE. WALL VENEER A. General Requirements: 1. Lay units in uniform and true courses, level and plumb to height indicated on Drawings. 2. Arrange stone pattern to provide consistent joint widths acceptable to Architect. 3. Set stone to straight and level (unless battered) lines to square joint profile. Natural edges should be visible at all corners or ends of walls. Make arises straight, sharp, true, and continuous at joints. 4. Place stone in full mortar setting bed to support stone over full bearing surface and to establish joint dimensions. Tamp or mechanically rod all setting beds to ensure complete and thorough encapsulation of all stone. 5. Slope exposed top surfaces of stone and horizontal sill surfaces for natural wash. Mortar all joints on tops of walls, columns, etc. for a natural wash. 6. Rake and smooth all mortar joints to a profile indicated by Architect. 7. Shore up units until setting bed will maintain panel in position without movement and for a minimum of 7 days after setting. 8. Adjusting Units: a. Units shall be adjusted to be level, plumb and straightened into final position in the wall while the mortar is still soft and plastic enough to ensure a good bond. b. Avoid over -plumbing and pounding of the corners and jambs to fit units after they are set in position. c. If the position of the unit is shifted after the mortar has stiffened, or bond is broken or cracks are formed, re-lay unit in new mortar. 9. Do not lay chipped, cracked or otherwise defective units in the wall where exposed to view. Remove and replace units that chipped, cracked, broken, or otherwise defective whether before or after setting. 10. Openings: Provide openings in masonry walls where required or indicated. Steel lintels shall be provided unless otherwise noted. 11. Cutting of masonry: When required, exposed units shall be cut with a power driven Carborundum or diamond disc blade saw. When using "wet' cutting methods, clean water shall be used on exposed units. 1 1 DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/EXTERIOR STONE ' DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 04402-4 A. Remove and replace stonework of the following description: 1. Broken, chipped, stained or otherwise damaged stones. 2. Defective joints. 3. Stonework not matching approved samples and field -constructed mock-ups. B. Replace in manner which results in stonework showing no evidence of replacement. C. Daily Cleaning: Keep walls clean. Soiled masonry from mortar and grout spills which will be SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ' ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 D. 12. Where fresh masonry joins masonry that is partially or totally set, the exposed ' surface of the set masonry shall be cleaned and lightly wetted so as to obtain the ' best possible bond with the new Work. Loose stone and mortar shall be E. removed. B. Provide expansion joints, control joints and pressure relieving joints of widths and at Remove scaffolding and equipment used in the Work. locations indicated. Do not fill with mortar. G. 3.04 TOLERANCES t� A. Construction Tolerances: Set stones to comply with the following tolerances: 1. Variation from plumb: For lines and surfaces of columns, walls and arrises, do Furnish temporary protection for exposed stone corners subject to injury. not exceed 1/4 -inch in 10 feet, 3/8 -inch in a story height or 20 feet maximum, nor B. 1/2 -inch in 40 feet or more. For external corners, expansion joints and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 -inch in any story or 20 feet maximum, nor day's work with tarpaulins or other approved covering, securely held in place. 1/2 -inch in 40 feet or more. C. 2. Variation from level: For grades indicated for exposed lintels, sills parapets, horizontal grooves and the conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/2 inch in any bay ' or 20 feet maximum, nor 3/4 -inch in 40 feet or more. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/EXTERIOR STONE DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 04402-5 3. Variation of linear building line: For position shown in plan and related portion of columns, walls and partitions, do not exceed 1/2 inch in any bay or 20 feet maximum, nor 3/4 inch in 40 feet or more. 4. Variation in cross-sectional dimensions: For columns and thickness of walls from dimensions indicated, do not exceed minus 1/4 inch, nor plus 1/2 inch. 5. Perimeter stone faces: Perimeter stone faces of adjacent pieces of stone shall not be out of alignment with each other m ore than 1/32 inch. 6. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 feet. 3.05 CUTTING AND FITTING A. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting any item not so indicated on Drawings. 3.06 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace stonework of the following description: 1. Broken, chipped, stained or otherwise damaged stones. 2. Defective joints. 3. Stonework not matching approved samples and field -constructed mock-ups. B. Replace in manner which results in stonework showing no evidence of replacement. C. Daily Cleaning: Keep walls clean. Soiled masonry from mortar and grout spills which will be exposed to view at the completion of the Project shall be cleaned immediately with stiff fiber brushes until the wall is free of dropped or spattered mortar. D. Do not use wire brushes, acid type cleaning agents, cleaning compounds with caustic or harsh fillers, ' or other materials or methods which could damage stone. E. Final Cleaning: In accordance with Section 04930. F. Remove scaffolding and equipment used in the Work. G. Clean up debris, refuse and surplus material and remove from premises. 1 3.07 PROTECTION A. Furnish temporary protection for exposed stone corners subject to injury. B. Carefully cover tops of walls exposed to weather left incomplete at the conclusion of the day's work with tarpaulins or other approved covering, securely held in place. C. In hot and dry weather, protect masonry against too rapid drying. ' DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/EXTERIOR STONE DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 04402-5 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ' ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 D. Protect finished work against freezing for a period of not less than 48 hours by means of enclosures, artificial heat, or such other protective methods as may be required. END OF SECTION 1 11 L DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/EXTERIOR STONE , DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 04402-6 s 1 SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 SECTION 05410 LOAD-BEARING METAL STUD SYSTEM PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Load-bearing metal stud system for interior framing and load-bearing and non -load bearing exterior framing as shown on Drawings and as specified. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: Design structural members in accordance with AISI "Specification for the Design of Cold -formed Structural Steel." 1. Maximum allowable deflection: a. Walls receiving gypsum wallboard finishes: U120. b. Walls receiving plaster and brittle finishes, including EIFS and stucco: U240. C. Walls receiving ceramic tile finishes: U360. d. Walls receiving stone veneer: U600. 2. Design system to provide for movement of components without damage, failure of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners, or other detrimental effects when subject to seasonal or cyclic day/night temperature ranges. 3. Design system to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural members, and clearances of intended openings. 1.03 SUBMITTALS 1 DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ LOAD-BEARING METAL STUD SYSTEM DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 05410-1 A. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's Specifications, design data and installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Submit Drawings showing layout, dimensions and construction details. C. Certificates: 1. Submit Mill Certification with shipment to verify chemical composition, yield strength, tensile strength, elongation and coating thickness. Include listing of applicable ASTM standards specified in this section and comparison of ASTM requirements to actual materials provided to jobsite. 2. Submit Manufacturer's certification that products furnished meet or exceed the specified design requirements. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Performed by certified welders in compliance with AWS D1.3 Structural Welding Code Sheet Steel. B. Regulatory Requirements: Manufacturers shall have current ICBO or CABO evaluation report. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Exercise care during unloading, storage and erection to avoid damage. Dumping on the ground is not permitted. B. Support material stored at the site completely free of the ground, and cover to avoid damage from the elements. 1 DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ LOAD-BEARING METAL STUD SYSTEM DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 05410-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG , ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 A. Furnish products of one of the following Manufacturers, except as approved by the Architect, subject to compliance with Specification requirements: 1. American Studco, Inc. 2. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum. 3. Unimast, Inc. 4. Western 5. CEMCO 6. Dietrich Industries 7. Manufacturing members of the Metal Stud Manufacturer's Association, Corvallis, Oregon, (503) 757-8991 2.02 MATERIALS A. Studs, Track, Bracing and Bridging: Conform to ASTM C955. 1. ASTM A653, G60 hot -dip galvanized coating. 2. Minimum structural properties: In accordance with General Structural Notes. B. Track: Channel shaped; same width as studs, for tight fit; 16 gage solid web, galvanized or painted to match studs. C. Bracing, Furring, Bridging: Formed galvanized sheet steel; channel shaped. Provide CRC - 1-1/2 inch x 16 gage bridging. D. Plates, Gussets, Clips: Galvanized formed steel, thickness determined for conditions encountered, Manufacturer's standard shapes. E. Fasteners and Attachments: 1. Sheet metal: Self -drilling self -tapping screws, type appropriate for attachment detail requirements with penetration through joined materials not less than 3 exposed threads. 2. Anchorage devices to structural components: Power driven or powder actuated, drilled expansion bolts, or screws, with sleeves. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Fabricate assemblies of framed sections of sizes and profiles required, with framing members fitted, reinforced and braced to suit design requirements. B. Fit and assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to site, ready for installation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental conditions in writing to Architect. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. B. Coordination: Coordinate with other Work which affects, connects with, or will be concealed by this Work. 3.02 ERECTION A. Install components in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. B. Align floor and ceiling tracks; locate to wall and partition layout. Secure in place with fasteners or welding at maximum 24 inches. Coordinate installation of sealant with floor and ceiling tracks. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ LOAD-BEARING METAL STUD SYSTEM DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 05410-2 1 1 r DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ LOAD-BEARING METAL STUD SYSTEM DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 05410-3 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 C. Place studs at 16 inches o.c.; not more than 2 inches from abutting walls and at each side of openings. Connect studs to tracks using fastener method unless noted otherwise. D. Construct corners using minimum three Double door studs. stud at wall opening, and window jambs. E. Erect load bearing.studs one piece full length. Splicing of studs is not permitted. F. Erect load, bearing studs, brace and reinforce to develop full strength to meet design requirements. G. Extend stud framing to underside of floor or roof structure above. H. Coordinate placement of insulation in multiple stud spaces made inaccessible after erection. I. Install intermediate studs above and below openings to match wall stud spacing. J. Provide deflection allowance in stud track, directly below horizontal building framing for non -load bearing framing. K. Attach cross studs or furring channels to studs for attachment of fixtures anchored to walls. L. Install framing between studs for attachment of mechanical and electrical items, and to prevent stud rotation. M. Touch-up field welds and damaged galvanized surfaces with primer. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: At Owner's request, Contractor shall provide spot testing of actual properties of steel framing to verify compliance with specifications. 3.04 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. END OF SECTION 1 1 r DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ LOAD-BEARING METAL STUD SYSTEM DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 05410-3 SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS PART GENERAL r1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Metal fabrications, including items fabricated from iron and steel shapes, plates, bars, strips, tubes, pipes and castings which are not a part of structural steel or other metal systems in other Sections of these Specifications. Types of metal items include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Carpenter's iron work. 2. Steel gratings and frames. 3. Steel pipe guards. 4. Miscellaneous framing and supports. 5. Miscellaneous steel trim. 6. Stair nosings. 7. Other items as indicated. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit Drawings for the fabrication and erection of assemblies of items which are not completely shown by the Manufacturer's data sheets. 1. Include plans and elevations at not less than 1 inch to V-0" scale, and include details of sections and connections at not less than 3 inches to V-0" scale. 2. Show anchorage and accessory items. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply with the following, except as otherwise shown and specified: 1. AISC "Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings." 2. AISI "Specifications for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members." 3. AWS "Structural Welding Code -Steel." 4. ASTM A6 "General Requirements for Rolled Steel Plates Shapes, Sheet Piping and Bars for Structural Use." B. Qualifications: Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS "Standard Qualification Procedure." 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Exercise care during unloading, storage and erection to avoid damage. Dumping on the 9 9 P 9 ground is not permitted. B. Support material stored at the site completely free of the ground, and cover to avoid damage from the elements. �1.05 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS , A. Field Measurements: Take field measurementsrior to preparation of ShopDrawings and fabrication, where possible, to ensure proper fitting o t he Work. Allow r trimming and fitting wherever the taking of field measurements before fabrication might delay the Work. r DFD ARCHITECTURE " C -SPECS TM/METAL FABRICATIONS DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 05500-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A36. B. Steel Bars and Bar -size Shapes: ASTM A36. C. Steel Tubing (Not -formed, Welded or Seamless): ASTM A500, Grade B (Fy = 46,000 psi). D. Cold -Finished Carbon Steel Bars: ASTM A108, Grade as selected by fabricator. E. Hot -rolled Carbon Steel Sheets and Strips: ASTM A568 and ASTM A569, pickled and oiled. F. Cold -rolled Carbon Steel Sheets: ASTM A611. G. Hot -dip Galvanized Steel Sheets: ASTM A653, with G90 zinc coating. H. Perforated Steel Sheets: As manufactured by Kovach, Inc. or McNichols Co., or McMaster Carr, thickness and pattern as follows: 1. Thickness: 20 gauge 2. Pattern: 3/8 inch diameter holes, 1/2 inch staggered centers, 5 holes per inch. I. Cold -drawn Steel Tubing: ASTM A512, sunk drawn, butt welded, cold -finished and stress -relieved. J. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, type as selected; Grade A. Black finish unless galvanizing is required. Standard weight, Schedule 40, unless otherwise shown or specified. K. Anchors: 1. Masonry Anchorage Devices: Expansion shield, FS FF -S-325. 2. Toggle bolts: Tumble -wing type, FS FF -B-588; type, class and style as required. 3. Threaded -type concrete inserts: Galvanized ferrous castings, internally threaded to receive 3/4 inch diameter machine bolts; either malleable iron complying with ASTM A47 or cast steel complying with ASTM A27; hot -dip galvanized in compliance with ASTM A153. L. Fasteners: Provide zinc -coated fasteners with galvanizing complying with ASTM A153 for exterior use or where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for the type, grade and class required for the installation of miscellaneous metal items. 1. Bolts and nuts: ASTM A307, Grade A, regular hexagon head. 2. Bolts, hexagon and square: ANSI B-18.2.1. 3. Bolts, round head: ANSI B-18.5. 4. Lag bolts: Square head type. 5. Wood screws: ANSI B-18.6.1, flat head carbon steel. 6. Plain washers: ASTM F844 helical spring type carbon steel. M. Stair Nosings: Wooster Products WP -4J; Type 6063-T5 extruded aluminum with anti -slip filler. Color: Black. N. Galvanizing: ASTM All 23 for steel plates, bars and strips. O. Paint: 1. Metal Primer: VOC compliant, Tnemec FD88-559 Gray. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/METAL FABRICATIONS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 05500-2 D. Carpenter's Iron Work: 1. Furnish bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing and supporting woodwork, and for anchoring or securing woodwork to concrete or other structures. Straight bolts and other stock rough hardware are specified in Division 6 Sections. 2. Manufacture or fabricate items of sizes, shapes and dimensions required. Furnish malleable iron washers for heads and nuts which bear on wood structural connections; elsewhere, furnish steel washers. E. Loose Bearing Plates: Provide loose bearing plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction, made flat, free from warps or twists, and of required thickness and bearing area. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting as required. F. Loose Steel Lintels: provide loose structural steel shape lintels for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions, as shown. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit. Provide not less than 4 inch bearing at each side of openings, unless otherwise shown. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/METAL FABRICATIONS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 05500-3 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG �. ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Inserts Anchorages: Furnish and inserts and anchoring devices to be set in concrete or built into masonry for installation of Miscellaneous Metal Work. Provide setting Drawings, templates, instructions and directions for installation of anchorage devices. �. 2.03 FABRICATION A. General: For fabrication of Miscellaneous Metal Work which will be exposed to view, use only materials which are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness. Remove such blemishes by grinding or by welding and grinding, prior to cleaning, treating and application of surface finishes, including zinc coatings. B. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop, when possible, to minimize field splicing and assembly of units at the site. Disassemble units only to extent necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. C. Workmanship: 1. Use materials of the size and thickness shown, or if not shown, of the required size and thickness to produce adequate strength and durability of the finished product for the intended use. Work to the dimensions of fabrication and support. Use type of materials shown or specified for various components of Work. 2. Form exposed Work true to line and level with accurate angles, surfaces and straight sharp edges. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise shown. Form bent -metal corners to the smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing the Work. 3. Weld corners and seam continuously and in accordance with the recommendations of AWS. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush to match and blend with adjoining surfaces. 4. Form exposed connections with hairline joints which are flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of the type shown, or if not shown, use Phillips flat -head (countersunk) screws or bolts. 5. Provide for anchorage of type shown, coordinated with supporting structure and the progress schedule. Fabricate as required to provide adequate support for the intended use of the Work. 6. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap Miscellaneous Metal Work as may be required to receive finish hardware and similar items of Work. 7. Use hot -rolled steel bars for Work fabricated from bar stock, unless Work is indicated to be fabricated from cold -rolled, or cold -finished stock. D. Carpenter's Iron Work: 1. Furnish bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing and supporting woodwork, and for anchoring or securing woodwork to concrete or other structures. Straight bolts and other stock rough hardware are specified in Division 6 Sections. 2. Manufacture or fabricate items of sizes, shapes and dimensions required. Furnish malleable iron washers for heads and nuts which bear on wood structural connections; elsewhere, furnish steel washers. E. Loose Bearing Plates: Provide loose bearing plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction, made flat, free from warps or twists, and of required thickness and bearing area. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting as required. F. Loose Steel Lintels: provide loose structural steel shape lintels for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions, as shown. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit. Provide not less than 4 inch bearing at each side of openings, unless otherwise shown. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/METAL FABRICATIONS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 05500-3 SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 , G. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: 1. Provide miscellaneous steel framing and supports which are not a part of the structural steel framework, as required to complete Work. 2. Fabricate miscellaneous units to sizes, shapes and profiles shown, or if not shown, of the dimensions required to receive adjacent grating, plates, doors or other Work to be retained by the framing. Except as otherwise shown, fabricate from structural steel shapes and plates and steel bars of all welded construction using mitered corners, welded brackets and splice plates, and a minimum number of joints for field connection. Cut, drill and tap units to receive hardware and similar items to be anchored to the Work. 3. Equip units with integrally welded anchor straps for casting into concrete or building into masonry wherever possible. Furnish inserts If units must be installed after concrete Is poured. Except as otherwise shown, space anchors 24 inches o.c., and provide minimum anchor units of 1-1/4 inch x 1/3 inch x 8 inch steel straps. H. Miscellaneous Steel Trim: Provide shapes and sizes as required for the profiles shown. Except as otherwise noted, fabricate units from structural steel shapes and plates and steel bars, with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Use concealed field splices wherever possible. Provide cutouts, fittings and anchorages as required for coordination of assembly and installation with other Work. I. Shelf Angles: Provide structural steel shelf angles of sizes shown for attachment to concrete framing. 2.04 FINISHING A. Galvanizing: Comply with ASTM A123 and A153 for the hot -dip process after fabrication. I B. Shop Painting: 1. Shop paint Miscellaneous Metal Work, except those members or portions of members to be embedded in concrete or masonry, surfaces and edges to be field welded, and galvanized surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Remove scale, rust and other deleterious materials before shop coat of paint is applied. Clean in accordance with SSPC SP -2, SP -3, or SP -7, as required. Remove oil, grease and similar contaminants in accordance with SSPC SP -1. 3. Apply one shop coat of metal primer paint to fabricated metal items, except apply 2 coats of paint to surfaces which are inaccessible after assembly or erection. 4. Immediately after surface preparation, brush or spray on metal primer paint in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions, and to provide a uniform dry film thickness of 2 mils for each coat. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental conditions in writing to Architect. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. B. Coordination: Coordinate with other Work which affects, connects with, or will be concealed by this Work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required. B. Supply items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting templates to appropriate Trades. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS r /METAL FABRICATIONS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 05500-4 SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 B. Allow for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. C. Field weld components indicated on Shop Drawings. D. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1. E. Obtain Architect approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. F. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed and galvanized members, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. 3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non -cumulative. B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment: 1/4 inch 3.05 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. END OF SECTION DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/METAL FABRICATIONS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 05500-5 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas 'GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 SECTION 05520 HANDRAILS, RAILINGS AND WINDSCREENS r PART 11 GENERAL 1.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: 1. Structural performance of handrails and railing systems: Comply with ASTM E985 based on testing in accordance with ASTM E894 and E935. B. Design Requirements: 1. Comply with ASTM E985 and UBC Section 1006. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit details and erection diagrams showing construction methods and dimensions for connection with other Work and materials. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original unopened packaging with labels intact. Protect finished surfaces with removable wrapping or coating which will not bond when exposed to sunlight. B. Storage: Adequately protect against damage while stored at the site. C. Handling: Comply with manufacturer's instructions. 1.04 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify existing conditions by taking field measurements. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Structural Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A36. B. Steel Bars and Bar -size Shapes: ASTM A36. C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B (Fy = 46,000 psi). D. Gray Iron Castings: ASTM A48, Class 30. E. Malleable Iron Castings: ASTM A47, Grade as selected. F. Steel Pipe: ATM A53, type as selected, Grade A standard weight (Schedule 40). G. Windscreens: 1. Brackets: Blumcraft Style RG 200. 2. Glazing: As specified in Section 08800. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/HANDRAILS, RAILINGS AND WINDSCREENS DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 05520-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 H. Paint: 1. Metal Primer: VOC compliant. a. Interior Steel: Tnemec 10-99W (white). b. Exterior Steel (exposed): Tnemec-Zinc 90-97. 2. Galvanizing repair paint: High zinc dust content; MIL -P-21035 (Ships). I. Wall Bracket (Pipe Handrails): Julius Blum #382 with appropriate fastener and anchor plate. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Shop Assembly: 1. Conform with AISC Standard Specifications, Rules and Practice in the "Steel Construction Manual." 2. Form and fabricate the Work to meet installation conditions. 3. Include accessories to adequately secure the Work in place. 4. Make provisions to connect with or to receive abutting construction. B. Fabricate windscreens in configurations as indicated on Drawings. C. Shop/Factory/Finishing: Clean surfaces of grease, rust, mill scale, and other foreign matter, and apply coat of primer, except galvanized surfaces. D. Galvanize exterior railing, sleeves, brackets and flanges after fabrication. E. Make connections between members, unless otherwise indicated, with welds or bolts. Conceal connections in finished Work where possible. F. Where exposed, use Phillips oval head screws: G. Accurately member or miter exposed joints with hairline joints. H. Grind welds, projections and corners in finished surfaces smooth. No identifying marks shall remain exposed. I. Welds shall be flush type, with fillets dressed to uniform radius, using the shielded arc method. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental conditions in writing to Architect. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. B. Coordination: Coordinate with other work which affects, connects with, or will be concealed by this Work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install steel railings, handrails and windscreens at locations indicated. B. Install items anchored in concrete in the formwork, where practicable. C. Install items to be built into masonry so masonry can be built up to them. D. Install posts and vertical members plumb within 1/8 inch of vertical. Install longitudinal members parallel with each other and to floor surfaces or slope of stairs to within 1/8 inch per 10 running feet. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/HANDRAILS, RAILINGS AND WINDSCREENS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 05520-2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 E. Securely anchor wall brackets. 3.03 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion of the Work, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. END OF SECTION DFD ARCHITECTURE DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 C -SPECS TM/HANDRAILS, RAILINGS AND WINDSCREENS SECTION 05520-3 11 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 SECTION 05700 ORNAMENTAL METALS PART GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Provide labor materials, equipment and services necessary to furnish and install ornamental metal and related work. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Excessive fading: A change in appearance which is perceptible and objectionable as determined by the Architect when viewed visually in comparison with the original color range standards. B. Excessive non-uniformity of color or shade: Non-uniform fading during the period of the warranty to the extent that adjacent panels have a color difference greater than the original acceptable color range. C. Cracking, peeling, pitting or corroding: Defects, discernible from a distance of 10', resulting from the natural elements in the atmosphere. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Subcontractor qualifications: Fabricate and install the work of this Section using a subcontractor having a minimum of 5 years experience in this type of work. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Allowable tolerances: Standard commercial tolerances shall apply to finished, fabricated and assembled materials except for flatness of sheets and plates for which the following tolerances apply. Longitudinal or Transverse Distance, Feet Center to center of Buckles or Edge Wave* 0 2 3 4 Through 2 Through 3 Through 4 Through 5 Over 6 3/32" 3/8" 3/16" 1/411 5/16" * Also applicable to overall length or width of sheet if only one longitudinal or transverse buckle or edge wave is present. 1 C. Reference standards: Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with the applicable provisions and recommendations of the following. 1. NAAMM Metal Finishes Manual 2. AWS Structural Welding Code 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawing for the work of this Section. Shop Drawings for items specified by design load shall include engineering calculations sealed by a Structural Engineer registered in the State of Arizona. B. Samples: Submit samples of copper finishes DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS T"/ORNAMENTAL METAL DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 05700-1 E. Dissimilar materials: Separate unlike metals or alloys with a heavy coating of bituminous paint, separator gaskets or slip gaskets as required to prevent galvanic action. F. Fabricate chimney flue in configurations as indicated on Drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which the work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ORNAMENTAL METAL DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 05700-2 , SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 ' C. Certificates: Submit certification in an acceptable form, signed by the manufacturer and the fabricator, stating that the anodic coating complies with the Contract Documents. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Storage: Store off ground and under cover, protected from damage. B. Handling: Handle materials so that surfaces are protected. Prevent distortion or damage to fabricated pieces. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS B. Copper: Commercially pure copper, CDA 11000, 16 gauge (0.050 inch). Solder shall be 50-50 lead tin. Copper shall be laser etched with logo to match Architect's sample and as indicated on Drawings. , C. Fasteners: Stainless steel Type 300 series, selected to prevent galvanic action with the components fastened. Where exposed in finished surfaces, use oval -head countersunk cross -headed screws with head diameter one (1) screw size smaller than the shank diameter, finished to match adjacent surfaces. D. Adhesive: Epoxy cement adhesive compatible with metals specified. 2.02 FABRICATION A. General: Fit and assemble work in the shop as far as practicable. B. Welding and fitting: Complete the welding, cutting, drilling and fitting of joints prior to finishing. Weld with electrodes and by methods recommended by the aluminum manufacturer in accordance with applicable Structural Welding Code recommendations. Use only methods which will avoid distortion or dislocation of exposed faces. Grind weld areas smooth and restore finish before proceeding with other treatment. C. Fasteners: Conceal fastenings unless otherwise indicated or specified. D. Joints: Carefully fit and match work with continuity of line and design, using rigidly secured joints with hairline contact, unless otherwise indicated. Reinforce members and joints with plates, bar, rods or angles for rigidity and strength as needed to fulfill performance requirements. Use concealed non-ferrous metal fasteners for jointing which cannot be welded. E. Dissimilar materials: Separate unlike metals or alloys with a heavy coating of bituminous paint, separator gaskets or slip gaskets as required to prevent galvanic action. F. Fabricate chimney flue in configurations as indicated on Drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which the work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ORNAMENTAL METAL DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 05700-2 I SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 3.02 PREPARATION A. Field measurements: Verify dimensions before proceeding with the Work. Obtain field measurements for work required to be accurately fitted to other construction. Be responsible for the accuracy of such measurements and precise fitting and assembly of finished work. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: Install work in locations indicated, plumb, level and in line with adjacent materials where required. B. Coordination: Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the work of those trades for interface with the work of this Section. Coordinate schedules for installation of the work of this Section with schedules for other installations to assure orderly progress of the total construction sequence. 3.04 CLEANING A. Upon completion of this portion of the Work, promptly clean exposed portions and remove traces of dirt, grease and foreign materials. 3.05 DAMAGE AND REPAIR A. Upon completion of the installation, visually check exposed surfaces of the work of this Section, and touch up scratches and abrasives to be completely invisible to the unaided eye from a distance of five feet. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect finished surfaces against damage and overspray. END OF SECTION lDFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ORNAMENTAL METAL DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 05700-3 i L 1 1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Rough carpentry. 2. Solid wood T&G decking. 3. Fascia and Trim Pieces. 4. Exterior Trellis. 5. Underlayment. 6. Other items as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit technical data for wood preservative and fire retardant products. B. Samples: Submit two representative samples of each exposed wood and accessory item as follows: 1. 12 -inch length of re -sawn board lumber. 2. Wood with sandblasted finish, minimum 12 -inches x 12 -inches square. 3. Proposed bolt and nut with head type as selected by Architect to be used in the finished Work. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Identify each piece of lumber or plywood used for structural framing with grade and trade mark of a lumber grading organization. Trade mark of manufacturer shall also appear on each piece. B. Grading Rules: Conform with applicable requirements of American Lumber Standards "Simplified Practice Recommendation R-16" and to grading rules of manufacturer's association under whose rules the lumber is produced. C. Solid Wood Roof Decking: Comply with AITC 112, "Standard for Tongue -and -Groove Heavy Timber Roof Decking." D. Standards: Conform with requirements of American Plywood Association, U. S. Dept. of Commerce Commercial Standards and American Wood Preservers Association Standards, as they apply. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original unopened packaging with labels intact. B. Storage: Store off ground to assure adequate ventilation, and protect against damage while stored at the site. C. Handling: Comply with manufacturer's instructions. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Store materials for which a maximum moisture is specified in areas where humidity can be controlled. ' DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ROUGH CARPENTRY DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 06100-1 A. Plywood: Each panel of softwood plywood shall be identified with the APA grade - trademark and shall meet the requirements of PS -1-83 for softwood plywood. B. Plywood which has an edge or surface permanently exposed to the weather shall be exterior type. Panel thickness and identification index shall be as shown on the Drawings and as specified and shall also be stamped on each piece of plywood. 2.03 SOLID WOOD DECKING A. Solid Wood, Matched, Decking: Standard tongue -and -groove or double tongue -and -groove decking of solid wood (not laminated), sizes as indicated on Drawings., of the following unit grade of the indicated pattern in the required species: 1. Grade: Select Decking, with structural properties equal to or exceeding those indicated on the Structural Drawings. B. Moisture Content: Provide wood decking fabricated from lumber of 19 percent moisture content (air or kiln dried), and include S -DRY or similar indication in grade marking or certification of grade. C. Pattern and Dressing, Solid Matched Decking: Standard pattern of type indicated, surfaced on top and bottom, and sanded on exposed surfaces. 2.04 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT A. Preservative Treatment: 1. Wood sillplates and ledgers bolted in direct contact with concrete or masonry, located at or below grade only shall be pressure treated lumber. Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc. "Wolman CCA". 2. Blocking occurring on top of or above the roof deck, including the nailer beneath the flashing at parapet caps, shall be treated lumber. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ROUGH CARPENTRY DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 06100-2 , SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LUMBER MATERIALS , A. Species: Douglas Fir graded in accordance with Standard Grading and Dressing Rules of WCLIB. Framing lumber shall be stress grade. All sides shall be surfaced or provided with special architectural finish as specified. B. Lumber Grades: As follows unless noted differently on the Structural Drawings: 1. One inch boards: Construction. 2. Framing lumber, ledgers, plates, 2 to 4 inches thick: Number 2 or better. 3. Beams: Number 1 or better. 4. Beams, where so noted on Drawings: Select Structural. 5. Posts and columns, 4x and under in least dimension: Number 1 or better. 6. Posts and columns, 6x and larger in least dimension: Number 1 or better. 7. Misc. blocking, bridging, etc: Utility. 8. . Grounds and furring: Construction Grade Douglas Fir or No. 2 White Pine. C. Glue -laminated beams for trusses are specified in Section 06180. , D. Moisture Content: Lumber shall be air-dried or kiln -dried. At time of installation, moisture content, expressed as a percentage of the weight of the oven -dry wood, shall not exceed 19 percent for lumber of up to two inches nominal thickness and 15 percent for exterior trim and siding. Moisture content of lumber over two inches nominal thickness shall conform to the rules of the association under which it is graded. 2.02 SHEATHING MATERIALS A. Plywood: Each panel of softwood plywood shall be identified with the APA grade - trademark and shall meet the requirements of PS -1-83 for softwood plywood. B. Plywood which has an edge or surface permanently exposed to the weather shall be exterior type. Panel thickness and identification index shall be as shown on the Drawings and as specified and shall also be stamped on each piece of plywood. 2.03 SOLID WOOD DECKING A. Solid Wood, Matched, Decking: Standard tongue -and -groove or double tongue -and -groove decking of solid wood (not laminated), sizes as indicated on Drawings., of the following unit grade of the indicated pattern in the required species: 1. Grade: Select Decking, with structural properties equal to or exceeding those indicated on the Structural Drawings. B. Moisture Content: Provide wood decking fabricated from lumber of 19 percent moisture content (air or kiln dried), and include S -DRY or similar indication in grade marking or certification of grade. C. Pattern and Dressing, Solid Matched Decking: Standard pattern of type indicated, surfaced on top and bottom, and sanded on exposed surfaces. 2.04 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT A. Preservative Treatment: 1. Wood sillplates and ledgers bolted in direct contact with concrete or masonry, located at or below grade only shall be pressure treated lumber. Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc. "Wolman CCA". 2. Blocking occurring on top of or above the roof deck, including the nailer beneath the flashing at parapet caps, shall be treated lumber. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ROUGH CARPENTRY DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 06100-2 , SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide bolts and nuts with head type as selected by Architect where exposed in the finished Work. B. Nails: Common wire, galvanized for exterior Work, meeting FS FF -N-101 of the sizes indicated on the Drawings. C. Screws: Standard domestic manufacture, bright steel, except galvanized for exterior use and of brass, bronze, aluminum or stainless steel when used to attach items made of those materials. Screws used for attaching interior trim and finish to drywall partitions shall be Type S self -drilling, self -tapping anodized steel drywall screws of required lengths as specified in Section 09250. D. Bolts: Standard mild steel, square head machine bolts with square nuts and malleable iron or steel plate washers or carriage bolts with square nuts and cut washers as indicated. Bolts, nuts and washers, wholly or partially exposed on exterior shall be 1 galvanized. E. Structural Bolts: Machine bolts, or carriage bolts, of structural grade steel with square nuts, conforming to ASTM A307. F. Steel plates and angles: ASTM A36, galvanized after fabrication. G. Lag screws, shear plates and split ring connectors: Conform to requirements of the ,National Design Specifications for Stress Grade Lumber and its Fastenings" of National Forest Products Association. H. Framing anchors and joist hangers: Simpson Company products or similar devices as I. approved by Architect and noted on Drawings. Power driven inserts: Ramset, or as approved by Architect meeting FS GGG-D-777a. Install as per manufacturer's printed directions. Charge shall be powerful enough to 1prevent J. spalling of concrete. Galvanizing: ASTM A653. K. L. Toggle Bolts: FS FF -B-588. Fabricated Connections: 1. Sheet metal galvanized of size and type shown on Drawings. 2. Structural Steel: ASTM A36. Welding by qualified welders in conformance with ' AWS D1. One shop coat of paint per Federal Specification TT -P-86, Type II to parts not embedded. M. Underlayment: ASTM D226, No. 30 unperforated asphalt saturated felts. ' PART 3 EXECUTION 1 3.01 FRAMING A. Contractor's Option: Drawings and specifications are based upon the use of metal framing as specified in Section 09100 ,for interior partitions. If approved by Architect, Contractor may use wood for framing in lieu of metal framing B. Coordination: Install wood framing making proper provisions for Work of other trades. Cut wood required to accommodate plumbing, heating and ventilating, electrical and other trades. Fit neatly around exposed items, as outlet boxes, conduit, pipes and ducts. ' Protect adjacent Work. Before proceeding with rigid sheathing, make certain required inspections have been made. DFD ARCHITECTURE C-SPECS'rM/ROUGH CARPENTRY DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 06100-3 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 C. Structural Members: No cutting, notching or drilling without prior approval of the structural engineer through the Architect. D. Wood Backing: Provide 2x6 minimum wood backing, furring, stripping or blocking indicated or required at all accessory mountings and for installation and attachment of work of other trades. Provide approved fire -proofed wood backing where required by Code in noncombustible or fire -rated construction. E. Connections: Subdrill where necessary to avoid splitting. F. Bolts: Drill bolt holes 1/32 inch larger than bolt diameter. Use square plate or malleable iron washers under heads and nut where they bear against wood. Re -tighten bolts immediately prior to concealing with finish materials. Re -tighten exposed bolts immediately prior to final inspection. G. Lag Screws and Screws: Subdrill, use square plate or malleable iron washer under lag screw heads when they bear on wood. H. Exterior base plates or sills resting on concrete: Bed in cement mortar to obtain a continuous bearing. Mortar shall consist of one part cement to three parts sand. Mix mortar in small quantities so that it can be used promptly. Size plates or sills and set level and true to line. Bolt down with bolts of size, length and spacing indicated with a bolt not more than 9 inches from the end of any piece. I. Rough framing: Fit closely, set accurately to required lines and levels, and secure rigidly in place. Set horizontal and inclined members with crown edge up. Reinforce cut members as directed. Bolt, nail and spike in a thorough manner with not less than the sizes and quantities indicated or specified. Structural members shall provide full contact at bearing surfaces. Studs: Wall and partitions shall be nominal 2x4 and 2x6 studs 16 inches on center unless otherwise noted or unless they are required to be larger to accommodate mechanical or electrical equipment, piping and fixtures or fixtures or equipment of any other Trade. Unless otherwise detailed, panels, valve covers, cleanouts; devices, access doors, recessed cabinet boxes, etc., shall be mounted flush with the adjacent wall surface. When any such item is of a depth where it is not practical to use solid studding to the full thickness of the wall, then the wall shall be furred. When furring is required, it shall extend the full width and from floor to roof or ceiling joists. The studs comprising interior partitions and the wall material affixed thereto shall extend from floor to roof or ceiling joist framing except as shown. Staggered stud walls shall be constructed where shown on plans and as detailed. K. Top plates in bearing partitions: Shall be doubled and lapped at each intersection with ' walls or partitions. Stagger joints in upper and lower members of top plate not less than 4 feet. L. Provide blocking not less than 2 inches in thickness of same width as stud as follows: 1. Stud partitions or walls more than 8 feet, but not more than 14 feet in height: One , row of blocking fitted snugly and nailed into mid -height of stud unless otherwise indicated. 2. Walls or partitions over 14 feet in height: 2 or more rows of blocking. Locate rows of blocking so that in no case will the distance between sole or top plates , and blocking or between lines of blocking exceed 8 feet. 3. Provide solid fire blocking at ceiling line at dropped ceilings. M. Frame corners solid where stud walls or partitions meet or as shown on the Structural Drawing. N. Provide double joists under partitions parallel to joists, and for headers and side members at openings larger than 4 feet in dimension. O. Joist framing into headers and header joists shall be supported on joist hangers. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ROUGH CARPENTRY DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 06100-4 ' r : SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ' ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 3.02 PLYWOOD SHEATHING ' A. Install roof sheathing with long dimension perpendicular to joints. B. Install wall sheathing with long dimension vertical. C. Sheathing shall have edges blocked and nailed for diaphragm or shear wall stresses as shown on.the Drawings. D. Install with the "C" or best face on exposed side. - E. At non -tongue and groove sheathing, provide plywood clips at 24 inches O.C. maximum at unsupported or unblocked edges. 3.03 UNDERLAYMENT A. Cover sheathing with underlayment where indicated on Drawings. Apply at bottom edge and work towards top of sheathing in shingle fashion, free of wrinkles over substrate to ' achieve 100 percent adhesion in accordance with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Lap side joints a minimum of 2 inches. Stagger end laps of each consecutive layer. 3.04 SOLID WOOD DECKING A. Install decking as shown on Structural Drawings with end joints located over bearings as indicated. B. Decking'shall be stain finish in accord with Section 09900. 3.05 FASCIA, TRELLIS AND MISCELLANEOUS TRIM A. Install fascia and miscellaneous trim in locations indicated on Drawings. r B. C. Construct trellis as indicated on Drawings. Finish in accordance with in Section 09900. 3.06 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove excess materials, equipment and debris and dispose of away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. rEND OF SECTION 1 1 ' DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ROUGH CARPENTRY DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 06100-5 A. Shop Drawings: Submit engineering drawings conforming with the design load and deflection criteria shown on the Drawings for review before fabrication begins. These drawings shall bear the seal of a registered professional Engineer. See structural drawings for additional requirements. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design: Trusses shall conform with applicable provisions of the following: 1. NDS -85 for lumber. 2. TPI -85 for criteria. 3. UBC for code compliance. B. Report: Submit ICBO report for metal connectors. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Handling: Handle fabricated trusses and subassemblies with care so that they are not subject to damage. During the construction period, provide means for adequate distribution of concentrated loads so that the carrying capacity of any one truss or other component is not exceeded. B. Storage: If the trusses are to be stockpiled or stored prior to erection, set in vertical positions and rest upon temporary bearing supports and brace so they will not be subject to unusual bending or tip over. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions shown on Drawings by taking field measurements and checking shop drawings details before proceeding with fabrications. 1.06 SCHEDULING A. Time delivery and installation of trusses to avoid delaying other trades whose work is dependent on or affected by the carpentry work and to comply with protection and storage requirements. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Species: Douglas Fir #1. B. Fabricate trusses in accordance with approved engineering drawings. C. Moisture Content: The average moisture content of lumber 2 inches or less in thickness shall be 19 percent or less at time of enclosure. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/WOOD TRUSSES DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 06173-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas ' GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 SECTION 06173 WOOD TRUSSES PART GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Prefabricated wood trusses as shown on the Drawings and as specified. Miscellaneous fastening devices, except for connector plates, are specified elsewhere. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit engineering drawings conforming with the design load and deflection criteria shown on the Drawings for review before fabrication begins. These drawings shall bear the seal of a registered professional Engineer. See structural drawings for additional requirements. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design: Trusses shall conform with applicable provisions of the following: 1. NDS -85 for lumber. 2. TPI -85 for criteria. 3. UBC for code compliance. B. Report: Submit ICBO report for metal connectors. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Handling: Handle fabricated trusses and subassemblies with care so that they are not subject to damage. During the construction period, provide means for adequate distribution of concentrated loads so that the carrying capacity of any one truss or other component is not exceeded. B. Storage: If the trusses are to be stockpiled or stored prior to erection, set in vertical positions and rest upon temporary bearing supports and brace so they will not be subject to unusual bending or tip over. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions shown on Drawings by taking field measurements and checking shop drawings details before proceeding with fabrications. 1.06 SCHEDULING A. Time delivery and installation of trusses to avoid delaying other trades whose work is dependent on or affected by the carpentry work and to comply with protection and storage requirements. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Species: Douglas Fir #1. B. Fabricate trusses in accordance with approved engineering drawings. C. Moisture Content: The average moisture content of lumber 2 inches or less in thickness shall be 19 percent or less at time of enclosure. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/WOOD TRUSSES DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 06173-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 D. Lumber defects such as wane or knots occurring in the connector plate area shall not affect more than ten percent of required plate area, or number of effective teeth required for each truss member. E. Connector Plates: Minimum of 0.036 inch thick and manufactured from ASTM A653 Grade A steel, hot dip galvanized to meet Coating Designation G60. In highly corrosive environments or when fire retardant lumber is specified, furnish stainless steel connector plates in lieu of hot dip galvanized. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Cut members accurately to length, angle and true to line to assure tight joints for the finished truss. Place members and connector plates in special jigs with the members tightly clamped in place and maintain in that position until the connector plates have been pressed into the lumber simultaneously on both sides of the joints. do not permit open joints which depend on the stiffness of the metal connector plates to transmit stresses or Improperly fitting joints. Build camber into the member, as noted, by properly positioning the members in the fabricating jig. B. Apply connector plates to both faces of truss at each joint to provide firm even contract between the plate and the wood. Wood members shall be accurately cut and fabricated so that members have good bearing and completed truss units are uniform. See Truss Plate Institute Quality Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses QST -88 for tolerances and other special requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION , 3.01 ERECTION A. Coordinate with other trades whose work relates to truss installation. B. Securely brace and block trusses both during erection and after permanent installation, in a building in accordance with Commentary and Recommendations (BWT-80) as published by the Truss Plate Institute and the manufacturer's written instructions. Erection bracing and blocking shall hold trusses straight and plumb and in safe condition , until decking and permanent truss bracing has been fastened forming a structurally sound roof framing system. C. Install erection and permanent bracing and blocking and permanently fasten trusses , before application of loads. Permanent structural cross bracing to ensure overall rigidity of the roof system shall be in accordance with the project Structural Drawings. Check truss design drawings for additional special bracing or blocking requirements. ' D. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, nailing shall be as required to assemble and secure wood construction, but in no case less than that required by applicable building codes. Connectors shall have current ICBO approval. , E. Unless specifically shown, wood plugs or nailing blocks shall not be used. Powder cartridge driven units may not be used on structural members without prior approval. Provide nails, strikes, screws, straps and similar items of suitable type and sizes to attach and hold members securely in place as may be necessary. ' F. Bridging:. Install a continuous line of 2 inches x 4 inches bridging connected to each member at the web or chord member during the erection stage. Provide one line along the top and one line along the bottom chord. ' G. Alignment: Erect members with the top and bottom chords in true vertical alignment. Align top chords of trusses parallel to each other and straight with no point in the plane on the top chords more than 3/8 inch out of true horizontal. 1 DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TmMOOD TRUSSES DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 06173-2 ' SASC Inc. Phoenix . Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 3.02 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. END OF SECTION DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TMMOOD TRUSSES DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 06173-3 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 SECTION 06180 GLUE -LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION PART GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings showing materials, dimensions and erection details. ' B. Sample: 12 inch minimum length indicated sandblasted finish. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Design, fabrication and construction of structural glue -laminated timber shall conform to applicable requirements of the following: 1. ANSI/AITC A190.1. ' 2. CS -253. B. Laminator shall have minimum 5 years of continuous experience immediately prior to fabricating beams of this project. ' 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store members on supports not less than 12 inches above ground or 1-1/2 inches above subfloors, as applicable. B. Individually wrap members for protection during shipment, storage and erection with Sisalkraft or resin sized paper. Contractor shall continue to protect members after ' erection and until acceptance of Work. C. Protect members during unloading, hauling and erection. Field -trimmed ends or surfaces shall receive a coat of penetrating type sealer prior to erection. 1.04 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Measurements: Verify dimensions shown on Drawings by taking field measurements; ' proper fit and attachment of members is required. 1.05 SCHEDULING A. Contractor and fabricator shall coordinate construction and delivery schedules. Members shall not be delivered to site until adequate preparation for storage has been made and. not erected until preparations to receive members are complete, including miscellaneous metal and connecting hardware embedded in concrete. PART 2 PRODUCTS ' 2.01 MATERIALS A. Lumber: 1. Lumber for laminating shall be of such stress grade to provide glue -laminated members with normal working stress values of 2400 p.s.i. in bending. 2. Moisture Content: At time of gluing, moisture content of lumber shall not be less than 7 percent and shall not exceed 11 percent. The range of moisture content of various laminations assembled into a single member shall not exceed 5 percent. B. Adhesive: 1. Mixing, spreading, storage life, pot life, working life and assembly life of adhesive shall be per manufacturer's recommendations. Use exterior type adhesives. 2. Comply with ANSI/AITC A190.1 for wet -use (dry -use) adhesive. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/GLUE LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION ' DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 06180-1 SASC Inc. ' Phoenix • Las Vegas G. Connecting Hardware: 1. Connecting hardware indicated on Drawings shall be furnished by fabricator of glue -laminated members. 2. Steel plates, angles and other shapes: Conform to ASTM A36. 3. Bolts: Conform to ASTM A307. Make bolt lengths such that threads are excluded from bearing on wood or steel. Provide standard malleable iron or equivalent steel plate washers under bolt heads or nuts bearing on wood. 4. Lag screws, shear plates and split ring connectors: Conform to "National Design Specifications for Stress Grade Lumber and Its Fastenings" of National Forest Products Association. 5. Accurately locate bolt holes and drill with a bit 1/16 inch larger in diameter than bolt. Install lag screws, shear plates and split ring connectors per National Design Specifications. 6. Galvanizing: Fabricated steel base assemblies shall be by hot -dip process per ASTM A123 after fabrication. 7. Shop paint: Coat connecting hardware except galvanized base, not embedded in concrete, with one coat of primer per Federal Specification TT -P-645. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION A. Erect members in accordance with AITC-105 and the instructions of the fabricator. B. Handling or erection of tools, equipment and methods shall avoid scarring corners and faces or otherwise injuring the member. Sharp instruments or unprotected wire rope or chain slings not permitted. C. Erect laminated wood members true and plumb. Install temporary bracing wherever necessary to take care of loads to which structure may be subjected, including erection equipment, and to keep structure and members in alignment. D. Leave temporary bracing in place as long as required for safety and until no longer required to maintain position. As erection progresses, securely bolt up to take care of dead loads, lateral forces and erection stresses. Tie temporary bracing to adequate support. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/GLUE LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 06180-2 ' GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 ' 2.02 FABRICATION A. Fabricate with adequate plant and equipment and under supervision of properly qualified personnel. ' B. Laminations shall be machine finished, but not sanded, to a smooth finish and to a uniform thickness with a maximum allowable variation of 1/64 inch. ' C. Provide members conforming to AITC Architectural appearance grade where exposed to view and Industrial appearance grade where concealed from view in the final construction in accordance with AITC-110. ' D. Exposed members shall have a sandblasted finish to match approved sample. E. Warp, twist or other characteristics which prevent contact of adjacent glued faces or interfere with uniform bending when under clamping pressure not permitted. Surfaces to ' be glued shall be clean and free from oil, dust and other foreign material detrimental to gluing. F. Identification: Each completed member shall bear a specific identification, for location 1 and shall be accompanied by an AITC Inspection Certificate provided by the fabricator. G. Connecting Hardware: 1. Connecting hardware indicated on Drawings shall be furnished by fabricator of glue -laminated members. 2. Steel plates, angles and other shapes: Conform to ASTM A36. 3. Bolts: Conform to ASTM A307. Make bolt lengths such that threads are excluded from bearing on wood or steel. Provide standard malleable iron or equivalent steel plate washers under bolt heads or nuts bearing on wood. 4. Lag screws, shear plates and split ring connectors: Conform to "National Design Specifications for Stress Grade Lumber and Its Fastenings" of National Forest Products Association. 5. Accurately locate bolt holes and drill with a bit 1/16 inch larger in diameter than bolt. Install lag screws, shear plates and split ring connectors per National Design Specifications. 6. Galvanizing: Fabricated steel base assemblies shall be by hot -dip process per ASTM A123 after fabrication. 7. Shop paint: Coat connecting hardware except galvanized base, not embedded in concrete, with one coat of primer per Federal Specification TT -P-645. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION A. Erect members in accordance with AITC-105 and the instructions of the fabricator. B. Handling or erection of tools, equipment and methods shall avoid scarring corners and faces or otherwise injuring the member. Sharp instruments or unprotected wire rope or chain slings not permitted. C. Erect laminated wood members true and plumb. Install temporary bracing wherever necessary to take care of loads to which structure may be subjected, including erection equipment, and to keep structure and members in alignment. D. Leave temporary bracing in place as long as required for safety and until no longer required to maintain position. As erection progresses, securely bolt up to take care of dead loads, lateral forces and erection stresses. Tie temporary bracing to adequate support. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/GLUE LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 06180-2 ' A 1 SASC Inc. Phoenix - las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection and Testing: 1. Inspection of beams and their connections prior to erection and after erection, at the jobsite, shall be by an ICBO certified independent inspector with minimum five (5) years of experience in inspecting glulam beams and their framing. 2. Where, as cautioned by AITC, tension may occur perpendicular to grain due to wood shrinkage restrained by connection or other reasons, the laminator shall install vertical dowels in glued holes to arrest cracks. 3. Size of dowels and the spacing shall be determined by the laminator for each specific occurrence, regardless of when such cracks occur. 4. Tension lamination finger joints shall be proofload tested and test results submitted for review. 3.03 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion of the Work, remove excess materials, equipment and debris and dispose of away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. DFD ARCHITECTURE DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 END OF SECTION C -SPECS TM/GLUE LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION SECTION 06180-3 1 1.03 ' 1.04 u A. Standards: Following standards apply to Work of this Section except where more stringent requirements are specified: 1. Architectural Woodwork Institute "Quality Standards", "Custom" Grade, when not otherwise indicated. 2. California Redwood Association 3. Western Wood Products Association Manual. 4. American Plywood Association. 5. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau Standard Grading and Dressing Rules. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in Manufacturer's original unopened packaging with labels intact. Protect finished surfaces with removable wrapping or coating which will not bond when exposed to sunlight. B. Storage: Adequately protect against damage while stored at the site. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Provide humidity conditions which will not damage woodwork. B. Measurements: Verify dimensions shown on Drawings by taking field measurement; proper fit and attachment of parts is required. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Douglas Fir: Grade C and better, flat grain, grade marked by WCLIB. ' B. Douglas Fir Plywood: APA, C -D Plugged, exterior glue, grade trademarked, sanded, or as indicated on the Drawings. C. Base, Moldings and Trim: ' 1. Stain Finish: Grade I, Maple. 2. Paint Finish: Grade III and Better Select" Fir, Maple, Poplar or Pine. D. Grounds, Blocking and Furring Strips: #2 White Pine, construction grade Douglas Fir or other sound softwood. Fire treated lumber as required by codes or construction type. E. Shelving: Douglas Fir, surfaced (S4S). F. Shelf Standards and Supports: Knape and Vogt #255 and #256, or #87 and #187. Finish to be selected by Architect. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/FINISH CARPENTRY ' DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 06200-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ' ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY PART GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: When requested by Architect, submit two samples of each species of exposed ' wood to receive transparent finish at the site. Samples shall be 12 inches by 12 inches in size. 1.02 REFERENCES 1 1.03 ' 1.04 u A. Standards: Following standards apply to Work of this Section except where more stringent requirements are specified: 1. Architectural Woodwork Institute "Quality Standards", "Custom" Grade, when not otherwise indicated. 2. California Redwood Association 3. Western Wood Products Association Manual. 4. American Plywood Association. 5. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau Standard Grading and Dressing Rules. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in Manufacturer's original unopened packaging with labels intact. Protect finished surfaces with removable wrapping or coating which will not bond when exposed to sunlight. B. Storage: Adequately protect against damage while stored at the site. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Provide humidity conditions which will not damage woodwork. B. Measurements: Verify dimensions shown on Drawings by taking field measurement; proper fit and attachment of parts is required. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Douglas Fir: Grade C and better, flat grain, grade marked by WCLIB. ' B. Douglas Fir Plywood: APA, C -D Plugged, exterior glue, grade trademarked, sanded, or as indicated on the Drawings. C. Base, Moldings and Trim: ' 1. Stain Finish: Grade I, Maple. 2. Paint Finish: Grade III and Better Select" Fir, Maple, Poplar or Pine. D. Grounds, Blocking and Furring Strips: #2 White Pine, construction grade Douglas Fir or other sound softwood. Fire treated lumber as required by codes or construction type. E. Shelving: Douglas Fir, surfaced (S4S). F. Shelf Standards and Supports: Knape and Vogt #255 and #256, or #87 and #187. Finish to be selected by Architect. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/FINISH CARPENTRY ' DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 06200-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Priming: Back -prime wood surfaces inaccessible and unexposed after installation before delivery with an approved linseed oil and aluminum primer. Prime coat unfinished metal parts. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Use only hot -dip galvanized or aluminum finish or casing nails. Set nails for putty stopping In surfaced members. Hammer marks not acceptable on exposed finished surface and are subject to rejection of member by Architect. B. Make end splices exposed in finished members bevel splices and not square butted. Install members in as long lengths as possible. C. Install Work to details shown; plumb, level and to line and securely anchored. Make scribes, where required, accurate. D. Provide and install other miscellaneous millwork items and related items required to complete the Work. E. Prepare woodwork installed by cleaning and sanding as required to receive finishes specified in Section 09900. 3.03 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. END OF SECTION DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/FINISH CARPENTRY ' DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 06200-2 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 SECTION 06210 EXTERIOR SIDING ' PART GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Exterior siding. 1.02 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ' A. • Exterior Siding: Design and size components to withstand dead and live loads caused by positive and negative wind pressure acting normal to plane of wall as calculated in accordance with applicable code. ' 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Two samples of siding, 12 inches by 12 inches in size. ' B.. Shop Drawings for Exterior Siding: Submit drawings showing layouts, sizes, gages, methods of construction and installation, including sizes and types of fastening devices, and other details as necessary to erect a weathertight assembly. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in Manufacturer's original unopened packaging with labels intact. Protect finished surfaces with removable wrapping or ' coating which will not bond when exposed to sunlight. B. Storage: Adequately protect against damage while stored at the site. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Measurements: Verify dimensions shown on Drawings by taking field measurement; proper fit and attachment of parts is required. ' PART 2 PRODUCTS ' 2.01 MATERIALS A. Siding: HardiPlank composition siding as manufactured by James Hardie, 1-800-942- 7343. ' 1. Texture: Colonial Roughsawn 2. Width: 7-1/4 inch (6 inch exposure). 3. Length: 12 feet. 4. Finish: Factory applied stain, color as selected by Architect. ' 2.02 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners for Exterior Siding and Trim: Corrosion resistant, galvanized (hot dipped), flat head, slender shank siding nails with head diameter of about 3/16 inch. B. Underlayment: As'specified in Section 06100. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ EXTERIOR SIDING DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 06210-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: 1. Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental conditions in writing to Architect. 2. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. 3. Examine alignment of support members before installing siding. Do not proceed with such installation if the members are not aligned to the tolerances set by the Architect and/or Engineer. B. Coordination: Coordinate with other work which affects, connects with, or will be concealed by this Work. 3.02 EXTERIOR SIDING INSTALLATION A. Install water resistant barrier where indicated on the Drawings, in accordance with manufacturers written instructions, underlayment sheathing direction and as acceptable to local governing agency. B. Erection: Install siding, fasteners, trim, and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and the Uniform Building Code. C. Make cuts, bends, punching and drilling accurate, neat and properly located. D. Use long sections of siding to avoid butt joints. If a butt joint occurs, it shall be located over a stud and staggered between courses. E. Provide holes and connection for other trades. F. Install siding plumb and true and in proper alignment and relation to wall framing. G. Repair or replace, as directed, siding and trim which have been damaged. 3.03 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. END OF SECTION DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ EXTERIOR SIDING DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 06210-2 ' 1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas ' GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 SECTION 06400 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Architectural woodwork as shown on Drawings and as specified herein. 1.02 SUBMITTALS ' A. Shop Drawings: Submit Drawings showing layout, elevations, dimensions, hardware, construction details, and schedule of finishes. B. Samples: Submit two 12 inch x 12 inch samples of each wood species to receive ' transparent finish at job site and at mill. Submit samples of plastic laminate. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A., Standards: Comply with the following: 1. AWI "Quality Standards" for woodwork quality. 2. ANSI/NEMA LD3 for laminates. ' Z. Qualifications: Manufacturer shall be company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with minimum 3 years documented experience. C. Mock-up: Provide mock-up of upper cabinet for approval. 1. Provide units with specified counter top, with hardware installed. 2. Units will be examined to ascertain quality and conformity to AWI quality level standards and Specification requirements. 3. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING ' A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in Manufacturer's original unopened packaging with labels intact. 'B. Storage: Adequately protect against damage and moisture while stored at the site. C. Handling: Comply with Manufacturer's instructions. 1.05: PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Provide humidity conditions which will prevent damage to woodwork. B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Shop Drawings. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Furnish plastic products of one of the following Manufacturers, except as approved by the ' Architect, subject to compliance with Specification requirements: 1. Formica 2. Wilsonart 3. Nevamar 4. Laminart ' 5. Pionite DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 06400-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ' ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 2.02 WOOD MATERIALS A. Hardwood Lumber: AWI Custom Grade; average moisture content of 6 percent; species and grade as follows: 1. Douglas Fir #1. 2.03 SHEET MATERIALS A. Wood Particleboard: AWI standard, composed of wood chips, medium density, made with water resistant adhesive; of grade to suit application; sanded faces for drawer construction and shelving. B. Hardboard: Pressed wood fiber with resin binder, tempered grade, 1/4 inch thick, smooth one side, for drawer bottoms, gables and backs. 2.04 LAMINATE MATERIALS A. Plastic Laminate: High pressure decorative type. 1. Horizontal Grade: NEMA LD -3, Grade GP50, .050 inch thickness. 2. Horizontal Grade (High Wear): Exceeding NEMA LD -3, Grade GP50, 0.048 inch thickness. Wear resistance: 3.1 at 3500 cycles in accordance with NEMA LD -3 test method. 3. Vertical Grade: NEMA LD -3, Grade GP28, (.028 inch thickness). This grade of laminate shall be counterbalanced. 4. Post Forming Grade: NEMA LD -E, Grade PF 4.2. 5. Cabinet Liner Grade: NEMA LD -3, Grade CL -20, (.020 inch thickness). This grade of laminate shall be counterbalanced. 6. Melamine: Tested to meet NEMA Test LD -3. This grade of laminate shall be counterbalanced. 7. Backer: NEMA LD -3, Grade BK -20 (.020 inch thickness). 8. Finishes, Colors and Patterns: As indicated on Drawings. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: Type recommended by Laminate Manufacturer to suit application. B. Wall Adhesive: Cartridge type compatible with paneling and wall substrate. C. Edge Trim: Extruded convex or flat shaped plastic as indicated on Drawings; smooth finish; self locking serrated tongue; of width to match component thickness; color as selected or noted on Drawings. D. Glass: As specified in Section 08800. E. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application. Threaded steel for concealed joints. 2.06 HARDWARE A. Shelf Standards and Supports: K&V 255AL and 256 supports. B. Shelf Standard and Brackets: K&V 87-187. C. Drawer and Door Pulls: Stanley 4485. D. Sliding Door Pulls: Grant 426. E. Catches: Stanley 41 or K&V 43. F. Drawer Slides: K&V 1275 and K&V 1429 for file drawers. G. Overlay Cabinet Hinges: Stanley 1588 or Blum 91 M 2550. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 06400-2 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ' ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 H.. Sliding Door Track Assemblies: Grant 600 Series. ' I.. _ Locks: National C8138 for drawers; National C8123 for doors. J. Finish: Dull chrome. ' 2.07 FINISHING MATERIALS A. Finishing Materials: As specified in Section 09900. ' 2.08 FABRICATION A. Fabricate architectural woodwork and cabinets in conformance with Custom Grade Standards. B. Shop assemble casework for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings. C. Fit shelves, doors, and exposed edges with 3/8 inch matching hardwood edging. Use one piece for full length only. D. Cap exposed plastic laminate finish edges with material of same finish and pattern or plastic trim as indicated on Drawings.. E. Door and Drawer Fronts: 3/4 inch thick overlay style. F. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. t Provide trim for scribing and site cutting. G. Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly bevel ' arrises. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cut-outs. H. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of plastic laminate finished surfaces. I. Provide cutouts for appliances, outlet boxes, fixtures and fittings. Verify locations of cutouts from on-site dimensions. Seal contact surfaces of cut edges. 2.09 FINISHING A. Sand Work smooth and set exposed fasteners; apply wood filler. B. Exposed wood shall have distressed finish to match approved sample. C. Use wood filler which matches surrounding surfaces and of types recommended for applied finishes. D. Finish: AWI Section 1500 System TR -4 for transparent and stained finishes, and System OP -4 for opaque finish. E. Seal internal surfaces of cabinets with two coats of sealer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental conditions in writing to Architect. Commencement of Work will be construed as ' acceptance of subsurfaces. B. Coordination: Coordinate with other Work which affects, connects with, or will be t concealed by this Work. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 06400-3 SASC Inc. ' Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ' ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Set and secure cabinetry and other woodwork in place; rigid, plumb and level, and in accordance with AWI Section 1700. B. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components. C. Secure and align adjoining cabinet units and counter tops with concealed joint fasteners. D. Scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch (0.80 inch). Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose. E. Secure cabinet and bases to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages. F. Countersink anchorage devices at exposed locations. Conceal with solid wood plugs of species to match surrounding wood; finish flush with surrounding surfaces. G. Install trim in single lengths without splices where possible. Miter external corners and cope internal corners. 3.03 FINISHING A. Sand Work smooth and set exposed fasteners. B. Prime, fill, and finish Work of this Section in accordance with Section 09900. 3.04 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. END OF SECTION DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 06400-4 , SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 SECTION 06670 ' FRP WALL PANELS ' PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's Specifications and installation instructions for each material and accessory. B. Submit Manufacturer's full range of color and pattern samples of wall panels and trim pieces for Architect's selection. Submit two samples of selected products. C. Submit cleaning and maintenance instructions in accordance with Section 01770. 1.02 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials clearly labeled to identify Manufacturer, brand name, quality or grade and fire hazard classification. ' B. Store horizontally in original undamaged packages. 1.03 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Install materials when temperature and humidity conditions approximate conditions that will exist when building is occupied. I PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS ' A. Furnish products of one of the specified Manufacturers, except as approved by the Architect, subject to compliance with Specification requirements. 1. Dyrotech Industries 2. Marlite 2.02 MATERIALS A. Panels and Accessories: Kemply as manufactured by Dyrotech Industries, Joliet, IL. ' Provide the following 1. Fiberglass reinforced plastic, 0.09 inches thick with embossed finish laminated to one side of a 1/2 inch thick APA, CD Exposure 1 grade plywood. Colors textures and patterns as selected. 2. Moldings at panel edges to be 2 piece batten type with snap -on trim. 3. Fasteners to be Manufacturer's standard nylon drive pins. B. Adhesive: Manufacturer's recommended type for use with selected materials, waterproof, mildew resistant nonstaining type. C. Cauking: Latex type as approved by Adhesive and Wall Paneling Manufacturer. D. Moldings: Extruded anodized aluminum trim pieces. Use at internal and external corners. E. Miscellaneous Items: Furnish and install supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation whether or not specified or indicated. ' DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/FRP WALL PANELS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 06670-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ' ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: 1. Examine substrate and conditions under which the material is to be installed. 2. Verify that surfaces, when tested with moisture meter, have proper moisture content. 3. Verify that nails and screws are recessed, with joints and depressions taped, finish and sealed. 4. Remove contaminants from areas to be covered. 5. Do not proceed with Work until Work of other Trades which passes through wall covering has been completed and unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 6. Start of Work indicates acceptance of responsibility for performance and any required remedial Work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install panels in accordance with Manufacturer's printed instructions using full sheet mastic coverage method plus nylon fasteners. B. Make joints with 1/8 inch space for expansion and use mouldings designed for each condition for the Project. C. Bevel back edges of panels with block plane to permit proper fit into mouldings. D. If one end of panel must be nailed, do not nail the other end. E. Remove plumbing escutcheons, switchplates, wall plates, and surface -mounted fixtures, and cut wall paneling evenly to fit. Replace items after completion of Work. F. Where applicable, install paneling before installation of plumbing, casings, bases, cabinets and other items to be applied over paneling. 3.03 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive and smudges with soft cloth and mineral spirits. END OF SECTION DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/FRP WALL PANELS ' DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 06670-2 ' DFD ARCHITECTURE - C -SPECS TM/ BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 07111-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 SECTION 07111 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING PART1 GENERAL ' 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's data, installation instructions, limitations and recommendations. Include certification of data indicating VOC content of components. - B. Samples: Submit samples of membrane and protection board. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Minimum 3 years experience with Projects of similar scope and complexity. Applicator shall be approved by Manufacturer. B.. Pre -Installation Conference: A pre -installation conference shall be held prior to commencement of field operations to establish procedures to maintain optimum working conditions and to coordinate this Work with related and adjacent Work. Agenda for meeting shall include review of special details and flashing. C. Manufacturer's Representative: Make arrangements necessary to have a trained employee of the Manufacturer on-site periodically during dampproofing work to review installation procedures. ' 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Materials shall be delivered in Manufacturer's original unopened packages with Manufacturer's labels intact. ' B. Material shall be protected from rain and physical damage. Store materials away from sparks or flames. Store membrane where it will not exceed 90 degrees F. for extended periods. ' C. Outdoors, place cartons on raised pallets and cover completely. Follow Manufacturer's directions. 1.04 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Perform Work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions are within the limits established by the Manufacturer of the materials and products used. B. Proceed with installation only when substrate construction and preparation Work is complete and in condition to receive dampproofing. ' PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Dampproof Membrane: APOC 10 -MW -GF system as manufactured by Asphalt Products Oil Corporation, Long Beach CA. or equivalent system as manufactured by Henry Products or Karnak Corporation with summary of materials per 100 square feet as follows: ' 1. Asphalt Primer: 1/2 gallon 2. Mastic: 4 gallons 3. Glass Fabric: 1 layer 4. Mastic: 5 gallons 5. Protective Course: 1/8 inch Protection Panel. ' DFD ARCHITECTURE - C -SPECS TM/ BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 07111-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION 1 GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ' ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 A. The installer shall examine conditions of substrates and other conditions under which this Work is to be performed and notify Contractor, in writing, of circumstances detrimental to the proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATES A. Refer to Manufacturer's literature for requirements for preparation of substrates. Surfaces shall be structurally sound and free of voids, spalled areas, loose aggregate and sharp protrusions. Remove contaminants such as grease, oil, and wax from exposed surfaces. Remove dust, dirt, loose stone and debris. Use repair materials and methods which are acceptable to Manufacturer of dampproofing. B. Cast -in -Place Concrete Substrates: 1. Do not proceed with installation until concrete has properly cured and dried, minimum 7 days for normal structural concrete and minimum 14 days for lightweight structural concrete. 2. Fill form tie rod holes with concrete and finish flush with surrounding surface. 3. Repair bugholes over 1/2 inch in length and 1/4 inch deep and finish flush with surrounding surface. 4. Remove scaling to sound, unaffected concrete and repair exposed area. 5. Grind irregular construction joints to suitable flush surface. C. Masonry Substrates: Apply dampproofing over concrete block with smooth trowel -cut mortar joints or parge coat. D. Related Materials: Treat joints and install flashings as recommended by Dampproofing Manufacturer. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Manufacturer's literature for recommendations on installation, including but not limited to, the following: 1. Apply primer at the rate recommended by Manufacturer. Recoat areas not dampproofed if contaminated by dust. Mask and protect adjoining exposed finish surfaces to protect those surfaces from excessive application of primer. 2. Delay application of membrane until primer is completely dry. Dry time will vary with weather conditions. 3. Seal daily terminations with troweled bead of mastic. 4. Apply protection board and related materials in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations. B. At the end of each working day, water cut-offs must be installed to protect against water penetration under installed membrane. Temporary water cut-offs shall be removed before Work is resumed. Seal daily terminations with a trowelled bead of mastic. C. Where metal edging occurs set flanges in mastic and secure as shown on Drawings. Strip in with membrane. 3.04 PROTECTION MATERIAL A. Install material the same day the membrane is applied. Secure protection material in place by a method approved by the Architect until concrete or backfill is placed. Nails or other fasteners shall not penetrate through the membrane. Topping slab may be applied immediately upon installation of protection material. 3.05 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. END OF SECTION DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 07111-2 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 SECTION 07190 WATER REPELLENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Water repellent coating for masonry and concrete. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Water Repellent: Resistant to penetration of water from rainfall. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: The application of water repellent shall provide finished surfaces uniform in color without altering the natural texture of the substrate, and shall resist water penetration from rainfall. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit recommended method of application and coverage rate. B. Samples: Submit samples of coating applied to materials used in the Project for review of the aesthetics, and effectiveness, accompanied with a letter stating the actual application rates required... 1. Manufacturer shall procure and apply system to samples of the masonry units to be used in the structure which will be reviewed by the Architect for both aesthetics and effectiveness. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer shall be able to show evidence that the firm has been engaged in producing such material for at least 5 years and that the product has a satisfactory field performance record of at least 5 years. B. Applicator Qualifications: Applicators shall be trained, approved and accepted by the Manufacturer and have a minimum of 2 years experience spraying specialty coatings. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with volatile organic compound (VOC) regulations in effect within the jurisdiction of the Project site. D. Mock-ups: 1. Apply water repellent to sample wall located at the job site using the identical procedures which will be used in making application of material on the remainder of the Project. 2. The purpose of this sample will be to observe color uniformity and intensity, the method of application, including workmanship techniques and to water test surface after a 30 day period. 3. Equipment to be used for actual application to building walls shall be used to apply materials to sample wall. 4. The sample, when approved by the Architect, will function as a reference base for acceptance or rejection of color. E. Pre -Installation Conference: A representative of the manufacturer shall be present prior to and at the beginning of job application to review the work with the Architect and the Contractor. At this conference the manufacturer's representative shall also approve the wall and the suitability of the weather. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/WATER REPELLENTS DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 07190-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Delivery shall be made to the job site in Manufacturer's original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with Manufacturer's batch number. B. Storage and Protection: Store materials in original, unopened containers in compliance with Manufacturer's printed instructions and protect from damage. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Temperature and relative humidity conditions for a period before, during, and after application shall be as recommended by the Manufacturer. If rain occurs, allow surfaces to dry a minimum of 5 days. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer shall provide standard written warranty. 1. Written warranty shall include the following provisions: a. Coating will act as a water repellent for the full warranty period. b. Coating will not peel or flake for the full warranty period. 2. Upon satisfactory completion of the installation, and as a condition of its acceptance, the warranty shall be deliver to the Owner. 3. If at any time during the warranty period, any such failure occurs resulting from ordinary weather conditions in any area to which the coating has been properly applied, the manufacturer shall agree to supply all material needed to repair such affected areas at no additional cost. B. The applicator shall guarantee the installation against poor workmanship for a period of 2 years from the date of Substantial Completion. Applicator shall make necessary repairs without charge to Owner during that period. Manufacturer shall guarantee material against moisture penetration for 5 years. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Furnish products of one of the following Manufacturers, subject to compliance with Specification requirements: 1. • Tamms Industries, Inc. (represented by Philip Campodall'Orto (602) 829-8827). 2. Monopole International, Inc. (818)500-8585. 3. ProSoCo., Inc. (represented by Lanton Associates, Anthony Evans (602)303- 9182. 4. Huls America (represented by Tom Urich (602)275-3234. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Water Repellent Sealer: Huls Aqua -Trete, Monopole International Aquaseal, ProSoCo Sure Klean Weather Seal Siloxane WB or Siloxane PD, Tamms Baracade ME, or as approved. 1. Suitable for concrete, concrete masonry, stucco and most natural stones, and porous or dense surfaces. 2. Clear color. 3. Compliant with VOC regulations. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: 1. Carefully inspect the installed Work of other Trades, and verify that such Work is complete to the point where water repellent application may commence. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/WATER REPELLENTS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 07190-2 1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 2. The Manufacturer's representative shall verify that the water repellent can be applied in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Verify that cracks which exceed 1/64 inch (0.40mm) wide have been filled with pointing mortar or caulking material. Defective mortar joints shall be routed out, pointed with mortar and tooled. 4. Verify that flashing and caulking materials have been installed properly. 5. Verify that masonry has been cleaned as specified in Section 04930. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protection: 1. Use all means necessary to protect clear water repellent before, during, and after installation and to protect the installed Work of other Trades. 2. Metal, glass and other such items shall be protected by suitable masking materials to protect against overspray. 3. In the event of damage, immediately make repairs and replacements necessary as acceptable to the Architect. 4. Protect concrete sidewalks from runoff by soaking with water immediately prior to application on adjacent walls. B. Surface Preparation: 1. Allow walls to cure at least 30 days before clear water repellent is applied. 2. Walls shall be free of excess mortar. 3. Follow Manufacturer's instructions regarding allowable moisture level. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Water Repellent: Apply in accordance with Manufacturer's printed directions. B. Coverage: 1. At no time shall rate of coverage be less than required by Manufacturer's directions. 2. Applicator shall make proper material allowance based upon substrate when determining quantities of material. 3.04 SURFACES TO BE COATED A. Exterior exposed masonry surfaces, including stone, at vertical and horizontal locations. B. Other locations as indicated on Drawings. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests: 1. Twenty days after completion of this portion of the Work, and as a condition of its acceptance, demonstrate by running water test that the Work of this Section will successfully repel water. 2. Notify the Architect and Manufacturer at least 72 hours in advance and conduct the test in the presence of Architect and manufacturer's representative. 3. By means of an outrigger or similar acceptable equipment, place 3/4 inch garden hose with garden type spray nozzle, at a point designated by the Architect, 8 feet to 10 feet away from the wall, aiming the nozzle so that water will strike the wall at a 45 degree downward angle. 4. Run the water onto the wall at full available force for not less than 4 hours. Provisions shall be made to collect the run off water into a container, and if possible to reuse it in the test 5. Upon completion of the four hour period, inspect the interior surface of the wall for evidence of moisture penetration. 6. If evidence of moisture penetration is discovered, apply an additional coat of the repellent material to the areas where leakage occurred. 7. An additional area or areas designated by the Architect shall be tested and corrected if leakage occurs. 8. Architect may require additional tests until no leakage occurs. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TMMATER REPELLENTS ' DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 07190-3 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 3.06 CLEANING A. Clean spillage and overspray as recommended by the Manufacturer. B. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove excess materials, equipment and debris and dispose of away from premises. END OF SECTION DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TMMATER REPELLENTS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 07190-4 DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/BUILDING INSULATION ' DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 07210-1 PART 2 PRODUCTS SASC Inc. 2.01 MANUFACTURERS Phoenix • Las Vegas 1 GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG Furnish products of one of the following Manufacturers, except as approved by the ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION 1. Batt and Blanket Insulation: PART 1 _ GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data:, Submit Manufacturer's data, installation instructions, limitations and b. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp. recommendations. Include certification and test data substantiating R -Values and combustibility of each type of insulation. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to applicable code for fire resistance ratings and surface burning characteristics. A. B. Provide certificate of compliance .from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of combustibility. meet the required R value noted on Drawings. Multiple layers of batts will not be 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery and Storage: Deliver materials to job in Manufacturer's original unopened packaging. Adequately protect against damage while stored at the site. Deliver so that Fire Safing Insulation:' ASTM C24, E119 and E136. Thickness shall be as required by stocks of materials on the site will permit uninterrupted progress of the Work. B. Materials shall be properly identified on each package with the Manufacturer's name and R value. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/BUILDING INSULATION ' DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 07210-1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS 1 A. Furnish products of one of the following Manufacturers, except as approved by the Architect, subject to compliance with Specification requirements: 1. Batt and Blanket Insulation: a. Johns -Manville b. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp. C. Certainteed B. Materials designated for a specific application shall be the products of one Manufacturer. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Batt Insulation: ASTM C665, Type III, Class A, Category 1 faced, with resistance values as indicated on the Drawings, for various locations. Batts shall be a single thickness to meet the required R value noted on Drawings. Multiple layers of batts will not be accepted. Furnish faced batts with nailing flanges at wood framing. B. Fire Safing Insulation:' ASTM C24, E119 and E136. Thickness shall be as required by the Manufacturer to provide a fire rating equal to that of the assembly of which it is a part. Where smoke stop protection also is required, install Thermafiber SmokeSeal Caulking Compound as needed to meet UL Standard 1479 and ASTM E814 procedure. C. Acoustical Batt Insulation: As specified in Section 09820. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/BUILDING INSULATION ' DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 07210-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG D. Rigid Roof Insulation: Unfaced, preformed insulation complying with ASTM C 591, Type 1 -inch thickness of 6.2 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu Type V, oriented strand board or wafer board or APA PRP -108, exposure 1, 7/16 inch thick the other, in lieu of unfaced polyisocyanurate underlayment specified in Section 06100. ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 rigid, cellular, polyisocyanurate thermal 2, with aged thermal -resistance values for at 75 deg F. At contractors option provide faced insulation complying with DOC PS 2 on top surface and felt or glass -fiber mat on insulation with separate plywood top cover 2. Thickness: As indicated on Drawings by R value. 3. Insulation Fasteners: Factory -coated, corrosion resistant self -taping screws with metal or plastic plates, designed for fastening rigid roof insulation to substrate and tested as required for specified wind up -lift resistance and FM requirements. Fastener must be of sufficient length to penetrate through deck. E. Separate Vapor Barrier/Cover Sheet: Lamtec WMP-10 Polypropylene cover sheet. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine subsurfaces to receive Work of this Section. Report in writing to General Contractor, with a copy to Architect, any conditions detrimental to Work of this Section. Failure to observe this injunction constitutes a waiver to any subsequent claims to the contrary and will make Insulation Contractor responsible for any corrections the Architect may require. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Batt Insulation: 1. Apply no insulation until such time as the Construction has progressed to the point that inclement weather will not damage or wet the insulation material. 2. Fully insulate small areas between closely spaced framing members, pipes, conduits or other obstruction by cutting and fitting insulation material as required to maintain the integrity of the insulation. 3. At wood framing friction fit unfaced batts between wood members. 4. Batt insulation at metal studs and other non-nailable members shall be installed continuously tight against framing members. a. Secure in place with string wire or other method as approved by Architect. b. Insulation at concrete tees shall be installed with 5 adhesive applied pins per each 2'-0" x 4'-0" batt. 5. End matching neatly with ends fitting snugly. B. Fire Safing Insulation: Install in proper sizes on safing clips as needed but not to exceed 24 inches O.C. Leave no voids between walls and edges of slabs. C. Rigid Roof Insulation: Coordinate with installation of top cover plywood underlayment and sheet metal roofing so that insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday. 1. Install required thickness of insulation in 2 or more layers with joints of top layer staggered a minimum of 6 inches from bottom layer. 2. Attached Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board -type roof insulation to deck type indicated. 3. Where unfaced insulation board is used, install cover board underlayment specified in Section 06100 over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints staggered between rows. Loosely butt cover boards together and fasten to roof deck according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. 4. Insulation which has become wet after installation shall be removed and replaced with dry material before application of underlayment and sheet metal roofing. 5. Provide wood nailers mechanically fastened to deck at edges of insulation (perimeters, openings, joints, etc.) as required for proper nailing of top plywood cover or underlayment. DFD ARCHITECTURE DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 C -SPECS TM/BUILDING INSULATION SECTION 07210-2 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 3.03 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion of the Work, remove excess materials, equipment and debris and dispose of away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. B. Protection: Take precautions to protect insulation, both during and after installation, from damage of any kind until covered. END OF SECTION DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/BUILDING INSULATION DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 07210-3 PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Furnish products of one of the following Manufacturers, except as approved by the Architect, subject to compliance with Specification requirements: 1. Atas Aluminum Corp., Allentown, PA. 2. Berridge Manufacturing Co., Houston, TX 3. Kovach Inc., Mesa, AZ. B. Specifications are based on products as manufactured by Kovach. 9 DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/SHEET METAL ROOFING DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 07610-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 SECTION 07610 SHEET METAL ROOFING PART 1.01 GENERAL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1 A. Performance Requirements: Comply with the following: 1. Water Infiltration: No measurable water penetration per ASTM E331. 2. Wind Uplift: UL580, Class 90. i 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's Specifications, design data and installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Submit Drawings showing layout, dimensions and construction details. C. Samples: Submit samples of each type of roof panel with factory finish. D. Test Reports: Submit reports showing compliance with performance requirements. E. Engineering Calculations: Submit calculations, sealed by a Registered Structural Engineer, verifying wind uplift performance of roofing. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Manufacturer specializing in specified product with minimum 5 years documented experience. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. 2. AISI Specification for Design of Coldformed Steel Structural Members. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in Manufacturer's original unopened packaging with labels intact. B. Storage: Adequately protect against damage while stored at the site. C. Handling: Comply with Manufacturer's instructions. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Furnish 10 year warranty against cracking, peeling and fade for paint finish. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Furnish products of one of the following Manufacturers, except as approved by the Architect, subject to compliance with Specification requirements: 1. Atas Aluminum Corp., Allentown, PA. 2. Berridge Manufacturing Co., Houston, TX 3. Kovach Inc., Mesa, AZ. B. Specifications are based on products as manufactured by Kovach. 9 DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/SHEET METAL ROOFING DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 07610-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 2.02 SHEET MATERIALS A. Prefinished Metal: Hot -dipped galvanized, ASTM A653 Structural Quality, Grade 40, G90 coating 22 gage core steel. B. Finish: Full strength Kynar 500/Hylar 5000 Fluorocarbon coating coating, applied by the Manufacturer on a continuous coil coating line, with top side dry film thickness of 0.70 to 0.90 mil over 0.25 to 0.35 mil prime coat, to provide a total dry film thickness of 0.95 to 1.25 mil. 1. Bottom side: Coated with primer with a dry film thickness of 0.25 mil. 2. Finish: Conform to all tests for adhesion flexibility, and longevity as specified by the Kynar 500 finish supplier. 3. Color: Copper Penny C. Strippable film: Liquid applied to top side of painted coil to protect finish during fabrication, shipping and field handling. 2.03 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Underlayment: ASTM D226, No. 30 unperforated asphalt saturated felts. B. Building Paper: Minimum 5 Ib/100 sq. ft., rosin sized. C. Fasteners: Galvanized steel with washers where required. D. Sealant: As specified in Section 07900. E. Rigid Roof Insulation: As specified in Section 07210. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Exposed adjacent flashing shall be of the same material and finish as the roof panels. B. Flashings: Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch. 2.05 PREFORMED METAL ROOFING A. K -Lok Panel System: 1. Panels shall have 24 inches on -center seam spacing with a seam height of 1-1/2 inches. 2. Panels shall be roll -formed in continuous lengths from eave to ridge. 3. Snap -on seams shall be 1-1/2 inches in height and shall contain a factory -applied Extruded Vinyl Weather Seal Insert to prevent siphoning of moisture through sidelap seam. 4. Certification shall be submitted based on independent testing laboratory, indicating no measurable water penetration through the system when tested in accordance with ASTM E-331. 5. Concealed anchor clips to be spaced as required to meet uplift loads (maximum of 24 inches on center. 6. When required, panel assembly to bear UL Label UL90, pursuant to Construction No. 296. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental conditions in writing to Architect. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. 1. Examine plywood or metal deck to ensure proper attachment to framing. 2. Inspect roof deck to verify deck is clean and smooth, free of depressions, waves or projections, properly sloped to valleys and eaves. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/SHEET METAL ROOFING DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 07610-2 DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/SHEET METAL ROOFING DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 07610-3 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 3. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts or vents through roof are solidly set, cant strips and reglets in place, and nailing strips located. 4. Verify deck is dry and free of snow or ice. Flutes in steel deck to be clean and dry and joints in wood deck to be solidly supported and nailed. 5. Ensure that all nail heads are totally flush with the substrate. B. Coordination: Coordinate with other Work which affects, connects with, or will be concealed by this Work. 3.02 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. Install underlayment and building paper slip sheet over entire area to be roofed. Apply from eave to ridge in shingle fashion free of wrinkles. Lap joints a minimum of 6 Inches at head and side. Stagger end laps of each consecutive layer. Use adhesive for temporary anchorage, where possible, to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under sheet metal roofing. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Comply Manufacturers instructions with standard and conform to SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual to achieve a watertight installation. B. Install panels in such a manner that horizontal lines are true and level and vertical lines are plumb. C. Install starter and edge trim before installing roof panels. D. Remove protective strippable film prior to installation of roof panels. E. Attach panels using Manufacturer's standard clips and fasteners, spaced in accordance r with approved Shop Drawings. F. Install sealants for preformed roofing panels as approved on Shop Drawings. G. Do not allow panels or trim to come into contact with dissimilar materials. H. Do not allow traffic on completed roof. If required, provide cushioned walk boards. I. Protect installed roof panels and trim from damage caused by adjacent construction until completion of installation. J. Remove and replace panels or components which are damaged beyond successful repair. 3.04 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. B. Clean grease, finger marks 'or stains from the panels per Manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/SHEET METAL ROOFING DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 07610-3 SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas - GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 SECTION 07840 t FIRESTOPPING B. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to applicable code for fire resistance ratings and surface burning characteristics: 1. ASTM E 136, ASTM E 119 and ASTM E 814, as applicable. 2. UL 1479 fire test to achieve required fire -rating as noted on Drawings. 3. Listing: a. UL Fire Resistance Directory (current edition). b. WH International Listings DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/FIRESTOPPING DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 07840-1 PART 1.01 GENERAL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide UL Classified or Warnock Hersey Listed firestopping system to prevent the spread of fire, smoke and gasses through penetrations in fire resistive walls, floors and partitions, including; but not limited to; the following areas: 1. Unprotected openings and openings accommodating penetrating items such as cables, cable trays, pipes, ducts, boxes and conduits through fire rated floors, ' walls and smoke barriers. 2. Head of wall openings between wall and connecting floor or roof deck assemblies. a. Meet requirements for exposure to hose stream test. b. Applicable for use with steel fluted deck floor assemblies. b. Allow deflection of floor or roof above. 3. Openings at curtainwalls between exterior walls and connecting floor slab B. perimeters, equal to the fire resistance of the floor assembly. Firestop be intended systems shall not to support live loads and traffic unless specifically approved by Testing Agency. C. Firestop systems shall be approved by Code Authority. D. Firestop products shall remain flexible where subject to movement without affecting the integrity of the product. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's Specifications, performance criteria, Drawings and instructions. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit Manufacturer's complete Shop Drawings showing proposed material, r reinforcement, anchorage, fastenings method of installation and UL or Warnock Hersey listing number., C. Test Reports: Submit UL or Warnock Hersey test report description for firestopping i system. D. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of firestop systems. ' 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. -Qualifications: Applicator with minimum of 5 years experience and approved by the ■ materials manufacturer. B. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to applicable code for fire resistance ratings and surface burning characteristics: 1. ASTM E 136, ASTM E 119 and ASTM E 814, as applicable. 2. UL 1479 fire test to achieve required fire -rating as noted on Drawings. 3. Listing: a. UL Fire Resistance Directory (current edition). b. WH International Listings DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/FIRESTOPPING DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 07840-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 C. Pre -Installation Conference: 1. Convene a pre -installation conference to review specifications and procedures with the Architect, Contractor, installer, manufacturer's representative, Owner and other trades relevant to the work, prior to ordering materials. 2. Notify Architect at least 48 hours prior to starting Work. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in Manufacturer's original unopened packaging with labels intact. B. Storage: Adequately protect against damage while stored at the site. C. Handling: Comply with Manufacturer's instructions. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Furnish firestop systems acceptable to governing Code Authority from one of the following Manufacturers, subject to compliance with Specification requirements: 1. U.S. Gypsum Co. 2. Johns -Manville 3. Tremco, Inc. 4. RectorSeal Corporation 5. 3M Fire Protection Products 6. Specified Technologies, Inc. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Firestop System Materials - General: 1. Appropriate for penetration. 2. Include every component required for code approved installation, including; but not limited to: a. Firestopping putties or compound. b. Backing material. C. Wrap strips. d. Primers, clips and collars. e. Forming and damming materials. f. Sealant and solvent cleaner. B. Properties: 1. Free of asbestos, halogens and volatile components after curing and shall not slump or sag, (except for self -leveling products). 2. Capable of maintaining an effective barrier against flames, heat and smoke in compliance with the requirements of ASTM E814, UL 1479 and U.B.C. Standard 7-5. 3. Non-combustible per ASTM E 136. 4. UV resistant where exposed to sunlight. 5. Water resistant where exposed to moisture. 6. Firestop system shall accommodate movement without adversely affecting fire rating of wall/floor assembly. 7. Shrink resistant. 8. Paintable or capable of receiving finish materials in those areas which are exposed to view and which are scheduled to receive finishes. L DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/FIRESTOPPING DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 07840-2 1 1 t f 1 n r SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION r, A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental conditions in writing to Architect. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. B. Coordination: Coordinate with other Work which affects, connects with, or will be concealed by this Work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter which may affect bond of firestopping material. B. Remove incompatible materials which affect bond. C. Install backing materials to arrest liquid material leakage, if required. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall conform to requirements of qualified designs or manufacturer approved modifications as supported by engineering reports, and shall be approved and accepted by the authority having jurisdiction. 1. Apply primer and firestop materials in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions and in accordance with the appropriate UL Fire Resistance Directory or with the appropriate Warnock Hersey International Listing. 2. Apply firestopping material in sufficient thickness to achieve rating, to ensure against the passage of flames, smoke -and toxic gases, and to a uniform density and texture. 3. Protect materials from damage on surface subjected to traffic and install cover plates as required on firestop system that will or may be subject to traffic. 4. Tool surfaces of firestop products to provide a smooth and clean appearance. B. Provide firestopping for conditions specified whether or not firestopping is indicated, and, if indicated, whether such material is designated as insulation, safing or otherwise. Insulation types specified in other sections shall not be installed in lieu of firestopping materials. C. Building Exterior Perimeters: 1. Where exterior facing construction is continuous past a structural floor, and a space (i.e. construction joint) would otherwise remain open between the inner face of the wall construction and the outer perimeter edge of the structural floor, provide firestopping to equal the fire resistance of the floor assembly. 2. Mineral wool by itself shall not constitute an acceptable firestop. If mineral wool is part of firestop system, the mineral wool shall be completely covered by appropriate thickness of UL or Warnock Hersey listed firestop sealant. 3. Firestopping shall be provided whether or not there are any clips, angles, plates, or other members bridging or interconnecting the facing and floor systems, and whether or not such items are continuous. 4. Provide firestopping to continuously fill open spaces where an exterior wall of composite type construction passes a perimeter structural member, such as a girder, beam or strut, and the finish on the interior wall face does not continue up to close with the underside of the structural floor above, thus interrupting the fire - resistive integrity of the wall system, and creating a space that would otherwise remain open between the interior face of the wall and lower edge of the structural members. DFD ARCHITECTURE DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 C -SPECS TM/FIRESTOPPING SECTION 07840-3 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 D. Interior Walls and Partitions: 1. Construction joints between top of fire rated walls and underside of floors above shall be firestopped. 2. Firestop systems installed shall have been tested by either UL or Warnock Hersey, including exposure to hose stream test and including test for use with steel fluted deck floor assemblies. 3. Firestop system used shall allow for deflection of floor or roof above. E. Penetrations: 1. Penetrations include conduit, cable, wire, pipe, duct or other elements which pass through one or both outer surfaces of a fire rated floor, wall, or partition. 2. Provide firestopping to fill spaces in accordance with ASTM E 814 (UL 1479) where a penetration occurs through a structural floor or roof and a space would otherwise remain open between the surfaces of the penetration and the edge of the adjoining structural floor or roof, except at floors on grade. 3. Requirements for penetrations shall apply whether or not sleeves have been provided. Firestop the annular space between sleeve and surrounding surfaces. 3.04 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. END OF SECTION DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TDA/FIRESTOPPING DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 07840-4 DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/JOINT SEALERS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 07900-1 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: SASC Inc. skills and shall be thoroughly familiar with the specified requirements. Phoenix • Las Vegas B. Field Adhesion Testing: Perform preconstruction adhesion testing for each type of sealant and substrate as follows: GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG 1. Notify Architect at least 7 days prior to date of adhesion testing. ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 2. Arrange for manufacturer's field technical representative and Architect to be SECTION 07900 present during testing. JOINT SEALERS 3. PART GENERAL 1.01 RELATED SECTIONS 4. Test joints by standard field adhesion hand pull test. A. Related Sections: 1. Section 07840: Sealants at fire penetrations. - 1.02 SUBMITTALS Conduct number of field adhesion tests for each type of sealant and each type of A. Product Data: 1. -Submit manufacturer's current specifications and recommended installation procedures. 2. Submit sample warranty to be signed jointly by applicator and manufacturer. -� 7. 3. Submit manufacturer's standard color chart. B. Shop Drawings: Illustrations in sufficient detail to show installation and interface fo the 8. work of this Section with the work of adjacent trades. C. Field Adhesion Test and Stain Reports: Submit copies of logs and test reports showing results of field adhesion testing and stain testing. r D. Contract Closeout: Submit Manufacturer's Warranty. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/JOINT SEALERS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 07900-1 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Installers shall be thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary skills and shall be thoroughly familiar with the specified requirements. B. Field Adhesion Testing: Perform preconstruction adhesion testing for each type of sealant and substrate as follows: 1. Notify Architect at least 7 days prior to date of adhesion testing. 2. Arrange for manufacturer's field technical representative and Architect to be present during testing. 3. Install sealant in test joints in minimum 60 inch lengths. 4. Test joints by standard field adhesion hand pull test. 5. For joints with dissimilar substrates, test adhesion to each substrate separately as recommended by sealant manufacturer. 6. Conduct number of field adhesion tests for each type of sealant and each type of substrate as follows: a. Not less than 10 tests for the first 1,000 feet of installed sealant and 1 test for each additional 1,000 feet of sealant installed, or 1 test per floor per elevation. 7. Document results of field adhesion tests and record results in field adhesion test log. 8. Include in log data on pull distance used to test each joint sealant. 9. Include data on joints where material connected with pull portion of sealant failed to adhere to joint substrate or tore cohesively. 10. Inspect joints and record data for the following: a. Complete fill. b. No voids. C. Joint dimensions matching those of manufacturer's recommended details. 11. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained. 12. Do not install joint sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing. 1 13. Repair sealant test areas by removing damaged materials and applying sealant to test area using same procedure used to originally install the sealant. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/JOINT SEALERS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 07900-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 C. Stain Testing: Perform Stain testing of natural stone, masonry and other porous substrates proposed for use in the Work. Obtain actual samples of materials proposed for use and test to determine if permanent discoloration of porous surfaces will occur from direct contact with sealants. Perform stain testing in conformance with ASTM C1248 and as follows: 1. Notify Architect at commencement of stain testing procedure. 2. Arrange for manufacturer's field technical representative and Architect to be present during examination of test results. 3. Cut substrate to provide flat surface for application of sealant. 4. Separate substrate materials by removable shims to create 1/2 x 1/2 x 3 inch joint. 5. Fill joint with scheduled sealant , tool, and allow to cure for 21 days at room temperature. 6. After 21 day curing, remove shims, compress joint to 50 percent of original joint width to 1/4 inch, and place in an oven at 158 degrees F. for 14 days. 7. After 14 days in oven, remove and allow sample to cool to room temperature. 8. Examine sample to determine presence of discoloration or change in appearance in any way to exposed surfaces. 9. After visual inspection, cut sample in half to determine presence of discoloration or change in appearance in any way into the sample itself at the adhesive bond line and presence of bleeding into the area around the adhesive bond line. 10. Document results of stain tests and record results in stain test log. 11. Do not install sealants that show evidence of staining substrates. D. Field Color and Workmanship Samples: Caulk a section of joint as directed, under job conditions, at least 7 days prior to start of work for review by Architect. When approved, sample shall be used as a standard of comparison for remainder of work. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original unopened packaging with labels intact. B. Storage: Adequately protect against damage while stored at the site. Maintain product in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations with proper precautions to ensure fitness of material when installed. C. Handling: Comply with manufacturer's instructions. 1.05 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Observe manufacturer's temperature service range. Do not apply sealant when weather conditions will inhibit bonding and curing. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Provide 3 year warranty, in writing and signed jointly by the installer and sealant manufacturer, to replace sealants which fail at no additional cost to the Owner because of loss of cohesion or adhesion, or do not cure, and which fail to achieve air -tight and water- tight seal. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Furnish products of one of the following manufacturers subject to compliance with specifications requirements: 1. Pecora 2. Tremco Vulkem Paraseal 3. Dow Corning Corp. 4. General Electric 5. Sika Corp. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/JOINT SEALERS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 07900-2 �' SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 B. Single Source Responsibility for Joint Sealer Materials: 1. Obtain joint sealer materials from a single manufacturer for each different product required. 2. If sealants from separate manufacturers must be used and could come in contact with each other, provide written certification from every manufacturer involved that the sealants are compatible and will adhere to each other. 2.02 MATERIALS A. General: Sealants, primers, back-up materials, preformed joint fillers, bond breakers and related materials shall be compatible with adjoining materials. B. Sealant: 1. General: The selection of proper sealant for a particular joint shall be in accordance with current published recommendations of the manufacturer. 2. Types: See Schedule in Part 3 for the location where each type of sealant is to be provided. a. Type "A": 2 -part or 3 -part (self -leveling) urethane, conforming to ASTM C920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25, Use T; Pecora NR -200 Urexpan Sealant or Dynatred, Tremco THC -900/901, Vulkem 45/245 and Sikaflex 2c SL (self -leveling). b. Type "B": 3 -part chemically curing polyurethane sealant conforming to ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, M, A, O, and capable of withstanding movement of 50% in extension and compression, and sustained temperatures of 250 degrees F in service. Tremco Dymeric 511 Sealant, Pecora Dynatrol II, Vulkem 922 and Sikaflex 2c NS (non -sag). C. Type "C-1": One -part low modulus moisture cure silicone rubber sealant conforming to FS TT -S -001543A, Class A, FS TT -S -00230C, Type II, Class A and ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, M, G,A, and O, and capable of withstanding movement of 100% in extension and 50% in compression in service. Dow Corning 790 Silicone Glazing Sealant, Tremco Spectrem 1 and Pecora 890. d. Type "C-2": One -part medium modulus neutral cure silicone rubber sealant conforming to FS TT -S -001543A, Class A, FS TT -S -00230C, Type II, Class A and ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, M, G,A, and O, and capable of withstanding movement of 50% in extension and 50% in compression in service. Tremco Spectrem 2, Pecora 895, Dow Corning 795, Dow Coming 791, and GE Silpruf. e. Type "D": ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, M,A,O. Sika Sikaflex 1A, Pecora Dynatrol 1, Tremco DyMonic and Pecora 345. f. Type "E": Silicone rubber sealant with mold inhibitor. General Electric Sanitary 1700, Tremco Proglaze, Dow Corning 999 and Pecora 863 or 898. g. Type "F": Tremco Acoustical Sealant and Pecora BA -98. 3. Sealants at fire penetrations: As specified in Section 07840 - 4. Color: Provide standard or custom colors as selected by Architect, In general, colors shall match adjacent materials. C. Primer: Non -staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. D. Joint Cleaner: Non -corrosive and non -staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. E. Joint Filler (Backer): ASTM D1565; round closed cell polyethylene, urethane or neoprene foam rod; oversized 30 to 50 percent; "SofRod" as manufactured by A.E.T. F. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. G. Other Materials: Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor and approved by the sealant manufacturer as compatible, subject to the review of the Architect. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/JOINT SEALERS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 07900-3 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental conditions in writing to Architect. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. Verify, before proceeding with this Work, that required inspections of existing conditions have been completed. B. Coordination: Coordinate with other work which affects, connects with, or will be concealed by this Work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean, prepare, and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remove loose materials and other foreign matter which may impair adhesion of sealant. B. Verify that joint shaping materials and release tapes are compatible with sealant. C. Examine joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios. D. Use joint filler to achieve required joint depths, to allow sealants to perform properly. E. Use bond breaker where required. F. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by masking when necessary. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. In general, seal openings and other locations which normally require sealant to seal against infiltration from air, water and most insects, including; but not limited to: a. Construction and expansion joints. b. Joints between dissimilar materials. C. Joints around windows, door frames, louvers and other penetrations and openings in the exterior wall. d. Interior wall openings. e. Other locations indicated on drawings. 3. Apply sealant within recommended temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within recommended temperature ranges. B. Joints: 1. Free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. 2. Tool joints concave. C. Apply sealant under pressure with hand or power actuated gun or other appropriate means. Gun shall have nozzle of proper size and provide sufficient pressure to completely fill joints as detailed. D. Neatly point or tool joint surfaces to provide slightly concave surfaces, free of wrinkles and skips, uniformly smooth and with perfect adhesion along both sides of joint. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent surfaces of sealant as work progresses. B. Use solvent or cleaning agent as recommended by sealant manufacturer. C. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/JOINT SEALERS DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 07900-4 r� n SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 3.05 SCHEDULE A. Expansion and Control Joints: 1. Horizontal traffic: Type "A". 2. Masonry, concrete to concrete, stucco, steel and wood: Type "B". 3. Glass (except insulating glass or special ' coated glass), aluminum, E.I.F.S., Natural Stone, and plastics: Type "C-1 ". 4. Glass (including insulating glass or special coated glass), aluminum and plastics: Type "C-2". B. Non -expanding Joints: 1. Glass (except insulating glass or special coated glass), aluminum, E.I.F.S., Natural Stone, and.plastics: Type "C-1". 2. Glass (including insulating glass or special coated glass), aluminum and plastics: Type "C-2". 3. Concrete to concrete, stucco, masonry, aluminum, steel, and wood: Type "D". C. Mechanical (ductwork and air conditioning): Type "D", D. T umeibg Fixtures (around toilet, bath, kitchen fixtures, and food service equipment): E. Acoustical (acoustical applications where sealant is required): Type "F". END OF SECTION 0 DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/JOINT SEALERS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 07900-5 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 SECTION 08100 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings:. Submit Drawings showing elevations of each door type, typical and ' special details of construction, location and installation requirements for hardware, size and thickness of material. 1.02 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver material under protective cover and store in dry, enclosed spaces at the site, in vertical position. Raise bottoms of doors at least 4 inches above floor and provide wood slats between doors to avoid metal to metal contact. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Doors and frames shall be furnished by the same Manufacturer. ' B. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Steelcraft Manufacturing Co. 2. Curries Company 3. The Ceco Corporation 4. The Kewanee Corp. 5. Republic Builders Products 6. Security Metal Products 2.02 MATERIALS F A. Doors: ANSI/SDI-100 Grade II, Model 2, flush seamless 18 gauge steel with honeycomb core. B. Frames: ANSI/SDI 100, 16 gauge steel. C. Glazing Beads: Minimum 20 gauge steel. D. Steel: ASTM 366 cold -rolled or ASTM A569 hot -rolled. Hot -dip galvanized meeting ASTM A653, Grade G60 for exterior openings. E. Paint: Non -lifting, rust -inhibitive grey primer meeting ANSI A224.1, compatible with field 1 finish specified in Section 09900, applied after bonderizing. 2.03 FABRICATION- DOORS A. Construct hollow metal doors, flush and vision lite types as schedule on Drawings, in accordance with ANSI/SDI-100 with core as specified above. Reinforce top and bottom of doors horizontally by 16 gauge steel channels, full width, spot welded to each face at B. least 3 inches on center. Bevel edge of lock stile. Joints at the edges of doors shall be mechanically interlocked or shall have a channel continuously welded where face sheets meet. C. Where heavy duty hinges have been specified, provide 8 gauge reinforcing at hinge cut outs. Coordinate with hardware schedule. 1 D. Reinforce openings in doors for lites and vents on all sides with 14 gauge steel channel. 1 DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 08100-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 E. Accurately mortise doors for locks and hinges. Provide adequate box type reinforcement with steel plates welded to the interior reinforcing channels and drilled and tapped. Provide reinforcement for all other items of hardware. F. Doors with glass lite openings shall have trim recessed from the face of the door, beveled and attached with screws. G. Louvers: Provide sightproof louvers inserted into the panels. Form louver frames of minimum 20 -gauge steel. Weld or tenon minimum 24 gauge blades to frame and fasten the entire assembly to the door with moldings. The moldings, when used, shall be an integral part of the louver. H. Fire -Rated Doors: Provide fire rated doors investigated and tested as fire door doors, complete with type of hardware to be used. Identify each fire door with recognized testing laboratory labels, indicating applicable fire rating of steel doors. Construct doors to comply with NFPA Standard No. 80. 2.04 FABRICATION - FRAMES A. Construct to shapes and sizes shown, meeting various wall thicknesses in accordance with ANSI/SDI-100. B. Back weld corners (inside face) and grind outside face to remove any material which comes through seam. C. Mortise, reinforce, drill and tap for standard weight, full mortise template hinges and template strike. D. Provide not less than three 18 gauge anchors per jamb, or as shown on Drawings, spaced for maximum stiffness. . Provide adjustable 18 gauge floor clips at each jamb, welded to back face of jamb, punched for securing to floor with two spaced anchors. E. Make cutouts for required hardware specified under Section 08710, from templates furnished. Reinforce butt cutouts with minimum 8 gauge thick steel plate drilled and tapped and welded in place. When heavy duty hinges are specified, provide high frequency reinforcing at frames for hinges. Coordinate with hardware vendor. Provide strike stops of frames with holes for three rubber door silencers; on double door frames, provide for two silencers per door at head. F. For openings over 42 inches wide and at double openings, reinforce head members full length with a matching profile of 12 gauge steel. Provide anchor at midpoint of door, if practical. G. Construct frames for UL labeled doors in accordance with UL requirements and label as scheduled. 2.05 FABRICATION - GLAZING FRAMES A. Construct in accordance with applicable parts of door frame Specification and as detailed. Extend partition frames around all four sides of openings. B. Provide glazing stops, removable one side and integral from the other side, secured with countersunk flat head Phillips screws spaced at not more than 16 inches on center and 2 inches from corners. Miter stops at corners. 2.06 PAINTING A. Bonderize and prime doors and frames with one shop coat of rust inhibitive primer. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS rm/STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 08100-2 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install metal door frames plumb, level and rigidly secure in place. Properly brace until built in. Follow recommendations of SDI -100. B. Fill backs of frames solid with mortar at concrete and masonry construction. C. Install fire doors and frames to comply with NFPA 80. 3.02 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion of the Work, remove excess materials, equipment and debris and dispose of away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. END OF SECTION DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS rm/STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 08100-3 ' DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/WOOD DOORS DFD PROJECT NO.982151SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 08215-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas ' GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 SECTION 08215 WOOD DOORS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit Drawings showing schedule of door sizes and types, door details and elevations. Note discrepancies between the Drawings and door schedules, and the ' requirements of regulatory and testing agencies. B. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's data showing door construction. C. Samples: Before fabrication, submit sample of each type of door to be furnished, showing face, edge, core construction and factory finish for each type specified. ' 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Coordination: Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating and obtaining necessary information from Hardware and Metal Frame Manufacturers. Door Manufacturer shall be responsible for coordinating necessary information received by Contractor from Hardware and Metal Frame Manufacturers in order that doors shall be properly prepared to receive hinges and hardware. Contractor shall provide door supplier with approved frame schedule, hardware schedule, and hardware templates. Furnish to door supplier 60 days prior to desired delivery date of doors. B. Regulatory Requirements: Fire doors shall be listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing and certification agency, in accordance with applicable building codes. The listed doors shall meet or exceed ASTM E152, UL -10(b), or NFPA 252. Provide fire ' labels from Warnock -Hersey International (WHI), or Underwriters Laboratories (UL). C. Certification: Provide each fire rated and sound rated door with a label permanently attached at eye level, to the hinge stile, indicating the testing agency's approval for the ' rating required. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Prior to delivery, provide protection compatible with finish specified for door edges and faces. B. Delivery: 1 1. Deliver doors to the jobsite only when proper storage site is available. 2. Store doors in an area having controlled temperature and humidity as recommended by NWWDA, AWI and the door manufacturer. 3. Store doors flat on factory pallets, or three full 2 x 4's, one centered and the other two 12 inches from each end. Do not stack doors on end, or on their vertical edge. -4. Protect wood doors from construction activity, dirt, and exposure to sunlight. C. Handling: 1. Always handle doors with clean hands or gloves. 2. Do not drag doors across one another. . 3. Maintain factory packaging or other means of protection on doors, until date of Substantial Completion. ' DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/WOOD DOORS DFD PROJECT NO.982151SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 08215-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 1.05 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Furnish the following warranty to Owner: 1. Warrant doors from the date of installation against defects in materials and workmanship. Periods of warranty after date of installation: a. Interior solid core and mineral core: Life of installation. 2. Replacement under warranty shall include removal of the defective door, hanging, installation of hardware, and finishing. PART 2 PRODUCTS A. Doors shall be products of one of the following Manufacturers: 1. Algoma 2. Buell Door Company 3. Eggers Industries 4. Weyerhaeuser Company, Architectural Door Division 2.02 FLUSH DOORS A. Cores: 1. Solid Core: Shall conform to ANSI A208.1 1 LD2, 32 lbs. per cubic foot density. B. Edge Bandings: 1. Stiles (Dimensions given are minimum sizes allowed after factory trimming to booksize or prefitting). a. Particleboard Core: 1-1/2 inch double banded laminated hardwood stile (no finger joints allowed) in outer and outer band to be at least 1/2 inch wide same species lumber as face veneer with the exception of birch doors which will have hard maple stiles. 2. Rails (Dimensions given are minimum sizes allowed after factory trimming to booksize or prefitting). a. Particleboard Core: 1-1/4 inch minimum mill option hardwood rail. C. Face Veneers, Crossbands and Backers: When wood veneer or medium density overlay faces are specified, doors shall be 5 ply, made up of a face veneer, crossbanding and a core unit, all securely bonded together utilizing type 1 (fully waterproof) adhesive and the hot press assembly technique. All plies must be placed at right angles to adjacent plies. Face Veneers shall have a minimum thickness of 1/50 after factory sanding and the individual pieces of veneer forming the face veneer must be spliced .or edge glued together. 1. Medium Density Overlay shall meet PSI -74. Overlay shall be factory primed, readily sandable, weatherproof, and carry a Class "B" Fire Rating. Furnish MDO for paint grade doors. Paint grade Birch hardwood and hardwood surfaced doors shall not be considered as meeting this Specification. D. Glue: Type 1 for interior and exterior doors. 2.03 STILE AND RAIL DOORS A. Meet AWI 1400 Premium Grade for transparent finish and Custom Grade for opaque finish. B. Raised Panel: Provide panel configurations as indicated on Door Schedule. C. Provide Style 214, medium distress finish as manufactured by Craftsmen in Wood as indicated on Drawings. D. Louvered Doors: Medium distress finish, configuration as indicated on Door Schedule. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/WOOD DOORS DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 08215-2 1 SASC Inc. J Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 2.04 FACTORY FINISHING A. Stain Finish: AWI Section 1500 System TR -6 Catalyzed Polyurethane applied using the following steps. 1. Finish sanding. 2. Burnish. 1 3. Stain application. Stain to color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard and custom colors. 4. Curing. 5. Sealer application. Sealer to be thermosetting polyester amino modified ' conversion coating. 6. Curing. 7. Sealer denibbing. 8. Topcoat application. Topcoat to be catalyzed polyurethane coating or modified catalyzed polyurethane coating. 9. Curing. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION ' A. Examine door frames to assure that jambs are true and plumb. Correct frames which are not true and plumb before doors are hung. 3.02 INSTALLATION n A. Doors shall be hung true and plumb with standard bevel and with uniform 3/32 inch clearance at jambs and head, and 1/2 inch bottom clearance, unless otherwise required. Mortise, drill or otherwise prepare doors for finish hardware specified in Section 08700, Finish Hardware. B. Doors that are cut or planed for fitting shall be immediately resealed with a transparent wood sealer. Doors shall operate freely without sticking or binding, without hinge -bound conditions and with hardware installed, properly adjusted and functioning. C. Repair of Factory Finish: 1. Clear and Stain: Minor handling marks or scratches (not through the seal coat) shall be repaired by sanding the damaged area, then topcoating again with polyurethane with a matching gloss. 3.03 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion of the Work, remove excess materials, equipment and debris and dispose of away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. END OF SECTION DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TMMOOD DOORS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 08215-3 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 SECTION 08310 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit Drawings showing sizes, construction and installation details. 1.02 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in Manufacturer's original unopened packaging with labels intact. B. Storage and Protection: Deliver and store items in dry, protected areas. Adequately protect against damage while stored at the site. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Furnish products of one of the following Manufacturers, except as approved by the Architect, subject to compliance with Specification requirements: 1. Milcor Inc. 2. Karp Associates 3. J.L. Industries 4. Bilco 2.02 ACCESS DOORS A. Doors: Sizes as shown on the Drawings. Units shall be prime painted steel at painted wall construction and stainless steel in the and other locations as indicated, in types as required by wall construction, as follows (based on Milcor): 1. "DW," drywall walls. 2. "AT," acoustical tile ceilings. 3. "M," masonry, the walls, etc. B. Door and Frame: 16 gage steel. Provide screw driver operated cam. 16 gage steel shall be used for door and frame. Size as required or as indicated on the Drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install access doors in accordance with Manufacturer's directions at locations shown on Drawings. B. Install plumb and level, true to line. 3.02 CLEANING . A. During the course of the Work and on completion of the Work, remove excess materials, equipment and debris and dispose of away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. END OF SECTION DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 08310-1 ' SASC Inc. Phoenix •Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 SECTION 08330 COILING DOORS PART GENERAL. 1.01 ' SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: Design exterior doors to meet windload of 20 psf. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit Drawings indicating type of doors, operation, finishes and installation details. B. Samples: Submit 2 samples showing specified finish. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Fire doors shall be UL Class rated and labeled as scheduled on Drawings. Provide UL certificate of inspection for oversize doors. Meet NFPA-80 and FM 4100 standard for durability. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in Manufacturer's original unopened packaging with labels intact. B. Storage: Adequately protect against damage while stored at the site. C. Handling:- Comply with Manufacturer's instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Furnish products of one of the following Manufacturers, except as approved by the Architect, subject to compliance with Specification requirements: 1. Cookson Co. 2. Cornell Iron Works, Inc. 3. Overhead Door Corp. 2.02 COILING DOORS A. Coiling Door: 1. -Non-insulated, complete with guides, hoods, operating mechanism and special features as specified. 2. The load of barrel and curtain shall be supported by 2 grease -sealed ball bearings. 3. Curtain: a. Interlocking No. 44 slats with 22 gage exterior slat and 24 gage interior slat fabricated from hot dipped galvanized strip steel. b. Galvanized coating to be ASTM A653 designation. Material to be given a grey acrylic prime coat before fabricating. C. Rigid polyurethane insulation, 13/16 inch thick with flame spread not greater than 25 and a smoke generation of 50 or less with R = 6 or better. d. Alternate slats to be fitted with endlocks. e. Provide windlocks on doors over 14'-1" wide. f. Reinforce bottom slat with two steel angles, not less than 1/8 inch thick. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/COILING DOORS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 08330-1 SASC Inc. , Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG , ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 4. Hood: a. Fabricated from galvanized steel. b. Baffle: Provide canvas hood baffle to minimize seepage of air around 5. Finish: hood. a. Curtain and hood: Baked grey acrylic primer. b. All other exposed surfaces: One coat of rust inhibiting paint at factory. , 6. Operation: Chain operated by means of reduction gears and galvanized hand chain and chain lock. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental , conditions in writing to Architect. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. B. Coordination: Coordinate with other Work which affects, connects with, or will be I concealed by this Work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Doors are to be installed by the manufacturer or authorized representative in strict accordance with Manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Fire Rated Coiling Doors: 1. Install in accordance with NFPA Standard 80. 2. Connection of time -delay release device to fire alarm system shall be in accordance with Division 16 requirements. C. Upon completion, adjust doors and grilles for proper operation. 3.03 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. END OF SECTION DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TDA/COILING DOORS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 08330-2 ' SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas 1. . . GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 SECTION 08551 ALUMINUM CLAD WOOD FRAME WINDOWS AND DOORS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. , Factory assembled aluminum clad wood windows including, glazing, anchorages, attachments, and shims. 1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 1 A. Window units shall meet Grade 60 specifications in accordance with NWWDA I.S.-2 except where more stringent requirements are specified otherwise. 1.03 SUBMITTALS ' A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01330. B. Indicate pertinent dimensioning, general construction, component connections and ' locations, anchorage methods and locations, and installation details. C. Submit sample of window illustrating glazing system, quality of construction, and color of finish. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to job site in manufacturer's or distributor's packaging undamaged, complete with installation instructions. B. Store off ground, under cover, protected from weather and construction activities. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURED UNITS ' A. Furnish products of one of the following Manufacturers, subject to compliance with Specification requirements. 1. Windows: Marvin Windows and Doors. 2. Siding Doors: Weiland Sliding Doors & Windows, Inc., 760-630-5390. 2.02 MATERIALS ' A. Doors: Provide custom made Bifold doors in configurations as indicated on Drawings. Aluminum finish as selected by Architect. B. Windows: 1. Frame: Water-repellent preservative vacuum treated in accordance with NWWDA I.S.4, style as selected by Architect a. Interior exposed surfaces: Clear Western Pine b. Exterior surfaces: Aluminum clad, color as selected by Architect. ' 2. Glazing: Quality fully tempered float glass, 1/4 inch thick, complying with ASTM C1048. Clear double glazing panels, glass set in aluminum frame, fitted to panel with welded corner vinyl gasket seal. 2.03 FABRICATION ' A. Fabricate windows and doors to accommodate the following opening tolerances: 1. Vertical dimensions between high and low points: plus 1/4 in. or minus 0 in. 2. Width dimensions: plus 1/4 in. or minus 0 in. ' 3. Building columns or masonry openings: Plus or minus 1/4 in. from plumb. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ ALUMINUM CLAD WOOD FRAME WINDOWS AND DOORS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 08551-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install windows in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and approved shop drawings, to achieve weathertight installation. B. Maintain alignment with adjacent work. Secure assembly to framed openings, plumb and square, without distortion. C. Place insulation in shim spaces around unit perimeter, to maintain continuity of building thermal barrier. D. Install sealant and related backing materials at perimeter of assembly in accordance with Section 07900. 3.03 FINAL CLEANING A. Clean window frames and glass thoroughly. B. Remove labels and visible markings. END OF SECTION DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ ALUMINUM CLAD WOOD FRAME WINDOWS AND DOORS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 08551-2 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 ' DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/DOOR HARDWARE DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 08710-1 ' SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE PART GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. Section Includes: Finish hardware except as otherwise specified or specifically omitted ' herein. 1.02 SUBSTITUTIONS AND SUBMITTALS: A. Requests for substitutions must be made in writing 10 days prior to bid date to allow architect to issue an addendum. If proposing a substitute, submit that product data attached to one showing specified item and indicate savings to be made. No other ' substitutions will be allowed. B. Submittals: Submit six copies of schedule at earliest possible date prior to delivery of hardware. Organize schedule into "Hardware Sets" with an index of doors and heading, indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Include ' the following information: 1. Type, style, function, size, quantity and finish of each hardware item. 2. Name, part number and manufacturer of each item. 3. Fastenings and other pertinent information. 4. Location of hardware set cross referenced to indications on drawings both on floor plans and in door schedule. 5. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. 6. Mounting locations for hardware. 7. Door and frame sizes and materials. 8. Submit manufacture's technical data and installation instructions for the electronic hardware. C. 9. Catalog cuts. Templates: Where required, furnish hardware templates to each fabricator of doors, frames and other work to be factory -prepared for the installation of hardware. ' 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: J A. Qualifications: ' 1. Obtain each kind of hardware (latch and locksets, exit devices, hinges, and closers) from only one manufacturer, although several may be indicated as offering products complying with requirements. 2. Hardware supplier shall be a direct factory contract supplier who has in his employment a certified architectural hardware consultant (AHC) who is available ' at all reasonable times during the course of the Work, and for project hardware consultation to the Owner, Architect, and Contractor. B. Schedule Designations: Except as otherwise indicated, the use of one manufacturer's numeric designation system in schedules does not imply that another manufacturer's products will not be acceptable, unless they are not equal in design, size, weight, finish function, or other quality of significance. See 1.02 A for substitutions. ' C. Exit Doors: Openable at all times from the inside without the use of a key or any special knowledge or effort. D. Fire -rated openings: Provide hardware for fire -rated openings in compliance with NFPA ' Standard No. 80. This requirement takes precedence over other requirements for such hardware. Provide only such hardware which has been tested and listed by UL for the type and size of door required, and complies with the requirements of the door and the door frame labels. Latching hardware, door closers, ball bearing hinges, and seals are ' required whether or not listed in the Hardware schedule. ' DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/DOOR HARDWARE DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 08710-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 1. Where panic exit devices are required on fire -rated doors, provide supplementary marking on door UL label on exit device indicating "Fire Exit Hardware." 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Acceptance at the Site: Individually package each unit of finish hardware complete with proper fastening and appurtenances, clearly marked on the outside to indicate contents and specific locations in the Work. B. Deliver packaged hardware items at the times and to the locations (shop or field) for installation, as directed by the Contractor. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Coordination: Coordinate hardware with other work. Furnish hardware items of proper design for use on doors and frames of the thickness, profile, swing security and similar requirements indicated, as necessary for the proper installation and function, regardless of omissions or conflicts in the information on the Contract Documents. B. Upon request, check the Shop Drawings for doors and entrances to confirm that adequate provisions will be made for the proper installation of hardware. 1.06 WARRANTY: A. Provide guarantee from hardware supplier as follows: 1. Closers: Ten years; except electronic closers: Two years. 2. Exit Devices & Locksets: Three years 3. All other Hardware: Two years. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Approval of manufacturers other than those listed shall be in accordance with paragraph 1.02 A. Item: Manufacturer: Approved: Approved Hinges Hager Stanley Locks Best None Cylinders Best None Closers Dorma Norton Exit Devices Von Duprin None Pulls Craftsman in Wood None Kickplates BBW Hager Rockwood Stops BBW Hager Rockwood Thresholds Pemko Hager Seals/Sweeps Pemko Hager B. Furnish all items of hardware required to complete the work in accordance with specifications and plans. C. Carefully inspect Project for the extent of the finish hardware required to complete the Work. Where there is a conflict between these Specification and the existing hardware furnish finish hardware to specification. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Mortise type Locks and Latches shall be heavy-duty with hinged, anti -friction, 3/4 inch throw latchbolt with anti -friction piece made of self lubricating stainless steel. Functions and design as indicated on the hardware groups. Deadbolt functions shall be 1 inch projection made of hardened stainless steel. Both deadbolt and latchbolt are to extend into the case a minimum of 3/8 inch when fully extended. Furnish locksets and latchsets DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/DOOR HARDWARE DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 08710-2 17 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 with sufficient curved strike lip to protect door trim. Provide locksets with 7 -pin interchangeable core cylinders. All mortise cylinders shall have a concealed internal set screw for securing the cylinder to the lockset. The internal set screw will be accessible only by removing the core from the cylinder body. Locksets and latchsets to have self - aligning, thru-bolted trim. Auxiliary deadlatch to be made of one piece stainless steel, permanently lubricated. Lever handles must be of forged or cast brass, bronze or stainless steel construction. Levers which contain a hollow cavity are not acceptable. Spindle to be such that if forced it will twist first, then break, thus preventing forced entry. ' Levers to be operated with a roller bearing spindle hub mechanism. 1. Grade 1 Cylindrical Locks shall have minimum 9/16 throw. All deadbolts shall have 1 -inch minimum throw. 2. Comply with requirements of local security ordinances. ' 3. Lock Series and Design: Best 35H7 15H Trim. Cylinders: Best 7 -Pin ' A. Generally to be BHMA613 Oil Rubbed Bronze. 1. Protection Plates, Push, Pulls shall be BHMA 613. B. Spray door closers to match other'hardware, unless otherwise noted. ' C. Aluminum items shall be finished to match predominant adjacent material. Seals to coordinate with frame color. 2.04 KEYING REQUIREMENTS A. Provide construction cores and keys during the construction period. Construction control and operating keys and core shall not be part of the Owner's permanent keying system or furnished on the same keyway (or key section) as the Owner's permanent keying system. Permanent cores and keys (prepared according to the accepted keying schedule) will be furnished to the Owner (by the local Best factory representative) prior to occupancy. ' DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/DOOR HARDWARE DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 08710-3 B. Hinges: Outswinging exterior doors shall have non -removable (NRP) pin. All hinge open widths shall be minimum, but of sufficient size to permit door to swing 180. Furnish ' hinges with five knuckles and flush bearing. Aluminum doors and frames and existing interior doors with existing frames to receive continuous hinges. 1. Furnish 3 hinges per leaf to 7 foot 6 inch height. Add one for each additional 30 inches .in height or fraction thereof. ' 2. Provide hinges as listed in schedule. C. Exit Devices: Furnish all sets at wood doors with sex bolts unless otherwise specified. D. Surface Door Closers: Full rack and pinion type with removable non-ferrous cover. Provide sex bolts at all wood doors. Place closers inside building, stairs, and rooms. Closers shall be non -handed, non -sized and adjustable. 1. Provide multi -size 1 through 6 at all doors rated or not. -.2. Flush transom offset brackets shall be used where parallel arm closers are listed for doors with fixed panels over. 3. Drop brackets are required at narrow head rails. 4. Set exterior doors closers to have 8.5 lbs maximum pressure to open, interior non -rated at 5 lbs , rated openings at 12 lbs. ' E. Kickplates: Provide with four beveled edges, 10 inches high by width less 2 inches on single doors and 1 inch on pairs of doors. Furnish Type "A" screws to match finish. J F. Seals: All seals shall be finished to match adjacent frame color. Seals shall be furnished G. as listed in schedule. Material shall be UL listed for labeled openings. Screws: All exposed screws shall be Phillips head. H. Silencers: Furnish silencers on all interior frames, 3 for single doors, 2 for pairs. Omit ' where any type of seals occur. 2.03 FINISH, ' A. Generally to be BHMA613 Oil Rubbed Bronze. 1. Protection Plates, Push, Pulls shall be BHMA 613. B. Spray door closers to match other'hardware, unless otherwise noted. ' C. Aluminum items shall be finished to match predominant adjacent material. Seals to coordinate with frame color. 2.04 KEYING REQUIREMENTS A. Provide construction cores and keys during the construction period. Construction control and operating keys and core shall not be part of the Owner's permanent keying system or furnished on the same keyway (or key section) as the Owner's permanent keying system. Permanent cores and keys (prepared according to the accepted keying schedule) will be furnished to the Owner (by the local Best factory representative) prior to occupancy. ' DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/DOOR HARDWARE DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 08710-3 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 B. All cylinders shall be Best 7 -pin, interchangeable core. C. Permanent keys and cores shall be stamped with the applicable key mark for identification. These visual key control marks or codes will not include the actual key cuts. Permanent keys will also be stamped "Do Not Duplicate." D. Grand Masterkeys, Masterkeys and other Security keys shall be transmitted to the Owner by Registered Mail, return receipt requested. E. Furnish keys in the following quantities: 5 each Masterkeys 2 each Change keys each keyed core 9 each Construction masterkeys 1 each Control keys F. The Owner, or the Owner's agent, will install permanent cores and return the construction cores to the Best Access Systems Factory Representative. All Construction cores and keys remain the property of Best Access Systems. G. Keying schedule: Submit three copies of separate detailed schedule indicating clearly how the Owner's final instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 HARDWARE LOCATIONS A. Hinges: 1. Bottom Hinge: 10 inches from door bottom to bottom of hinge. 2. Top Hinge: 5 inches from door top to top of hinge. 3. Center Hinge: Center between top and bottom hinge. 4. Extra Hinge: 6 inches from bottom of top hinge to top of extra hinge. B. Lock: 38 inches from finished floor to center of lever or knob. C. Push Bar: 44 inches from bottom of door to center of bar. D. Push Plate: 44 inches from bottom of door to center of plate. E. Pull Plate: 42 inches from bottom of door to center of pull. F. Exit Device: 39-13/16 inches from finished floor to center of pad. G. Deadlock Strike: 44 inches from floor, centered. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install each hardware item per manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. B. Installation shall conform to local governing agency security ordinance. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TDA/DOOR HARDWARE DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 08710-4 1 SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 .Inspection: Hardware supplier shall inspect all hardware furnished within 10 days of contractor's request and include with his guarantee a statement that this has been accomplished. Inspector or Contractor shall sign off the hardware as being complete and correctly installed and adjusted. Further corrections of defective material shall be the ' responsibility of his representative. 3.04 SCHEDULE OF FINISH HARDWARE A. Legend of listed manufacturers: HA Hager BE Best VD Von Duprin DM Dorma CIW Craftsmen in Wood BB BBW PK Pemko ' B. The items listed in the following "Schedule of Finish Hardware" shall conform throughout to the requirements of the foregoing specification. The last column of letters in the Hardware Schedule refers to the manufacturer abbreviation listed above. C. The Door Schedule on the Drawings indicates which Hardware Set is used with door. HW -01 ' Each opening shall have: 2 ea Floor Closer BTS80/D BF STAT DM 4 ea Intermediate Pivot 75220 STAT DM ' 1 set 2 Point Lock MS1837 313 AR 1 ea Cylinder 1 E74 -C181 613 BE 1 ea T -Turn Cylinder 1 E6A4 613 BE 1 ea Sign 435 "These doors to remain..." BB 4 ea Pulls H1011 x Antique Bronze CIW 1 ea Threshold Type 13 1/2 x 8 for BTS 80 BRZ PK 2 ea Sweep 29326DP 313 PK 1 set Seal S88C Head and Jambs PK HW -02 Each opening shall have: J 1 ea Cylinder 1 E74 613 BE Balance hardware by door manufacturer. HW -03 ' Each opening shall have: 1 ea Exit Device 55NL 613 VD 1 ea Cylinder 1 E72 613 BE 1 ea Pull H1011 x Antique Bronze CIW Balance hardware by door manufacturer. HW -04 ' Each opening have: shall 4 ea Hinge BB1199 4.5 x 4.5 NRP 613 HA ' 1 ea Lockset 35H7FW Less Trim 613 BE 1 set Lever Trim H1086-1 (Best) x Antique Bronze CIW 1 ea Closer 651-PAFHO 695 DM 1 ea Threshold 171D 313 PK 1 ea Sweep 29326DP 313 PK 1 set Seal S88C Head and Jambs PK Note: Provide 626 finish at door 105A. ' DFD ARCHITECTURE DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 C -SPECS TM/DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 08710-5 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 HW -05 Each opening shall have: 3 ea Hinge BB 1279 4.5 x 4.5 652 HA 1 ea Privacy 35HOLF 15H 626 BE 1 ea Closer 651 689 DM 1 set Seal S88C Head and Jambs PK HW -06 Each opening shall have: 4 ea Hinge BB1199 4.5 x 4.5 NRP 613 HA 1 ea Lockset 35H7J Less Trim 613 BE 1 set Lever Trim H1 08B-1 (Best) x Antique Bronze Lever Trim CIW 1 ea Closer 651 695 DM 1 ea Threshold 171 D 313 PK 1 ea Sweep 29326DP 313 PK 1 set Seal S88C Head and Jambs 628 PK HW -07 Each opening shall have: 2 ea Spring Hinge 1250 4.5 x 4.5 641 HA 1 ea Hinge BB1279 4.5 x 4.5 641 HA 1 ea Privacy 35HOLF Less Trim 613 BE 1 set Lever Trim H-1 08B-1 (Best) x Antique Bronze CIW 1 ea Coat Hook Stop 15030 BO HW -08 Each opening shall have: 8 ea Hinge BB1168 4.5 x 4.5 652 HA 1 set AF Bolt 945 626 DC 1 ea DP Strike 80 626 DC 1 ea Lockset 35H7E 15H 626 BE 2 ea Closer 651-PAFHO 689 DM 1 ea Coordinator 600 x 2/601AB 600 DC 1 ea Threshold 271A (Exterior Door) 628 PK 2 ea Sweep 315CN (Exterior Door) 628 PK 1 ea Astragal 352DR 313 PK HW -09 Each opening shall have: 1 ea Padlock 41 B722 606 BE Balance hardware by door manufacturer. HW -10 Each opening shall have: 1 ea Cylinder 1 E74 613 BE DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/DOOR HARDWARE DFD PROJECT NO. 982151SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 08710-6 DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/DOOR HARDWARE ' DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 I SECTION 08710-7 SASC Inc. • Phoenix - Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 Balance hardware by door manufacturer. HW -11 Each opening shall have: 4 ea Double Acting Hinge 3029-7 641 BO (8 ea at pairs of doors) 2 ea Kick Plate 37 10" x 1"LDW 613 BB ' (4 ea at pairs of doors) 2 ea Push Plate 5035 4 x 16 613 BB (4 ea at pairs of doors) ' HW -12 ' Each opening shall have: 4 ea Hinge BB1168 4.5 x 4.5 641 HA (3 ea at TO" high doors) ' 1 ea 1 set Lockset Trim 351-17E Less Trim H10813-1 x Antique Bronze 613 BE CIW 1 ea Stop F8061X 616 BB END OF SECTION DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/DOOR HARDWARE ' DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 I SECTION 08710-7 t 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in Manufacturer's original unopened packaging with labels intact. ' B. Storage: Adequately protect against damage while stored at the site. C. Handling: Comply with Manufacturer's instructions. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TDA/GLAZING ' DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 08800-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ' ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 SECTION 08800 GLAZING PART GENERAL 1.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Glass and glazing materials shall provide continuity of building enclosure vapor and air barrier. ' 1. To utilize the inner pane of multiple pane sealed units for the continuity of air and vapor seal. 2. Maintain continuous air and vapor barrier throughout glazed assembly from glass ' pane to heel bead of glazing sealant. B. Size glass to withstand dead loads and positive and negative live loads acting normal to plane of glass as calculated in accordance with UBC Chapter 54, as measured in ' accordance with ANSI/ASTM E330. C. Limit glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass, with full recovery of glazing materials, whichever is less. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling or installation requirements for glass and plastic materials. B. Product Data: Submit chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements for glazing materials. Identify available colors. C. Samples: Submit samples as follows: 1. Two samples 8 x 8 inch in size, illustrating glass and plastic units, coloration and 'design. 2. Four inch long bead of glazing sealant, color as selected. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Submit Manufacturer's certification that sealed insulated glass meets or exceeds specified requirements. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE J A. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to 1997 UBC Chapter 24, to local requirements and to State law. B. Standards: 1. ANSI/ASTM E330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 2. ANSI Z97.1 - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Used in Buildings. C. Perform Work in accordance with FGMA Glazing Manual, FGMA Sealant Manual, and Laminators Safety Glass Association - Standards Manual for Glazing Installation Methods. t 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in Manufacturer's original unopened packaging with labels intact. ' B. Storage: Adequately protect against damage while stored at the site. C. Handling: Comply with Manufacturer's instructions. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TDA/GLAZING ' DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 08800-1 snsc Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ' ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 1.05 WARRANTY A. Provide Manufacturer's standard warranty for sealed glass units from seal failure, ' interpane dusting or misting, and replacement of same. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Glass Materials: Furnish products of one of the following Manufacturers, except as approved by the Architect, subject to compliance with Specification requirements: 1. Guardian Industries 2. LOF 3. PPG Industries B. Sealed Insulating Glass Materials: Furnish products of one of the following Manufacturers, except as approved by the Architect, subject to compliance with Specification requirements: 1. Cardinal IG 2. Guardian Industries 2.02 GLASS MATERIALS A. Float Glass: ASTM C1036, Type 1 transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality q3 glazing select; 1/4 inch thick minimum. B. Safety Glass: ASTM C1048, Kind FT fully tempered with horizontal tempering Condition A uncoated, Type 1 transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality q3 glazing select; conforming to ANSI Z97.1; 1/4 inch thick minimum. C. Laminated Glass: 1. Comply with ASTM C1172 for kinds of laminated glass indicated and other requirements specified. Refer to primary and heat-treated glass requirements relating to properties of glass products comprising laminated glass products. 2. Interlayer: a. Material: Polyvinyl butyral sheets; clear frosted, with proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after laminated glass lites and installation. b. Products/Manufacturers: 1) Saflex/Monsanto Co. 2) Butacite/E.I. du Pont de Nemours & Co., Inc. C. Laminating process: Fabricate laminated glass to produce glass free of foreign substances and air or glass products by laminated with polyvinyl butyral interlayer in autoclave with heat plus pressure. 3. Thickness: 1/2 inch. D. Mirror Glass: ASTM C1036, Type 1 transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality q1 mirror select; 1/4 inch thick, sizes noted on Drawings. 2.03 SEALED INSULATING GLASS MATERIALS ' A. Insulated Glass Units - Low E: ASTM E774 and E773, #2 coated surface: 1. Pane: Double pane 2. Edge Seal: Silicone sealant ' 3. Outer Pane: 1/4 thick, clear glass 4. Inner Pane: Low E glass on clear color glass cover plate 5. Emittance: 0.12 6. Interpane Space: Purged dry air 7. Shading Coefficient: 0.57 percent ' 8. Relative Heat Gain: 120 9. Total Unit Thickness: 1 Inch. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/GLAZING ' DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 08800-2 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 2.04 GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene or other resilient blocks of 70 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness tested for compatibility with glazing sealant, minimum length 4 inches. B. Spacers: Neoprene blocks of 40 to 50 Shore A durometer hardness, adhesive backed on one face only and tested for compatibility with specified glazing sealant. C. Interior Glazing Compound: Polymerized Butyl Rubber and Inert Fillers (pigments), solvent based with minimum 75% solids, non -sag consistency, tack -free time of 24 hours or less, paintable non -staining. D. Exterior Glazing Compound: Conforming to ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Use G. Compound shall be paintable, or colored to match frame. E. Glazing Tape: Preshimmed 10 percent solids, non -shrinking, butyl rubber tape compatible with sealants. If exposed, tape shall be paintable, or colored to match frame. F. Mirror Mastic: Polymer type mirror mastic resistant to water, shock, cracking, vibration and thermal expansion. Mastic shall be compatible with mirror backing paint and approved by mirror manufacturer. 2.05 MARKINGS A. Tempered glass shall have each light permanently etched with Manufacturer's name and his compliance with ANSI Z-97.1. IPART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental conditions in writing to Architect. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. B. Examine framing or glazing channel surfaces, backing, removable stop design, and conditions under which glazing is to be performed. C. Coordination: Coordinate with other Work which affects, connects with, or will be concealed by this Work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Comply with combined recommendations of Glass Manufacturer and manufacturer of sealants and other materials used in glazing., except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. B. Clean the glazing, channel, or other framing members to receive glass, immediately before glazing. Remove coatings which are not firmly bonded to the substrate. C. Do not attempt to cut, seam; nip or abrade glass which is tempered or heat strengthened. D. Comply with "Glazing Manual" by FGMA, except as shown and specified otherwise by Manufacturers of glass and glazing materials. E. Inspect each piece of glass immediately before installation, and discard those which have observable edge damage or face imperfections. F. Install setting blocks of proper size at quarter points of sill rabbet. G. Provide spacers inside and out, and of proper size and spacing, for glass sizes larger than 50 united inches. Provide 1/8 inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. DFD ARCHITECTURE ' C -SPECS TM/GLAZING DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 08800-3 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE $ MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 H. Unify appearance of each series of lights by setting each piece to match others as nearly as possible. Inspect each piece and set with pattern, draw and bow oriented in the same direction as other pieces. I. Miter cut and bond ends together at corners where gaskets are used for channel glazing, so that gaskets will not pull away from corners and result in voids or leaks in the glazing system. 3.03 EXTERIOR COMBINATION METHOD (TAPE AND SEALANT) A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent. B. Cut glazing tape to proper length and set against permanent stops, 3/16 inch below sightline. Weld corners together by butting tape and dabbing with sealant. C. Apply bed of sealant along exterior void ensuring full contact with glass. D. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points. E. Rest glass on setting blocks and push against tape (and heel bead of sealant) with sufficient pressure to ensure full contact and adhesion at perimeter. F. Install removable stops, spacer strips inserted between glass and applied stops at 2 -foot intervals, 1/4 inch below sightline. Place glazing tape on glass with tape flush with sightline. G. Fill gap between glass and applied stop with sealant to depth equal to bite of frame on glass but not more than 3/8 inch below sightline. H. Apply cap bead of sealant along exterior void, to uniform and level line, flush with sightline. Tool or wipe cap bead surface with solvent for smooth appearance. 3.04 INTERIOR COMBINATION METHOD (TAPE AND SEALANT) A. Cut glazing tape to proper length and install against permanent stop, projecting 1/16 inch above sightline. B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 point. C. Rest glass on setting blocks and push against tape with sufficient pressure to ensure full contact and adhesion at perimeter. D. Install removable stops; spacer strips inserted between glass and applied stops at 2 foot intervals, 1/4 inch below sightline. E. Fill gap between glass and applied stop with sealant to depth equal to bite of frame on glass to uniform and level line. F. Neatly trim off excess tape to sightline. 3.05 ADHESIVE INSTALLATION OF MIRRORS A. Apply mirror mastic to cover not more than 25 percent of back of mirror. B. Set mirror in support on setting blocks or continuous gasket, and press against substrate to ensure bond of adhesive. C. Leave open ventilation space, 1/8 inch or more in thickness between mirror and substrate, over 75 percent of mirror area (wherever there is no adhesive). DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS rm/GLAZING DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 08800-4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 3.06 ADJUSTING A. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged in any other way during the construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism. 3.07 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. B. Remove labels after Work is completed. C. Clean acrylic sheet glazing in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. 3.08 PROTECTION A. Protect glass from breakage immediately upon installation, by attachment of crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. B. Do not apply markers of any type to surfaces of glass. END OF SECTION DFD ARCHITECTURE DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 ; i C -SPECS TM/GLAZING SECTION 08800-5 t t 1 r SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 SECTION 09100 METAL SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Formed metal stud framing, furring, suspension systems and accessories as shown on Drawings and as specified. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit data describing standard framing member materials and finish, product criteria, load charts, limitations, and installation instructions. B. Certificates: Mill Certification shall be provided with shipment to verify chemical composition, yield strength, tensile strength, elongation and coating thickness. Include listing of applicable ASTM standards specified in this section and comparison of ASTM requirements to actual materials provided to jobsite. C. Manufacturer's letter: Manufacturer shall provide letter stating that the material supplied to the specific project meets or exceed the performance standards listed in these specifications. _ 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE PART 2 .2.01 2.02 A. Perform Work in accordance with ASTM C 754 requirements. PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS A. Furnish products of one of the following Manufacturers, except as approved by the Architect, subject to compliance with Specification requirements: 1. American Studco Inc. 2. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum. 3. Unimast, Inc. 4. Western 5. CEMCO 6. Dietrich Industries 7. Manufacturing members of the Metal Stud Manufacturer's Association, Corvallis, Oregon, (503) 757-8991 FRAMING MATERIALS e A. - Studs, Runners and Furring Channels: 1. ASTM C 645, electro -galvanized to meet ASTM A 591, manufactured from steel supplied in accordance with ASTM A 446, Grade A; ASTM A 525, G60 designation galvanized sheet steel. 2. Thickness: In accordance with stud schedule provided herein. 3. Slotted Top Track - Single Track Slip System for Interior Partitions: As manufactured by Metal Lite, Inc., 3070 E. Miraloma Avenue, Anaheim, CA 92806 . (800) 886-6824. -4. • Curved Stud and Track Components: Custom curved stud and track components as manufactured by RadiusTrack Corporation, 6612 Lyndale Avenue So., Suite 2, Richfield, MN 55423 (888) 872-3487. B. Studs: C-shaped, non -load bearing rolled steel, punched for utility access, of size shown .on Drawings. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS n'^/METAL SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09100-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 C. Ceiling Runners: Cold or hot -rolled steel, meet ASTM C 754. D. Hanger and Tie Wire: Meet ASTM C 754. E. Furring and Bracing Members: Of same gauge, material and finish as studs, thickness to suit purpose. F. Clips, Brackets: Galvanized wire or sheet metal designed for attachment of furring members. G. Fasteners: GA 203, self -drilling, self -tapping screws. H. Anchorage Devices: Power driven, powder actuated, drilled expansion bolts or screws with sleeves as required for positive anchorage. I. Acoustic Sealant: As specified in Section 09250. J. Primer: FS TT -P-645, for touch-up of galvanized surfaces. K. Backing: "Notch-Tite" and "Flush Mount" as manufactured by Metal Lite, Inc., 3070 E: Miraloma Avenue, Anaheim, CA 92806 (800) 886-6824. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that conditions are ready to receive Work. B. Verify field measurements are as shown on Drawings. C. Verify that rough -in utilities are in proper location. D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate. 3.02 METAL STUD ERECTION A. Install stud framing in accordance with ASTM C 754. B. Align and secure top and bottom runners at 24 inches o.c. Place two beads of acoustic sealant between runners and substrate. C. Fit runners under and above openings; secure intermediate studs at spacing of wall studs. D. Install studs vertically at spacing indicated on stud schedule provided herein; unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. Place two beads of acoustic sealant between studs and adjacent vertical surfaces. Install felt strips between wall and stud where studs abut exterior walls. E. Connect studs to tracks using fastener method. F. Door Opening Framing: Install double studs at door frame jambs. Install stud tracks on each side of opening, at frame head height, and between studs and adjacent studs. G. Backing and Blocking: Provide backing and blocking attached to studs. Bolt or screw steel channels to studs. Install backing and blocking for support of plumbing fixtures, toilet partitions, wall cabinets, toilet accessories, and hardware. If proprietary system is used, install in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. H. Coordinate installation of bucks, anchors, blocking, electrical and mechanical Work placed in or behind partition framing. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/METAL SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES , DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09100-2 1 SASC Inc, Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 I. Splice studs with 8 inch nested lap, secure each stud flange with flush head screw. J. Construct corners using minimum three studs. K. Brace stud framing system and make rigid. L: Coordinate erection of studs with requirements of door and window frame supports and attachments. M. Align stud web openings. N. Refer to Drawings for indication of partitions extending to ceiling only and for partitions extending through ceiling to structure above. Maintain clearance under structural building members to avoid deflection transfer to studs. Provide nested extended leg ceiling runners or proprietary slip track. O. Coordinate placement of insulation in multiple stud spaces made inaccessible after stud framing erection. 3.03 WALL FURRING INSTALLATION ' A. Erect wall furring for direct attachment to concrete, brick masonry and concrete walls. B. Erect furring channels vertically. Secure in place on alternate channel flanges at maximum 24 inches. C. Space furring channels maximum 16 inches on center, not more than 4 inches from floor and ceiling lines, and butting walls. ' D. Install furring channels directly attached to concrete and brick masonry and concrete walls, as applicable in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. E. Erect free-standing metal stud framing tight to concrete, concrete and brick masonry walls, attached by adjustable furring brackets in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. 3.04 ACOUSTICAL AND FIRE RATINGS �. - A. Install framing and furring as required for indicated acoustical and fire ratings. 3.05 CEILING FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with ASTM C 754. B. Coordinate location of hangers with other Work. ' C. Install ceiling framing independent of walls, columns and above -ceiling Work. D. Reinforce openings in ceiling suspension system which interrupt main carrying channels or furring channels, with lateral channel bracing. Extend bracing minimum 24 inches beyond each end of openings. E. Laterally brace entire suspension system. F. No hanger support shall be allowed from roof deck. G. At steel beams, joists or other steel construction wrap hangers around, inset through, or clip or bolt to the supports, so as to develop the full strength of the hangers. H. At lights or other openings that interrupt the main runner or furring channels reinforce grillage with 3/4 inch cold -rolled channels, wire tied atop and parallel to the main runner channels. '. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/METAL SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09100-3 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 I. Do not bridge control and expansion joints with metal furring. Provide separate supports on each side of joint. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: At Owner's request, Contractor shall provide spot testing of actual properties of steel framing to verify compliance with specifications. 3.07 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. 3.08 STUD SCHEDULE A. Stud Table: Maximum limits based upon allowable deflection of 1/120. STUD WIDTH STUD GAUGE STUD SPACING PARTITION HEIGHT BRACING SPACING WHERE OCCURS 1 5/8" 25 16 10'— 2" 4'— 0" O.C. 24 8'— 3" 4'— 0" O.C. 2'/2" 25 16 13'— 2" 6'— 0" O.0 24 101-91, 6'— 0" O.0 22 16 14'— 9" 6'— 0" O.0 24 12'— 1" 6'— 0" O.0 20 16 16'-3" 6'-0"O.0 24 13'— 3" 6'— 0" O.0 35/„ e 25 16 15'— 3" 8' — 0" O.0 24 12'-5" 8'-0"O.0 22 16 19'-1" 8'-0"O.0 24 15'— 7" 8'— 0" O.0 20 16 21'-0" 8'-0"O.0 24 17'-2" 8'-0"O.0 4" 25 16 15'-8" 8'-0"O.0 24 12'— 5" 8'— 0" O.0 22 16 20'— 6" 8'— 0" O.0 24 16'— 5" 8'— 0" O.0 20 16 22' — 4" 8'— 0" O.0 24 18'— 5" 8'— 0" O.0 6" 25 16 18'-6" 10'-0"O.0 24 15'-1" 10'-0"O.0 22 16 26'— 3" 101-0" O.0 24 22'— 4" 10' — 0" O.0 20 16 28'— 6" 10'— 0" O.0 24 24'— 7" 10' — 0" O.0 END OF SECTION DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/METAL SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09100-4 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 SECTION 09220 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER (STUCCO) PART GENERAL -1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide Manufacturer's data on plaster materials, characteristics and limitations, and installation instructions. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with applicable requirements of the Western Lath/Plaster, Drywall Industries Association, Inc, "Reference Specifications and Data Guide", except where more stringent requirements are specified or required by local building codes. B. Field Samples: Make 2 samples, each 3 feet square at locations directed by Architect, for each specified stucco finish and color Sample may remain as part of the Work. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in Manufacturer's original unopened packaging with labels intact. B. Storage: Adequately protect against damage while stored at the site. C. Handling: Comply with Manufacturer's instructions. 1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply plaster when substrate or ambient air temperature is less than 50 degrees F. nor more than 80 degrees F. B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F. during and after installation of plaster. C. During hot weather protect stucco from uneven and excessive evaporation. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PLASTER MATERIALS A. Water: Clean and free of deleterious matter. B. Portland Cement: Conform to ASTM C150, Type I or II. C. Hydrated Lime: Conform to ASTM C207, Type S. D. Aggregate shall be clean, well graded sand or screenings from crushed stone or slag, and shall conform to ASTM C33 for fine aggregate except that it shall be graded within the following limitations: 1. Passing No. 4 sieve: 100 percent 2. Passing No. 8 sieve: 90 percent 3. Passing No. 16 sieve: 60 percent -90 percent 4. Passing No. 30 sieve: 35 percent -70 percent 5. Passing No. 50 sieve: 10 percent -30 percent 6. Passing No. 100 sieve: 5 percent E. Bonding Agent: ASTM C31; type recommended for bonding stucco to concrete and ' concrete masonry. DFD ARCHITECTURE - C -SPECS TM/ PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER (STUCCO) DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09220-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 F. Fiberglass strands: 1 to 1-1/2 pounds of 1/2 -inch chopped alkaline resistant fiberglass strands per 94 pound sack of cement in each coat except the finish coat. 2.02 FURRING AND LATHING A. Wire Mesh Reinforcement: 2 inch x 2 inch galvanized steel, 24 gage wire, woven mesh. B. Metal Lath: 2.5 Ib./sq.yd. expanded metal, self -furring type; galvanized finish. C. Woven Wire Fabric Lath: 17 gage x 1-1/2 inch wire with paper back, or waterproof kraft building paper meeting UBC Standard 14-1. D. Underlayment: Asphalt saturated No. 15 felt. E. Corner Mesh: Formed steel, minimum 26 gage; expanded flanges shaped to permit complete embedding in plaster; minimum 2 inches wide; galvanized finish. F. Corner Beads: Formed steel, minimum 26 gage; beaded edge, of longest possible length; sized and profiled to suit application; galvanized finish. G. Base Screeds: Formed steel, minimum 26 gage; square edge, of longest possible length; sized and profiled to suit application; galvanized finish. H. Casing Bead: Formed steel; minimum 26 gage; thickness governed by plaster thickness; maximum possible lengths; expanded metal flanges, with square edges; galvanized finish. I. Control Joint Accessory: Formed steel; minimum 26 gage; galvanized finish; accordion profile, 2 inch expanded metal flanges each side; galvanized finish. J. Expansion Joint Accessory: Formed steel, 26 gage; accordion profile, 2 inch expanded metal flanges each side; galvanized finish. K. Flashing Reglets: As specified in Section 07600. L. Tie wire shall be double annealed and galvanized conforming to Type I FS QQ-W-461, of gages specified. M. Anchorages: Nails, staples, or other approved metal supports, of type and size to suit application, galvanized to rigidly secure lath and associated metal accessories in place. N. Polyethylene Sheet: Clear, 6 mil thick. 2.03 PROPORTIONING AND MIXING A. Accurately measure ingredients. Proportion successive batches exactly alike. Mix aggregate, cement and other dry materials until the mass is uniform in color and homogeneous before adding water. Determine the quantity of water necessary for the desired consistency by trial, and thereafter measure in proper proportions. Retempering will not be allowed. B. Mortar for coats shall consist of one volume of portland cement to not less than three or more than five volumes of damp, loose aggregate. C. Hydrated lime, hydrated lime putty, or slaked lime putty may be added as a plasticizing agent, but the amount used shall not exceed 10 percent by weight nor more than 25 percent by volume of the cement used. D. Mix materials dry, to uniform color and consistency, before adding water. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER (STUCCO) DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09220-2 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas •� GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces and supports to receive Work and report detrimental conditions in writing, with a copy to Architect. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. Verify, before proceeding with this Work, that required inspections of existing conditions have been completed. B. Coordination with other Work: Coordinate with other Work which affects, connects with, or will be concealed by this Work. 3.02. LATH AND TRIM INSTALLATION 1 A. Install underlayment over wood framing and sheathing, and lap 2 inches minimum. B. Lathing: Install lath with the long dimensions of the sheet across supports and attach to the studs or furring using 18 gage tie wire, or by nailing or by equivalent attachment spaced at intervals not exceeding 6 inches along such studs or furring members. Make end laps of lath only over supports and stagger end laps in adjacent courses. C. Metal Trim: Where stucco terminated against dissimilar materials, install casing beads. Where indicated in the stucco field, install expansion joints. Securely fasten trim members to maintain their position in accordance with recommended practice. 3.03 STUCCO APPLICATION A. Apply scratch coat with sufficient pressure so that it is forced through the metal reinforcement and against the backing to form full keys and to embed reinforcement completely. Apply to an approximate thickness of 3/8 inch from the face of the backing. Scratch to provide bond for succeeding coat. B. Apply brown coat not sooner than 48 hours after the application of the scratch coat. Dampen scratch coat evenly to obtain uniform suction. Apply to an approximate thickness of 3/8 inch. Bring surface to a true, even surface by floating or rodding and leave rough, ready to receive finish coat. C. Concrete or Masonry Substrates: Apply brown coat directly over concrete or masonry, proportioned as specified above. Dampen surface evenly to obtain uniform suction. Apply to an approximate thickness of 3/8 inch. Bring surface to a true, even surface by floating or rodding, leave rough ready to receive finish coat. Cure for 7 days by keeping moist. D. Apply finish coat not sooner than seven days after the application of the preceding coat. Before applying, dampen the surface of the preceding coat evenly to obtain uniform suction. Thickness of the finish coat shall be sufficient to secure the texture specified but in no case less than 1/8 inch and the total thickness of the stucco shall be at least 7/8 inch from the face of the backing. Avoid excessive troweling. E. When applying the finish, plan Work so entire wall can be completed at one time to eliminate joining marks. If not practical, use a corner, door or window as a breaking point. F. Finish Coat Texture: Smooth or as noted on Drawings. G. Temperature shall be 45 degrees F. and rising during application and for 48 hours thereafter. H. Curing: Keep each coat of stucco damp for at least 48 hours after application; moistening of each coat shall begin as soon as the stucco has hardened sufficiently so as not to be injured. Apply water in a fine fog spray. Avoid soaking the wall. Apply only as much water as can be readily absorbed. r DFD ARCHITECTURE C-SPECS'rm/ PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER (STUCCO) �' DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09220-3 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 3.04 REPAIRS A. Remove and replace stucco which has cracks, blisters, pitting, discoloration or other defects. B. Repairing of defects will be permitted only when approved by the Architect. C. Repairs shall match.existing Work. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Coordination: In Work under this Section, coordinate with other Trades whose Work connects with, is affected or concealed by cement stucco. Before proceeding, make certain required inspections have been made. 3.06 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. END OF SECTION DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER (STUCCO) DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09220-4 1 1 t t 1 t 1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 SECTION 09250 GYPSUM BOARD PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A.' Product Data: Submit data on gypsum board, joint, finish and accessories. B. Samples: Submit sample of textured finish prior to application. C. Reports: Submit fire test report for fire rated assemblies, and acoustical performance test reports for acoustically -rated assemblies. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in Gypsum Board Systems Work with 2 years documented experience and approved by Manufacturer. B. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to applicable code for fire rated assemblies in conjunction with Section 09100. C. Comply with applicable specification recommendations of GA -216 and GA -600 as published by the Gypsum Association. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Comply with GA -216 and Manufacturer's directions. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Maintain temperature of installed gypsum board spaces in range of 55 degrees F. to 90 degrees F. until building is entirely closed. 2. Ventilate as required to eliminate excessive moisture. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Furnish products of one of the following Manufacturers, except as approved by the Architect, subject to compliance with Specification requirements: 1. Domtar Gypsum of Domtar Inc. 2. Georgia-Pacific Corp. 3. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. 4. - United States Gypsum Co. 5. James Hardie Gypsum 2.02 GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS A. Standard Gypsum Board: ANSI/ASTM C36; 5/8 inch thick, maximum permissible length; ends square cut, tapered edges. B. Fire Rated Gypsum Board: ANSIIASTM C36; fire resistive, moisture resistant type, UL rated; 5/8 inch, maximum permissible length; ends square cut, tapered edges. C. Moisture Resistant Gypsum Board: ANSI/ASTM C630; 5/8 inch thick, maximum permissible length; ends square cut. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/GYPSUM BOARD DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09250-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: ASTM C557. B. Acoustical Sealant: Non -hardening, non -skinning, for use in conjunction with gypsum board, as recommended by Board Manufacturer. C. Corner Beads: GA216; Type CB; electro -galvanized steel. D. Edge Trim: GA216; Type L bead; electro -galvanized steel and Type LC rolled -formed zinc. E. Control Joint: U.S. Gypsum No. 093, roll -formed zinc. F. Joint Materials: ANSI/ASTM C475; reinforcing tape, joint compound, adhesive, water, and fasteners. For coated board and gypsum sheathing, use material recommended by Board Manufacturer. G. Screws: ASTM C1002 for steel drill screws. Type G for fastening to gypsum board, Type S for fastening to light gauge steel framing and Type W for fastening to wood framing. H. Wall Texture: As manufactured by USG or LaHabra Inc., multi-purpose, pre-packaged, non -asbestos type. I. Drywall Primer: 1. Paint material specifically formulated to fill the pores and equalize the suction difference between gypsum board surface paper and the compound used on finished joints, angles, fastener heads and accessories and over skim coatings. 2. Drywall primer which is applied to the finished surface of the work specified in this section shall be provided as specified under Sections 09900 and 09720 as applicable. 3. A good quality, white latex drywall primer formulated with high binder solids, applied undiluted, shall be applied to gypsum board surfaces prior to the application of texture materials. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive Work and opening dimensions are as instructed by the Manufacturer. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate. 3.02 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION A. Install gypsum board in accordance with GA -201 and GA -216, and Manufacturer's instructions as applicable. B. Erect single layer standard gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. C. Erect single layer fire rated gypsum board vertically, with edges and ends occurring over firm bearing. D. Use screws when fastening gypsum board to metal and wood furring or framing E. Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board with sealant. F. Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces as indicated on Drawings and as recommended by Board Manufacturer. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS Ten/GYPSUM BOARD DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09250-2 SASC Ine. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 G. Place corner beads at external corners. Use longest practical length. Place edge trim where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials. 3.03 JOINT TREATMENT A. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes. B. Feather coats onto adjoining surfaces so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch. C. Taping, filling, and sanding is not required at surfaces behind ceramic tile.. 3.04 ACOUSTICAL TREATMENT A. Install acoustical sealant in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. ' B. Install acoustical sealant at gypsum board perimeter at: 1. Metal framing: Two beads. 2. Base layer of double layer applications, if applicable. 3. Face layer. 4. Caulk partition penetrations by conduit, pipe, ductwork, and rough -in boxes. C. Install acoustical sealant where gypsum board joins other walls or surfaces at sound control partitions. 3.05 FINISHING OF GYPSUM BOARD SURFACES A.. Provide finish of gypsum board surfaces in accordance with the Gypsum Association "Recommended Specification: Levels of Gypsum Board Finish" as follows as noted on Room Finish Schedule: 1. Level 0 (Temporary Construction): No taping, finishing, or accessories required. 2. Level 1 (Fire Taping at plenum areas above ceiling, in attics, in areas where the assembly will be concealed or in building service corridors and other areas not normally open to public view): a. Joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound. b. Surface shall be free of excess joint compound. C. Tool marks and ridges are acceptable. 3. Level 2 (Water resistant gypsum backing for tile): a. Joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and wiped with a joint knife leaving a thin coating joint compound over joints and interior angles. b. Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with a coat of joint compound. C. Surface shall be free of excess joint compound. d. Tool marks and ridges are acceptable. e. Joint compound applied over the body of the tape at the time of tape embedment shall be considered a separate coat of joint compound and shall satisfy the conditions of this level. 4. Level 3 (Appearance areas to receive heavy or medium texture (spray or hand applied) finishes before final painting, or where heavy grade wallcoverings are to be applied as final decoration. This level of finish is not to be used where smooth painted surface or light to medium wallcoverings are to be applied.): a. Joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and one additional coat of joint compound applied over joints and interior angles. b. Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with 2 separate coats of joint compound. C. Joint compound shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. d. Surface to be coated with Drywall Primer as specified herein prior to application of texture. e. Untextured surfaces to be coated with Drywall Primer prior to application of final finishes as specified in Sections 09900 and 09720, as applicable. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/GYPSUM BOARD DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09250-3 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 5. Level 4 (Appearance areas to receive flat paints, light texture, or where backed wallcoverings are to be applied. This level of finish is not to be used where gloss, semi -gloss and enamel paints are to be applied.): a. Joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and 2 separate coats of joint compound applied over flat joints and one separate coat of joint compound applied over interior angles. b. Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with 3 separate coats of joint compound.. C. Joint compound shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. d. Surface to be coated with Drywall Primer as specified herein prior to application of texture. e. Untextured surfaces to be coated with Drywall Primer prior to application of final finishes as specified in Sections 09900 and 09720, as applicable. 6. Level 5 (Appearance areas to receive gloss, semi -gloss, enamel, or nontextured flat paints or where severe lighting conditions occur.): a. Joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and 2 separate coats of joint compound applied over flat joints and one separate coat applied over interior angles. b. Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with 3 separate coats of joint compound. C. A thin skim coat of joint compound, or a material manufactured especially for this purpose, shall be applied to the entire surface to fill imperfections in the joint work, smooth the paper texture and provide a uniform surface for decorating. Excess compound shall be immediately sheared off, leaving a film of skim coating compound completely covering the paper. d. The surface shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. e. Surface to be coated with Drywall Primer as specified herein prior to application of texture. e. Untextured surfaces to be coated with Drywall Primer prior to application of final finishes as specified in Sections 09900 and 09720, as applicable. B. Surfaces shall be free of dust, dirt and oil and shall received Drywall Primer before application of texture or skim coat as required by the manufacturer of the texture or skim coat materials. C. Textured Finish: Produce textured finish to match approved sample, types as indicated below. 1. Smooth. 2. Skip Trowel. 3.06 CLEANING A. After completion of wallboard installation, taping and texturing, remove rubbish, excess material and equipment from building and job site, leaving floors and other surfaces clean. B. Remove overspray from adjoining construction. C. During the course of the Work and on completion of the Work, remove excess materials, equipment and debris and dispose of away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Protect Work from damage until acceptance. B. Repair or replace damaged Work. END OF SECTION DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/GYPSUM BOARD DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09250-4 1 1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS 1 1 1.02 1 1 1 n 1.03 1.04 GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 SECTION 09310 CERAMIC TILE A. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's data for tile and accessory materials, including recommended procedures for mixing materials and setting tile. B. Samples: Submit samples of each type of ceramic the required, marked with Manufacturer's name and location where tile is to be installed. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI A-108 Series and the TCA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Tile shall bear the TCA grade seal. B. Pre -Installation Meeting: Prior to commencing the work of this Section, schedule and attend a meeting at the job site to discuss conformance with Project requirements. C. Blending:. 1. Tile manufacturer to blend tile at the factory. 2. Provide additional blending at the job site as needed to obtain the Architect's approval. D. Mock-ups: Provide job site mock-ups which will be used as data for comparison with the remainder of the work of this Section for the purposes of acceptance or rejection. E. Regulatory Requirements: Provide floor tiles with coefficient of friction in accordance with ADA guidelines. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver manufactured materials in original, unbroken containers bearing name of Manufacturer, brand and grade seals. Keep materials dry, clean and protected against deterioration. MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: Furnish one (1) square foot of tile for each 100 square feet of each color and size of tile and grouting materials used in the Project. If less than 100 square feet is installed, provide a minimum of one square foot of extra stock. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Furnish products of one of the following Manufacturers, subject to compliance with Specification requirements. •1. American Olean Tile Company 2. Dal -Tile Corporation 3. Emser International 4. Monarch Tile Manufacturing, Inc. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/CERAMIC TILE DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09310-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 2.02 TILE MATERIALS A. General: 1. Tile shall be domestic manufacture, Standard Grade, meeting ANSI A137.1. 2. Colors and Patterns: Colors and patterns of tile shall be as indicated on Drawings. B. Floor Tiles: 1. Unglazed ceramic mosaics, cushion edge, modular type, dust pressed, machine made, standard quality tiles. 2. Floor tiles shall be as indicated on Drawings. 3. Cove Base shall be as indicated on Drawings. C. Wall Tiles: 1. Glazed, dust pressed, machine made, white body, square edge, standard quality tiles. 2. Colors: Selected from Manufacturer's standard matte, glazed or semi -gloss. 3. Size: As indicated on Drawings. 4. Cove Base shall be as indicated on Drawings.. D. Trim Shapes: Provide Manufacturer's full selection of trim shapes as required 1. Provide all bases, caps, stops, returns, trimmers, and other shapes indicated or required to produce a completely finished installation. 2. Except as may be shown otherwise on the Drawings, provide color and finish matching the adjacent tile. 2.03 MORTARS A. ' Mortar Bed for Mud Set Method: 1. Portland cement: ASTM C150, Type 1. 2. Sand: ASTM C144. 3. Mortar: One part Portland cement to 6 parts damp sand by volume. B. Thin Set Installation: Dry -Set per ANSI A118.1, or latex-portland cement mortar per ANSI A118.4, by an approved Manufacturer and acceptable with TCA Method W244. C. Grout: 1. Latex grout: Conforming to ANSI 118.6 and the TCA Handbook, by an approved Manufacturer. Grout shall be sealed. 2. Epoxy grout: Chemical -resistant per ANSI 118.3, water -cleanable during installation, by an approved Manufacturer. 3. Colors shall be as selected by Architect from Manufacturer's standard colors. D. Thresholds: Marble Institute of America, Class A, color selected by the Architect from standard colors of the approved manufacturer, shaped to provide a comfortable transition between tile and other floor finishes, with smooth matte surface finish and in the dimensions and thicknesses shown on the Drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental conditions in writing. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. B. Coordinate with other Work which affects, connects with or is concealed by this Work. Before proceeding, make certain required inspections have been made. C. Where a Portland cement mortar setting will be installed, do not commence installation of the setting bed until substrata are within the following tolerances: DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/CERAMIC TILE DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09310-2 SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG 11 ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 D. Where tile units will be thin -set directly to the substrata, do not commence installation of the tile units until substrata are within the following tolerances: 1. Horizontal surfaces: Level within 1/8 inch in ten feet in all directions; 2. Vertical surfaces: Level within 1/8 inch in eight feet in all directions. E. Conditions of Surfaces to Receive.Tile: 1. Verify that surfaces to receive mortar setting bed and tile are firm, dry clean, and free from oily or waxy films and curing compounds. 2. Verify that grounds, anchors, plugs, recess frames, bucks, electrical work, mechanical work, and similar items in or behind the tile have been installed before proceeding with installation of mortar bed or tile. 3. If the concrete substrate has a hard steel trowel finish or if curing compounds are 1 used, then the concrete must be heavily scarified. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Lay out Work so that no tile of less than half size occurs. 1. For heights stated in feet and inches, maintain full courses to produce nearest attainable heights without cutting tile. 2. Align joints in wall tile vertically and horizontally except where other patterns are shown or specified. Align joints in walls to conform to patterns selected. 3. Align joints in floor tile at right angles to each other and straight with walls and conform to patterns selected or indicated. B. Obtain exact locations of expansion joints and accessories before installing tile. C. Locate accessories in tile walls as indicated on Drawings or as directed by Architect. Where the size of accessory does not line up with the jointing pattern of adjacent tile, the cutting of tile and arrangement of joints around the accessories shall be as directed by Architect. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General Requirements for Ceramic Tile Installation: 1. Install moisture resistant gypsum board in showers and other wet areas as indicated on Drawings in accordance with Manufacturer's directions. 2. Where two units abut, leave a gap from 1/8 to 3/16 inch wide (or as recommended by the manufacturer), fill solid with mortar, and cover with the fiberglass tape embedded in a skim coat of mortar. 3. Install ceramic tile using latex -Portland cement mortar method and cement mortar bonded method as required for various locations. 4. Install tile in accordance with ANSI Specifications 108.1 through A118.1 and Manufacturer's recommendations. Masonry walls to receive tile shall have a leveling coat of mortar applied prior to installation of tile. 5. Cut and drill neatly as required without marring tile. Rub smooth necessary cuts with a fine stone. Set cut edge against fixture, cabinet or other tile with joint at least 1/16 -inch wide. B. Allowable Variations in Finished Work: Do not exceed the following deviations from level and plumb, and from elevations, locations, slopes and alignments shown: 1. Horizontal surfaces: 1/8 inch in ten feet in all directions; 2. Vertical surfaces: 1/8 inch in eight feet in all directions. C. Mortar Bed Set: 1. Install using TCA Method for substrate condition and type for mortar bed setting. 2. Install mortar bed with depth of bed as indicated on the Drawings. D. Thin Set: Install tile and thresholds using TCA Method for substrate condition and type for latex or dry -set mortar bed. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/CERAMIC TILE 1 DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09310-3 SASC Inc. Phoenix •Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 E. Grout: 1. Mix grout to a creamy consistency. 2. Thoroughly force into points, fill entire depth. 3. Finished surface of joints shall be uniformly smooth, and continuously level with edges of tile. 4. Mix only as much grout as can be used in one hour. 3.04 CURING A. Damp cure all the installations, including Portland cement grouts, for 72 hours minimum. 1. Cover with clean non -staining 40 -pound Kraft paper. 2. Do not use polyethylene sheets directly over tile on horizontal surfaces. 3. Keep all traffic off newly installed floors for at least 72 hours. Protection may be necessary. 3.05 CLEANING A. Wipe surfaces clean after grouting, remove traces of mortar and grout. Do not use acid solution for cleaning glazed tile. B. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Close spaces to traffic or other Work until tile is firmly set. Protect from damage until acceptance. Repair damaged Work at no additional cost to Owner. B. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from using newly tiled floors for at least 7 days. Place large, flat boards in walkways and wheelways where use of newly tiled floor is unavoidable. END OF SECTION DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/CERAMIC TILE DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09310-4 I I 11 I I SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 SECTION 09330 QUARRY TILE PART GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's data for tile and accessory materials, including recommended procedures for mixing materials and setting tile. B. Samples: Submit samples of each type of quarry tile required, marked with Manufacturer's name and location where tile is to be installed. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI A-108 Series and the TCA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Tile shall bear the TCA grade seal. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver manufactured materials in original, unbroken containers bearing name of Manufacturer, brand and grade seals. Keep materials dry, clean and protected against deterioration. 1.04 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: Furnish one (1) square foot of tile for each 100 square feet of each color and size of tile and grouting materials used in the Project. If less than 100 square feet is installed, provide a minimum of one square foot of extra stock. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Furnish products of one of the following Manufacturers, subject to compliance with Specification requirements. 1. American Olean Tile Company 2. Dal -Tile Corporation 3. Summitville 4. Monarch Tile Manufacturing, Inc. 2.02 MATERIALS A. General: 1. Tile shall be domestic manufacture, Standard Grade, meeting ANSI A137.1. 2. Colors and Patterns: Colors and patterns of tile as selected by Architect. B. Quarry Tiles: 1. Abrasive surface square edge, extruded. 2. Floor tiles shall be 6 in. x 6 in. x 1/2 inch thick or as noted on Drawings. 3. Cove Base: Round top, unless noted otherwise on Drawings. C. Trim Shapes: Provide Manufacturer's full selection of trim shapes as required, of same color as tile, unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. D. Mortar Bed Installation: 1. Portland cement: ASTM C150, Type 1. 2. Sand: ASTM C144. 3. Mortar: One part Portland cement to 6 parts damp sand by volume. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/QUARRY TILE DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09330-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG , ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 E. Grout: , 1. Epoxy grout: Chemical -resistant per ANSI 118.3, water -cleanable during installation, by an approved Manufacturer. 2. Color shall be gray as selected by Architect. F. Sealant: Silicone type specified in Section 07900. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrate to receive Work and report detrimental conditions in writing. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. , B. Coordinate with other Work which affects, connects with or is concealed by this Work. Before proceeding, make certain required inspections have been made. , 3.02 PREPARATION A. Lay out Work so that no the of less than half size occurs. B. Align joints in floor tile at right angles to each other and straight with walls and conform to patterns selected or indicated. C. Obtain exact locations of expansion joints and accessories before installing tile. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General Requirements for Quarry Tile Installation: 1. Install tile using cement mortar bonded method. 2. Install tile in accordance with ANSI Specifications A108.1 through A118.1 and Manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Cut and drill neatly as required without marring tile. Rub smooth necessary cuts with a fine stone. Set cut edge against fixture, cabinet or other the with joint at least 1/16 -inch wide. B. Mortar Bed Set: 1. Install tile using TCA Method for substrate condition and type for mortar bed setting. 2. Install mortar bed with depth of bed as indicated on the Drawings. C. Grout: 1. Mix to a creamy consistency. 2. Thoroughly force into joints, fill entire depth. 3. Finished surface of joints shall be uniformly smooth, and continuously level with edges of tile. 4. Mix only as much grout as can be used in one hour. 3.04 CLEANING A. Wipe surfaces clean after grouting, remove traces of mortar and grout. Do not use acid solution for cleaning glazed tile. B. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Close spaces to traffic or other Work until tile is firmly set. Protect from damage until acceptance. Repair damaged Work at no additional cost to Owner. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS rm/QUARRY TILE DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09330-2 f SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 B. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from using newly tiled floors for at least 7 days. Place large, flat boards in walkways and wheelways where use of newly tiled floor is unavoidable. DFD ARCHITECTURE DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 END OF SECTION C -SPECS TM/QUARRY TILE SECTION 09330-3 1 SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 SECTION 09510 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit Drawings showing complete layout of systems including attachments, intersections of members and edge conditions. B. Product Data: Provide data on metal grid system components and acoustical units. C. Samples: 1. Submit 2 samples of each type of unit specified, including color selection when applicable. 2. Submit samples of Manufacturer's full color selection for selection by Architect. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: .Installer shall be approved by Manufacturer of material or system. B. Standards: Comply with ASTM C635, "Standard Specification for Acoustical Tile and Lay -In Panel Ceilings" and ASTM C636, "Recommended Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -In Panels." 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in Manufacturer's original unopened packaging with labels intact. Protect finished surfaces with removable wrapping or coating which will not bond when exposed to sunlight. B. Storage: Adequately protect against damage while stored at the site. C. Handling: Comply with Manufacturer's instructions. 1.04 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: Provide an additional 5 percent of each type of acoustical unit installed, in unopened labeled cartons, to the Owner at completion of Work, for his maintenance use, at no additional cost. Provide, at minimum, one full carton of each type of acoustical unit. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Furnish products of the following Manufacturers, except as approved otherwise by the Architect, subject to compliance with Specification requirements. 1. Armstrong World Industries 2. Chicago Metallic Corporation (for suspension system) 3. USG Interiors, Inc. 4. Celotex Building Products Division 2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Ceiling Suspension System: Intermediate duty with components formed from commercial quality cold rolled steel electro -zinc coated and pre -painted white enamel finish, unless noted otherwise. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09510-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 B. Main -Runners: Minimum of 1-1/2 inch in height with an exposed capped face of 15/16 inch in width, nominally 12 feet long. C. Cross -Tees: Minimum of 1-1/4 inch in height with an exposed capped face of 15/16 inch in width. D. Hanger Wire: Galvanized steel conforming to Federal Specification FF-QQ-W-461, Finish 5, Class 1 annealed, and not less than 12 gage. E. Finish: Exposed faces of main and cross runners shall be a white baked enamel paint finish. F. Suspension system shall support the ceiling system specified with a maximum deflection of 1/360 of the span. G. Wall Moldings: 24 MSG painted steel with a minimum one inch wide lower flange, finish and configuration to match grid. 2.03 CEILING PANELS A. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: 1. Size: 24 inch x 24 inch x 5/8 inch and 24 inch x 48 inch x 5/8 inch at locations as indicated on Drawings.. 2. Surface Finish: Factory applied, washable, white vinyl latex paint finish. 3. Light reflectance of LR -1 (over 75 percent), per Fed. Spec. SS -S-1 18B and ASTM E 1264. 4. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A per ASTM E1264 and Fed. Spec. SS- S -1188, Flame Spread 25 or under, per ASTM E-84 (UL Label). 5. Edge Detail: Square cut. B. Gypsum Core Lay -in Panels: 1. Size: 24inch x 48 inch x 1/2 inch. 2. Surface Finish: White vinyl facing, stipple pattern, wrapped at edges. 3. Light Reflectance: LRA (over 75 percent). 4. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A per ASTM E1264 and Fed. Spec. SS- S -118B, Flame Spread 25 or under, per ASTM E84 (UL Label). 5. Edge: Square. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Acoustical Batt Insulation: Specified in Section 09820. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental conditions in writing, with a copy to Architect. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. B. Verify, before proceeding with this Work, that required inspections of existing conditions have been completed. 3.02 INSTALLATION - SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Install suspension system in accordance the following: 1. ASTM C636 and as supplemented in this Section. 2. CISCA's Recommendations for Acoustical Ceilings: Comply with CISCA's "Recommendations for Direct -Hung Acoustical tile and Lay -in Panel Ceilings - Seismic Zones 34" 3. U.B.C. "Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and for Lay -in Panel Ceilings": U.B.C. Standard 24-2. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS DFD PROJECT NO. 982151SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09510-2 1 . SASC Inc.' Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 ' B. Install system capable of supporting imposed loads to a deflection of 1/360 maximum. C. Locate system on room axis according to reflected ceiling plan. D. Install after major above -ceiling Work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other Work. E. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members. F. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance. G. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability. Support fixture loads by supplementary hangers ' located within 6 inches of each corner; or support components independently. H. Do not eccentrically load system, or produce rotation of runners. I. Install edge molding at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces, using longest practical lengths. Miter corners. Provide edge moldings at junctions with other interruptions. J. Form expansion joints as detailed. Form to accommodate plus or minus 1 inch K. movement. Maintain visual closure. Install light fixtures protection over in accordance with UL assembly requirements. 3.03 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL LAY -IN UNITS A. Install in acoustical units accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. B. Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to ' appearance and function. C. Install units after above -ceiling Work is complete. D. Install acoustical units level in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp and dents. - E. Cut panels to fit irregular grid and perimeter edge trim. Field rabbett panel edge. Double cut and field paint exposed edges of tegular units. F. Where round obstructions occur, provide preformed closers to match edge molding. 3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/4 inch in 10 feet. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Remove damaged or soiled panels and replace with new units, as directed by Architect. 3.06 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. END OF SECTION DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09510-3 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 SECTION 09570 ' STONE COUNTERTOPS DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/STONE COUNTERTOPS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09570-1 PART GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Stone construction as shown on the Drawings and as follows: 1 1. Stone Countertops. 1.02 SUBMITTALS ' A. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout, pertinent dimensions, anchorages, reinforcement, and jointing methods. B. Samples: Submit samples to the Architect for review prior to constructing job -site mock- ' ups, delivering materials to the site or commencing the work in this Section in accordance — with Section 01300. 1. Stone Samples: Provide 2 samples of stone, 8 inches square, to be used on the Project showing range of texture and/or color variations of the exposed surfaces. ' Units provided to the Project shall match these samples. C. Stone Maintenance: Submit stone supplier's literature or instructions for preventive care and maintenance measures pertinent to the specific stone finishes for normal maintenance and special cleaning procedures. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Subcontractor's Qualifications: The firm executing the work under this Section shall have five (5) years experience in work of similar scope and nature to that specified. 1 B. Stone shall be sound, durable and free of visible defects which will impair the strength, durability or appearance; or concentrations of material that will cause objectionable staining or weakening under normal environments of use. ' C. All stone shall be obtained from a single quarry having adequate capacity and facilities to meet the specified requirements, and by a firm equipped to process the material promptly _ and in accordance with the Specifications. The Owner and/or Architect reserve the right to approve the material supplier for stone prior to award of Contract. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING. A. Transport and store stone on a stable bed and with sufficient battens, bracing and supports to prevent overstressing by vibration or impact loading. B. Deliver other materials (except bulk materials) in manufacturer's unopened containers fully identified with manufacturer's name, trade name, type, class, grade and color. C. Storage of materials and equipment: Store materials and equipment in unopened containers. Store off ground and under cover, protected from damage. 1.05 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Hot Weather Requirements: 1. When the ambient air temperature exceeds 100 degrees F. or when the ambient air temperature exceeds 90 degrees F. and the wind velocity is greater than 8 mph, the Masonry Contractor shall implement hot weather protection procedures as submitted to the Architect. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/STONE COUNTERTOPS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09570-1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 STONE MATERIALS A. Stone Countertops: 1. Type: Travertine slab, Sierrastone as distributed by Arizona Tile -Architectural Products Group. No substitutions will be permitted 2. Thickness: 3/4 inch. 3. Finish: Polished. 4. Grout: as selected by Architect. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Setting Shims: Resilient, non -staining plastic. B. Stone Setting Adhesive: Water -cleanable epoxy adhesive complying with ANSI A118.3. C. Stone Seam Adhesive: "Akemi'' 2 -part, polyester -resin stone adhesive as manufactured by Wood and Stone, Inc. Manassas, VA. Color to match stone. D. Countertop Sealant: Clear silicone sealant complying with Section 07900. 2.03 STONE FABRICATION A. Fabricate stonework in sizes and shapes required to comply with requirements indicated, including details on Drawings and final shop drawings. B. Cut and drill sinkages and holes in stones for anchors, fasteners, fixtures, supports and lifting devices as indicated or needed to set stonework securely in place; shape beds to fit supports. C. Cut stones to produce pieces of thickness, size and shape indicated or required and within fabrication tolerances recommended by applicable stone association; or, if none, stone source for faces, edges, beds and backs. 1. Thickness: In accordance with Drawings. 2. Control depth of stones and back -check to maintain minimum clearances indicated between backs of stones and surfaces or projections of structural members, fireproofing, back-up walls and other work behind stones. 3. Dress joints (bed and vertical) straight and at 90 degree angle to face, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Cut stones to produce joints of uniform width and in locations indicated. a. Joint width: See Drawings. 5. Clean sawn backs of stones to remove rust stains and free iron particles. D. Finish exposed faces and edges of stones to comply with requirements indicated for finish under each type and application of stone required and to match approved samples. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/STONE COUNTERTOPS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09570-2 r SASC Inc. Phoenix - Ias Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 B. Cold Weather Requirements: 1. Fully protect stone against freezing by a weather -tight covering which shall also prevent accumulation of ice. 2. Do not lay stone when the temperature of the surrounding atmosphere is below 40 degrees F. or is.likely to fall below 40 degrees F. in the 24 hour period after laying, unless adequate protection is provided. , C. Field Measurements: 1. Verify measurements shown on Drawings by taking field measurements. 2. Proper fit and attachment of stone is required. 1.06 SCHEDULING AND SEQUENCING A. Coordination: Coordinate with other work relating to stone installation for placing required blocking, backing, furring, conduits and other items. , PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 STONE MATERIALS A. Stone Countertops: 1. Type: Travertine slab, Sierrastone as distributed by Arizona Tile -Architectural Products Group. No substitutions will be permitted 2. Thickness: 3/4 inch. 3. Finish: Polished. 4. Grout: as selected by Architect. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Setting Shims: Resilient, non -staining plastic. B. Stone Setting Adhesive: Water -cleanable epoxy adhesive complying with ANSI A118.3. C. Stone Seam Adhesive: "Akemi'' 2 -part, polyester -resin stone adhesive as manufactured by Wood and Stone, Inc. Manassas, VA. Color to match stone. D. Countertop Sealant: Clear silicone sealant complying with Section 07900. 2.03 STONE FABRICATION A. Fabricate stonework in sizes and shapes required to comply with requirements indicated, including details on Drawings and final shop drawings. B. Cut and drill sinkages and holes in stones for anchors, fasteners, fixtures, supports and lifting devices as indicated or needed to set stonework securely in place; shape beds to fit supports. C. Cut stones to produce pieces of thickness, size and shape indicated or required and within fabrication tolerances recommended by applicable stone association; or, if none, stone source for faces, edges, beds and backs. 1. Thickness: In accordance with Drawings. 2. Control depth of stones and back -check to maintain minimum clearances indicated between backs of stones and surfaces or projections of structural members, fireproofing, back-up walls and other work behind stones. 3. Dress joints (bed and vertical) straight and at 90 degree angle to face, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Cut stones to produce joints of uniform width and in locations indicated. a. Joint width: See Drawings. 5. Clean sawn backs of stones to remove rust stains and free iron particles. D. Finish exposed faces and edges of stones to comply with requirements indicated for finish under each type and application of stone required and to match approved samples. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/STONE COUNTERTOPS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09570-2 17 SASC Inc. Phoenix • las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 PART 3 EXECUTION ' 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: 1. Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental conditions in writing to Architect. 2. Failure to observe this requirement constitutes a waiver to subsequent claims to the contrary and holds Contractor responsible for correction(s) Architect may require. 3. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. 4. Verify, before proceeding with this Work, that required inspections of existing conditions have been completed. ' 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordinate erection of stone with work of other trades that adjoin or tie into stone work. B. Clean stone surfaces which have become soiled or stained prior to setting to remove soil, stains and foreign materials. Clean by thoroughly scrubbing stones with fiber brushes followed by thorough drenching with clear water. Use only mild cleaning compounds that ' contain no caustic or harsh filler or abrasive. 3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Workmanship: Provide skilled stone fitters at the site to do the necessary field cutting as the stone is set. B. Adjusting Units: 1. Units shall be adjusted to be level, plumb and straightened into final position while the adhesive is still soft and plastic enough to ensure a good bond. 2. Avoid over -plumbing and pounding of the corners and jambs to fit units after they are set in position. C. Do not lay chipped, cracked or otherwise defective units where exposed to view. Remove and replace units that chipped, cracked, broken, or otherwise defective whether before or after setting. D. Openings: Provide openings in stone construction where required or indicated. E. Stone Cutting: When required, exposed units shall be cut with a power driven Carborundum or diamond disc blade saw. When using "wet' cutting methods, clean water shall be used on exposed units. 3.04 INSTALLING STONE COUNTERTOPS ' A. Install stone countertops over plywood subtops or supports with a full spread of water - cleanable epoxy adhesive. B. Bond seams with stone seam adhesive and draw seam tight and level with clamps to assure tight, level seam. Protect area adjacent to seam by masking. C. Install back and end splashes (if any) to wall with water -cleanable epoxy adhesive and to countertop with stone seam adhesive. Protect areas adjacent to seams by masking. D. Apply sealant to joints between countertops and walls to comply with Section 07900. 3.05 TOLERANCES A. Construction Tolerances: Set stones to comply with the following tolerances: 1. Variation from level: For grades indicated for exposed lintels, sills parapets, horizontal grooves and the conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/2 inch in any bay ' or 20 feet maximum, nor 3/4 -inch in 40 feet or more. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/STONE COUNTERTOPS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09570-3 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 3.06 CUTTING AND FITTING A. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting any item not so indicated on Drawings. 3.07 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace stonework of the following description: 1. Broken, chipped, stained or otherwise damaged stones. 2. Defective joints. 3. Stonework not matching approved samples and field -constructed mock-ups. B. Replace in manner which results in stonework showing no evidence of replacement. C. Daily Cleaning: Keep walls clean. Soiled masonry from adhesive spills which will be exposed to view at the completion of the Project shall be cleaned immediately with stiff fiber brushes. D. Do not use wire brushes, acid type cleaning agents, cleaning compounds with caustic or harsh fillers, or other materials or methods which could damage stone. E. Clean up debris, refuse and surplus material and remove from premises in accordance with Section 01500. 3.08 PROTECTION A. Furnish temporary protection for exposed stone corners subject to injury. B. Protect finished work against freezing for a period. of not less than 48 hours by means of enclosures, artificial heat, or such other protective methods as may be required. END OF SECTION DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/STONE COUNTERTOPS ' DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09570-4 I SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas 1 _ GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 SECTION 09625 WOOD FLOORING 1 PART GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, design data and installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings showing layout, dimensions and construction details. ' C. Samples: Submit samples showing complete floor system. ' D. Certificates: Submit manufacturer certification that products furnished meet specification requirements. 1.02. QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Qualifications: Wood floor installer to be approved by the floor system manufacturer. All flooring system components to be furnished by the system manufacturer. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original unopened packaging with labels intact. Protect finished surfaces with removable wrapping or coating which will not bond when exposed to sunlight. B. Store flooring in well ventilated, dry area with temperature not lower than 65 degrees F., not in contact with masonry. Acclimate wood flooring to building conditions minimum of seven days. Install wood flooring with a moisture content not exceeding 8 percent (except in areas of constant high humidity where the moisture content of the flooring shall not exceed 10 percent). C. Handling: Comply with manufacturer's instructions. ' 1.04 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS , A. Environmental Requirements: The subfloors shall be dry, free of foreign materials, and broom clean. Moderate room temperature of 65 degrees F. or more shall be maintained a week preceding and throughout the duration of the work. Humidity conditions within the building shall approximate the humidity conditions which will prevail when the building is occupied. ' B. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions shown on Drawings by taking field measurements; proper fit and attachment of parts is required. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 FLOORING MATERIALS A. Flooring: 1. Species: Douglas Fir, No. 1 grade. 2. Thickness: 2 inches. 3. Face Width: 6 inches. ' 4. Matching: Tongue and Groove, and end matched DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ WOOD FLOORING ' DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09625-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 B. Plywood: Minimum 5/8 inch thickness, Douglas Fir, C -D Plugged, exterior glue and shall be stamped with grade trademark of the American Plywood Association and shall meet the requirements of the latest edition of U.S. Product Standard PS -1 for softwood plywood. 1 1 C. Wood Sleepers: Standard grade, 48 inches long, kiln dried Douglas Fir, preservative , treated in accordance with Section 06100. 1. Size: Nominal 2 inches x 2 inches. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Vapor Barrier: 6 mil polyethylene. B. Fasteners: Cleats, nails or staples furnished by floor system manufacturer. C. Wall base: Nominal 1 inch x 3 inch wood base matching species of wood flooring. 2.03 FINISH MATERIALS A. Floor Finish: Two component polyurethane, type recommended by Flooring Manufacturer. B. Lines: Hillyard Inc. Contender. Colors selected by Architect. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental conditions, in writing, with a copy to Architect. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. 1. Concrete Subfloors: Concrete subfloor shall be depressed 1-1/2 inches plus the thickness of the flooring. Slab shall be steel troweled to a true level and finished smooth and straight to where the maximum tolerance from plane is plus or minus 1/8 inch in any 10 foot radius. High spots shall be ground level, and low spots filled in with approved leveling compounds. 2. Work of electrical, masonry, plastering, tile work, overhead mechanical trades and painters shall be completed in wood floor areas. The building shall be dry, openings closed in, and permanent heating and air conditioning installed and operating. 3. Verify that vapor barrier under concrete sub -floor has been installed, if required by flooring manufacturer. B. Coordinate Work with other work which connects with, or is concealed by flooring installation. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: 1. Slab Replacement: If, in the Architect's opinion, the slab is defective and cannot be reasonably corrected, it shall be replaced at Contractor's expense. 2. Slab Corrections: Corrections required to achieve the specified slab planarity shall be made by grinding down the high areas and/or by filling in the low areas with Thoropatch Leveling Compound mixed with Acryl 60 Bonding Liquid as manufactured by Thoro System Products (800/428-6652) or approved equal. 3. Slab Cleanliness: Remove foreign materials from the concrete substrate. Leave the slab thoroughly broom -cleaned prior to the installation of the floor system. B. Place vapor barrier with joints lapped at least 24 inches over the leveled slab. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ WOOD FLOORING DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09625-2 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas ' GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 ' 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install sleepers perpendicular to direction of flooring without anchoring to substrate. Stagger end joints a minimum of 24 inches. Provide a minimum of 3/4 inch expansion space and walls and other obstructions, and at interruptions and terminations of flooring. 1. Space sleepers as indicated on Drawings. B. Fasten plywood to sleepers. C. Wood Strips: Blind nail or staple flooring to plywood substrate 3.04 FLOOR SANDING A. Sand flooring with drum sander, edger, buffer and hand scraper. B. Use coarse, medium and fine grade sandpaper. ' C. After sanding with drum sander, buff entire floor using 100 grit screenback or equal grit sandpaper, with a heavy-duty buffing machine. ' D. E. Vacuum or tack floor before first coat of finish. Floor to have drum a smooth surface without stop marks, gouges, streaks or shiners. 3.05 FINISHING A. Inspect entire area of floor to that the is for ensure surface acceptable finishing, . completely free from sanding dust and perfectly clean. B. Apply seal and finish in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Screenback or steel wood and vacuum or tack between each coat after it dries. 3.06 BASE A. Install base molding and other cover trim indicated for expansion spaces at edges and interruptions of floorings. B. Thresholds: Install threshold plates at transition between wood floor and adjacent floors - as detailed on Drawings. 3:07 CLEANING A. Clean finished flooring per manufacturer's recommendations. B. During the course of the Work and on completion of the Work, remove excess materials, ' equipment and debris and dispose of away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. ' 3.08 PROTECTION A. Follow manufacturer's procedures for protection of flooring during remainder of construction period so that the flooring and finish will be without damage or deterioration at time of acceptance. B. Street shoe traffic shall not be permitted on floor for time period as recommended by the manufacturer. C. Replace damaged flooring items and parts at no cost to Owner. END OF SECTION ' DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ WOOD FLOORING DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09625-3 1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas 1 IPART GENERAL GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 SECTION 09680 CARPET ' A. Carpet Installer Qualifications: 1. Minimum of 5 years commercial installation experience. 2. Review Manufacturer's recommendations and recommend in writing to Architect variations required to assure installation guarantee. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/CARPET ' DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09680-1 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's Specifications and recommended procedures for installing carpet, adhesive and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Submit Drawings indicating seam locations and edging conditions in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations. C. Samples: Submit 12 inch by 12 inch carpet sample and 6 inch sample of edge strip in ' Manufacturer's standard colors. Provide following .information for each carpet sample submitted: 1. Name of Manufacturer. 2. Name/pattern of carpet. ' D. Certification: 1. At least 30 days prior to scheduled installation, submit Manufacturer's anticipated shipping date, including certification that carpet will conform to Specifications and approved samples. 2. Provide certification from manufacturer that carpet will not display or evidence a significant change in color due to exposure to atmospheric contaminants (Ozone or Oxides of Nitrogen) for 5 years. ' E. Test Reports: Submit reports for flammability, smoke density and static propensity from independent laboratory no more than 2 years old. F. Quality Control Submittals: ' 1. Manufacturer shall furnish roll numbers and other information which will enable identification of certified carpet. Inspect carpet after manufacture for manufacturing defects. 2. Certificates: Certification that submitted samples conform with Specification ' requirements. - G. Environmental Position: 1. Carpet manufacturer to submit: a. Written statement of its Environmental Position and provide ' documentation of on-going recycling programs, energy conservation programs, reclamation of raw materials and recyclable materials, and Environmental Stewardship programs at local manufacturing site locations. ' b. Written documentation that a fully established reclamation program, including examples of the mechanics of the program are in place at the time of bid. H. Contract Closeout Submittals: Submit the following in accordance with Section 01770: 1. Maintenance: Submit 2 copies of Manufacturer's instructions for carpet care and cleaning. Instructions shall include shampooing and removal of stains and burns. ' 2. Warranty. Submit manufacturer's warranty. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Carpet Installer Qualifications: 1. Minimum of 5 years commercial installation experience. 2. Review Manufacturer's recommendations and recommend in writing to Architect variations required to assure installation guarantee. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/CARPET ' DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09680-1 A. General: Special Project Warranty and Manufacturer's Warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of Contract Documents. B. Special Project Warranty: Provide special project warranty, signed by Contractor, Installer, and Manufacturer (Carpet Mill) agreeing to repair or replace defective materials and workmanship, during 10 year warranty period following Substantial Completion. Special project warranty includes, but is not limited to, following: 1. Delamination of adhered carpet from substrate, cushion from substrate, or carpet from cushion. 2. Edge raveling, snags, or runs. 3. Permanent indentation of carpet cushion. C. Manufacturer's Warranty: In addition to Special Project Warranty, provide manufacturer's Limited 10 Year Wear Warranty on form furnished following this section or on manufacturer's standard form of similar content subject to Architect's approval. Manufacturer's warranty shall include dimensional stability, wear and static resistance. 1.06 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: Carpet scraps and trimmings more than 3 feet in one dimension shall be neatly packaged in small quantities and delivered to Owner at Project Closeout. Include as overage one piece of carpet of each color not less than 4 square yards. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Institutional Carpet (Glue -Down): 1. Carpet: Last Shot!, Style No 706 as manufactured by Design Solutions 2. Yarn Type: 100% Zeftron BCF Nylon 3. Ply: 2 4. Dye Method: 75% Solution Dyed; 25% Warp Dyed 5. Pile Height Finished: 12/32. 6. Pile Weight Finished: 55 oz./sq. yd. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS rm/CARPET DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09680-2 ' ' SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 ' B. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Flammability: Passes (CPSC 16 CFR, Part 1630). 2. Flame Spread: Critical Radiant Flux Class I, not less than 0.45 Watts per cm2 (NFPA 253 or ASTM E-648, in direct glue -down application). 3. Optical Smoke Density Requirements (ASTM 662-79): Less than 450 (NBS Smoke Density Chamber - NFPA-258). 4. Static Propensity: Under 3.0 KV (AATCC-134). 5. Colorfastness: Carpet shall not display or evidence a significant change in color due to exposure to atmospheric contaminants (Ozone or Oxides of Nitrogen) for 5 years. ' 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in Manufacturer's original unopened ' packaging with each roll having register number tags attached or register identification stenciled on mill wrappings and intact. B. Storage and Protection: Store in well ventilated spaces protected from damage, dirt, ' stains, moisture and other adverse conditions. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify installation dimensions by making field measurements. 1.05 WARRANTY A. General: Special Project Warranty and Manufacturer's Warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of Contract Documents. B. Special Project Warranty: Provide special project warranty, signed by Contractor, Installer, and Manufacturer (Carpet Mill) agreeing to repair or replace defective materials and workmanship, during 10 year warranty period following Substantial Completion. Special project warranty includes, but is not limited to, following: 1. Delamination of adhered carpet from substrate, cushion from substrate, or carpet from cushion. 2. Edge raveling, snags, or runs. 3. Permanent indentation of carpet cushion. C. Manufacturer's Warranty: In addition to Special Project Warranty, provide manufacturer's Limited 10 Year Wear Warranty on form furnished following this section or on manufacturer's standard form of similar content subject to Architect's approval. Manufacturer's warranty shall include dimensional stability, wear and static resistance. 1.06 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: Carpet scraps and trimmings more than 3 feet in one dimension shall be neatly packaged in small quantities and delivered to Owner at Project Closeout. Include as overage one piece of carpet of each color not less than 4 square yards. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Institutional Carpet (Glue -Down): 1. Carpet: Last Shot!, Style No 706 as manufactured by Design Solutions 2. Yarn Type: 100% Zeftron BCF Nylon 3. Ply: 2 4. Dye Method: 75% Solution Dyed; 25% Warp Dyed 5. Pile Height Finished: 12/32. 6. Pile Weight Finished: 55 oz./sq. yd. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS rm/CARPET DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09680-2 ' P, SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas r GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 ' PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental conditions in writing to Architect. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. 1. Test concrete for excessive moisture content or hydro -static moisture content. ' Excessive moisture is defined as no more than 2.5 pounds per 1000 square feet in 24 hours. 2. Test concrete for acidity/alkalinity which shall test in the 6.0 to 8.0 range. 3. Frequency of tests shall comply with manufacturer's guidelines. ' B. Coordination: Coordinate with other Work which affects, connects with, or will be concealed by this Work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: 1. Inspect surfaces to receive carpet, make tests recommended by Carpet Manufacturer, take necessary corrective action. 2. Grind ridges in concrete floors level and smooth. 3. Fill cracks, construction joints and other surface imperfections with latex underlayment compound troweled level with adjacent surfaces. ' 4. Telegraphing of irregularities in subfloor shall be sufficient cause for rejection. 5. Remove foreign and incompatible materials and vacuum clean surfaces immediately prior to installation. 6. Contractor shall be provide written moisture and alkali test results pertaining to the concrete slab prior to installation. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/CARPET DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09680-3 7. Treatments: Permanent Anti -Stat, Stain Resist 8. Finish Description: Patterned Cut Pile. 9. D.C.S. TrafiClas Rating: Spike Resistant. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Underlayment: Portland cement -latex concrete floor filler for leveling concrete floor as recommended by Carpet Manufacturer. B. Floor Primer: Manufacturer's approved floor primer applied to all areas that are to receive glue -down carpeting. ' C. Adhesive: Acceptable to carpet manufacturer, low -odor adhesive without solvent, VOC compliant. 1. Ad-vanced Air Tech Adhesives as manufactured by Advanced Adhesive Technology Inc., Dalton, GA (800) 228-4583. 2. Carpet Adhesive as manufactured by Capitol Adhesives, Dalton, GA (800) 831- 8381. 3. Chapco Safe -Set as manufactured by Chicago Adhesive Products Co., Chicago, IL (800) 621-02200. 4. Earthbond 6900, 7000 or 7500 (as applicable) as manufactured by Roberts Consolidated Industries, Inc., City of Industry, CA (818) 369-7311. 5. Envirotec Healthguard Adhesives as manufactured by W.F. Taylor Co., Fontana, CA (800) 397-4583. 6. XL Adhesives as manufactured by XL Corporation, Calhoun, GA (800) 367- 4583. D. Edge Strip: Metal or vinyl reducer strip for areas, doorways and other areas where edge of carpet is exposed. ' E. Rubber Base: See Section 09652. Base shall be installed after carpet. ' PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental conditions in writing to Architect. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. 1. Test concrete for excessive moisture content or hydro -static moisture content. ' Excessive moisture is defined as no more than 2.5 pounds per 1000 square feet in 24 hours. 2. Test concrete for acidity/alkalinity which shall test in the 6.0 to 8.0 range. 3. Frequency of tests shall comply with manufacturer's guidelines. ' B. Coordination: Coordinate with other Work which affects, connects with, or will be concealed by this Work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: 1. Inspect surfaces to receive carpet, make tests recommended by Carpet Manufacturer, take necessary corrective action. 2. Grind ridges in concrete floors level and smooth. 3. Fill cracks, construction joints and other surface imperfections with latex underlayment compound troweled level with adjacent surfaces. ' 4. Telegraphing of irregularities in subfloor shall be sufficient cause for rejection. 5. Remove foreign and incompatible materials and vacuum clean surfaces immediately prior to installation. 6. Contractor shall be provide written moisture and alkali test results pertaining to the concrete slab prior to installation. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/CARPET DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09680-3 SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 3.03 INSTALLATION - GLUE -DOWN A. Install carpeting material and adhesive in strict accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations and in accordance with CRI 104=1993, "Standard for Installation of Commercial Textile Floor Covering Materials" as published by the Carpet and Rug Institute. B. Lay carpet materials tight and free of irregularities. Cut and fit carpeting accurately and smoothly on wall and floor surfaces, around projections and into trim strips or binding bars with a minimum number of seams. Install no lengths or fillers which are less than 2'- 0" (600mm) in length. Make installation continuous under removable portable and/or accordion partitions. C. Carpet Seams: 1. Locate seams in accordance with approved seam diagram. 2. Seam layout shall provide a minimum total seam length with minimum head seams. 3. Do not locate head seams in areas of heavy traffic. 4. Butt match seams in carpeting material with no cut yard ends allowed and with carpet tufting running in same direction throughout Project installation. 5. Stagger carpet cross cuts or seams by a minimum of 10 feet. 6. Required tapes or adhesives used shall be in strict accordance with carpet and product Manufacturer's recommendations for type of seam, material and use intended. D. Edge Strips: 1. Install where floor carpeting terminates and where carpeting abuts a dissimilar floor material. 2. Securely fasten edge strips with concealed fasteners. Center under doors at doorways. E. Base Cap: Install cap at walls to receive carpet base in accordance with Manufacturer's directions. Miter at corners. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove spots, smears, stains, and similar defects immediately with a material recommended by Carpet Manufacturer. Thoroughly vacuum and clean carpets after other Trades have been completed. Installed carpeting material shall be left free from adhesives, scraps, carpet ripples, scallop and puckers. B. Carpet spots shall be cleaned with spot remover approved by Carpet Manufacturer and loose threads removed with sharp scissors. Installed carpeting material shall be free from defects at time of final acceptance by Owner. C. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect installed carpet against soiling abuse or damage by other Trades, and cover completed Work as necessary to ensure protection. B. Repair or replace damaged Work. (continued) DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS rm/CARPET ' DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09680-4 I SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 CARPETING MANUFACTURER'S LIMITED 10 YEAR WEAR WARRANTY Project Title Project Address Project Owner (quality name), manufactured by (manufacturer) is warranted to resist wear from normal commercial traffic. If the surface pile in any area is worn more than 10% within 10 years from the date of the installation, manufacturer will pay for replacement, including labor for installation. The warranty covers pile abrasion for all normal indoor contract areas. It excludes damage due to cuts, tears, burns, pulls, pile crush, stains or other damage caused by improper cleaning, and any incidental or consequential damages which may be claimed as a result of the necessity for replacement. This warranty shall apply only to carpet installed and maintained in accordance with accepted industry standards. As a condition hereof, one square yard of the affected carpet shall, upon request, be furnished to manufacturer for testing. This warranty applies for the carpet installation identified herein: Color ' Yardage Installed Roll Number(s): Date Installed: MIN President Date I END OF CARPETING MANUFACTURERS WARRANTY 1 fl DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/CARPET DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09680-5 1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 SECTION 09720 WALL COVERINGS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit 2 samples of each type of wall covering specified, marked with Manufacturer's name and location where wall covering is to be installed. B. Certificates: Submit Manufacturer's certification that material meets Specification requirements. C. Contract Closeout Submittals: Submit 2 copies of cleaning and maintenance instructions. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.' Regulatory Requirements: Product shall provide a UBC Class II rating for corridor locations. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in Manufacturer's original unopened packaging with labels intact. B. Storage: 1. Adequately protect against damage while stored at the site. 2. Store materials flat in a clean, dry area with maintained temperature above 40 ' degrees F. to 50 degrees F. for at least 3 days before and during the application period. C. Handling: Comply with Manufacturer's instructions. ' 1.04 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: Provide one square foot of wall covering for each 100 square feet of material installed, to the Owner, at no additional cost. Provide a quantity equal to 2 percent of installed vinyl wallcovering, or a minimum of one roll of each type of wall covering for Owner's future use. IPART PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS ' A. Vinyl coated fabric wall covering - UL listed. 1. Manufacturer: Satinesque, "Hitting the Mark" -2. Color: Cashmere #S9313 3. Type II, 20 oz. B. Primer -Sealer: Where drywall, plaster or concrete are to receive wall covering, coat surface with one coat of primer -sealer. Type" recommended by Manufacturer of wall covering for substrate condition. C. Adhesives: Type recommended by Manufacturer of wall covering for the specific wall covering type and wall substrate, and shall contain mildew inhibitor. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/WALL COVERINGS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09720-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental conditions in writing to Architect. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. 1. Examination includes bond, moisture and alkali testing as required or recommended by Manufacturer. 2. Moisture meter readings of backing surfaces shall be less than 4 percent. Backing shall be thoroughly dry, clean of dust and dirt, paint spots and free from imperfections that may show through the finished installation. B. Inspect wall covering for flaws, imperfections, shading or color inconsistency prior to installation. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Prime substrate surfaces with one coat of primer -sealer. B. Remove hardware, accessories, plates and similar items to allow wall covering installation. Upon completion of each space, replace removed items. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Follow the Adhesive Manufacturer's directions for mixing and applying adhesive. B. Use fabric panels in exact order as they are cut from rolls. Use rolls in consecutive order. Apply paste to the fabric back using a roller or paste brush. C. Hang smooth, non -match patterns by pasting strips on the wall, overlapping the edges and "double -cutting" through both thicknesses. Use a 0.04 inch or 0.06 inch zinc or aluminum strip between wall and material when cutting, to avoid gouging the wall. D. Use stiff -bristled brush or flexible broad knife to eliminate air pockets and to secure the wall covering to the wall surface. Fill spaces above and below windows and similar areas in sequence from the roll, not later when full-length pieces have been installed. E. Remove excess paste from each seam as it is made and before proceeding to next seam. Use sponge dampened with plain warm water. Wipe seam clean with dry cloth towel. Examine each seam carefully when completed. Trim additional selvage where required to achieve a color and pattern match at seams. F. Extend wall covering 6 inches beyond inside and outside corners. Cutting at corners is not acceptable. G. Horizontal seams are not acceptable except as required by pattern change. Completed ' wall covering shall be secure, smooth and clean, without wrinkles, gaps or overlaps. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean wall covering surfaces after installation, remove traces of adhesive per ' Manufacturer's recommendations. B. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. END OF SECTION DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/WALL COVERINGS ' DFD PROJECT NO. 982151SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09720-2 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 ' SECTION 09820 ACOUSTICAL INSULATION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Acoustical insulation ceilings and partitions as shown on Drawings and as specified. 1.02 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in Manufacturer's original unopened packaging with labels Intact. Protect finished surfaces with removable wrapping or coating which will not bond when exposed to sunlight. B. Storage: Adequately protect against damage while stored at the site. C. Handling: Comply with Manufacturer's instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manville Building Products Group ' B. Owens Corning Fiberglas C. U.S. Gypsum Company 2.02 MATERIALS A. Sound Control Batts: 3 inches thick fiberglass unfaced, ASTM C665, Type 1, Class B, with a Fire Hazard Classification of 25-50 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E-84. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install acoustical insulation batts in sound -rated stud partition walls where indicated on Drawings. Size batts for a friction fit and install in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations. B. Install acoustical insulation batts above lay -in ceilings, and other locations as shown on Drawings, in strict accordance with Manufacturer's printed instructions. C. Butt ends of batts closely together and fill all voids. 3.02 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. ' END OF, SECTION DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ACOUSTICAL INSULATION DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09820-1 1 1 1 fl 1 1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG P ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 SECTION 09900 PAINTING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Painting as specified and as noted on Drawings. Surfaces requiring finishing and left unfinished by the requirements of other Sections shall be painted or finished as part of the Work of this Section. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Touch -Up: Painting of items missed by painter at no additional cost to Owner. B. Re -Paint: Repairs to paint work for damages caused by other trades. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit schedule of manufacturers of products required for the Work, together with specifications recommended by each manufacturer. B. Samples: Submit samples of each type of finish specified. 1. Architect will furnish Contractor a color schedule of colors selected either from manufacturer's stock colors or specially requested color mixes before Work is begun. 2. Submit two 8 inch x 10 inch samples of each color, including the correct sheen and texture, on heavy cardboard or masonry. Submit sealer and stain finishes on material or the same quality and species of wood on which that particular finish shall be used. Rejected samples shall be resubmitted until approved. 3. Samples shall be submitted at least 30 days prior to the start of painting work. Label and identify each sample as to location and application. Upon submittal of color samples, minor variations or changes in color selection may be requested by the Architect and new samples ordered, until final color approval. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Preparation, application and workmanship shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and applicable provisions of the following: 1. Painting and Decorating Contractors of America (PDCA) "Painting Specification Manual" and "Standards". a. PDCA P1-92, "Touch -Up Painting and Damage Repair - Financial Responsibility:" A properly painted surface shall be as defined in this Standard. b. PDCA P2-92, "Third Party Inspection Qualifications and Responsibilities." C. PDCA P3-93, "Designation of Paint Colors." d. PDCA P4-94, "Responsibilities for Inspection and Acceptance of Surfaces Prior to Painting and Decorating." e. PDCA P5-94, "Benchmark Sample Procedures for Paint and Other Decorative Coating Systems." 2. Gypsum Association - GA210, "Gypsum Board for Walls and Ceilings." 1.05 , DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's sealed containers, ,legends and labels, intact. B. Storage: 1. Adequately protect against damage while stored at site. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/PAINTING DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09900-1 SASC Inc. ' Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ' ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 2. In no case shall the amount or method of materials stored exceed the amount permitted or the manner allowed by local ordinances, state laws, or fire underwriter regulations. 1.06 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Do not apply exterior paint in damp or rainy weather or ' until after the surface has dried thoroughly from the effects of such weather. 1. Do not apply varnish or paint when temperature is below 50 degrees F.. Avoid painting surfaces exposed to hot sunlight. 2. During interior application, maintain minimum temperature of 65 degrees F. ' unless otherwise directed by Architect or manufacturer's printed instructions. Hold temperature as constant as possible. 3. Provide adequate ventilation at all times so the humidity cannot rise above the dew point of the coldest surface to be painted. ' 4. Moisture -containing surfaces, such as concrete, stucco and cement plaster shall have a moisture content of less than 8 percent as measured by moisture meter. Remove surface salt deposits prior to painting. Verify that pH is neutral, or within acceptable limits of Paint Manufacturer. Paint after thoroughly cured. ' 1.07 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: Upon completion of the Work, furnish Owner with one fresh gallon of each type and color of paint and finish used on this Project. Label containers with manufacturer's name, batch, color, shelf life, instructions, and cautions. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Furnish products of one of the following manufacturers, except as otherwise approved by Architect, subject to compliance with specification requirements. 1. Dunn -Edwards Corporation 2. Frazee Industries 3. ICI 4. PPG 5. Sherwin Williams 6. Tnemec 2.02 MATERIALS A. Provide materials in accordance with the Schedule of Paint Products at the end of this Section as applicable to project. Contractor shall provide either waterborne or solventborne products at contractor's option and as follows: 1. Waterborne: a. Provide where low odor and fast dry are desired. b. Non -blocking materials shall be used for doors, door jambs, railings and other locations subject to handling, or where surfaces will come into contact with other painted surfaces or belongings. 2. Solventbome:. . a. Provide where harder finish is required (such as "wet" areas) and odor will not create problems with occupants. b. These products shall not be used where color retention is a concern. Verify with Architect. 3. Materials used shall comply with applicable Federal and local air pollution regulations, lead content laws, and current VOC requirements. If products listed in Schedule of Paint Products located at the end of this Section are not in compliance with regulations, laws, or requirements, Contractor shall notify Architect and shall provide information regarding substitute products. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS T°°/PAINTING DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09900-2 ' 1 1 1 1 1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 B. Basic painting materials such as linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, thinners, driers, and other similar products, shall be of highest quality, made by reputable, recognized manufacturers, and have• identifying labels on containers. Paint materials shall be factory fresh. C. Alternate materials submitted for prior approval shall have qualities and materials equal to the other listed manufacturer's scheduled, top of the line, first quality products. Materials selected for coating systems for each type of surface shall be the products of a single manufacturer. D. Standard Gloss Range: Provide paints in accordance with the following ranges in accordance with ASTM D523 and in accordance with Finish Schedules on drawings: Sheen Geometry Gloss Range Flat 85 degree Below 15 (see also Paint Finishes herein) Eggshell 60 degree 5-20 Lo Luster 60 degree 15-25 Satin 60 degree 15-35 Semi -Gloss 60 degree 30-65 Gloss 60 degree Over 65 E. Paints shall be ready mixed except for field catalyzed coatings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report in writing with a copy to Architect, conditions detrimental to Work. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. 3.02 PROTECTION A. Before painting, remove hardware, accessories, electrical plates, lighting fixtures and similar items and protect. 1. Provide "Wet -Pant" signs and other barricades and protections as required to protect adjacent surfaces and work of other trades, whether being painted or not. 2. Mask permanent labels. 3. Provide, distribute, and maintain a sufficient supply of clean drop cloths and other protective coverings. 4.. Protect foliage and other exterior finished surfaces from contact with cleaning materials and thoroughly flush with water after contact. 5. On completion of each space, replace above items. 3.03 SURFACE PREPARATION A. General: 1. Surfaces requiring painting or finishing shall be thoroughly dry and cured, free of dirt, dust, rust, stains, scale, mildew, wax, grease, oil, deteriorated substrates, bond -breakers, efflorescence and other foreign matter detrimental to the coating's adhesion and performance. Repair voids, cracks, nicks, and other surface defects, with appropriate patching material. Finish flush with surrounding surfaces and match adjacent finish texture. 2. Spot prime marred or damaged shop coats on metal surfaces with appropriate metal primer. 3. Determine moisture content of plaster, stucco, cementitious materials, wood, and other moisture -holding materials by use of a reliable electronic moisture meter. 4. Determine alkalinity of plaster, stucco and other cementitious materials by performing appropriate tests. 5. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content or alkalinity exceeds that which is allowed by paint manufacturer. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/PAINTING DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09900-3 SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 B. Wood: 1. Sandpaper to smooth and even surface and then dust off. After primer or stain coat has been applied, thoroughly fill nail holes and other surface imperfections with putty tinted with primer or stain to match wood color. Sand woodwork between coats to a smooth surface. Cover knots and sap streaks with a thin coat of shellac, or seal with a suitable stain blocking sealer. 2. Finish door and window edges after final fitting. Finish interior of cabinets in the same manner as the exterior unless otherwise specified. Seal interior of drawers unless otherwise specified. 3. Backpriming: a. Backprime exterior woodwork, which is to receive paint finish, with exterior primer paint. b. Backprime interior woodwork, which is to receive paint or enamel finish, with enamel undercoater paint. C. Backprime interior and exterior woodwork, which is to receive stain and/or varnish finish with VOC compliant varnish acceptable to the Architect. d. Back -prime wood trim before installation. 4. Where existing stained surfaces are indicated to be coated with a transparent stain, test apply stain to small area where directed by Architect and obtain Architects approval of color. C. Steel and Iron: 1. Remove grease, oil, mill scale, rust and rust scale and touch-up chipped or abraded places on items that have been shop coated. Remove and reprime incompatible or damaged shop applied primers. Comply with the Steel Structures Painting Council's (SSPC) recommendations for cleaning of uncoated steel and iron surfaces. 2. When area will be exposed to view, sandpaper the entire primedarea smooth, feather the edge of surrounding undamaged prime coat and spot prime in a manner to eliminate evidence of repair. 3. Where steel or iron at existing Work have a heavy coating of scale, remove by sand blasting, sanding, descaling, grinding or wire brushing, as necessary, to produce a satisfactory surface for painting. D. Galvanized Metal and Aluminum: 1. Thoroughly clean by wiping surfaces with a non -hydrocarbon solvent that will not leave an oily residue. Apply surface conditioner or vinyl -wash pretreatment as required for proper adhesion If required by paint manufacturer. Prime galvanized metal with galvanized iron primer as recommended by paint manufacturer. A test sample of the complete painting system should be applied and checked for adhesion before final painting begins. 2. Clean visible portions of throats of galvanized steel ductwork with solvent; wipe dry with clean rags and paint flat black. E. Concrete: 1. The method of surface preparation shall be at Contractor's discretion, provided the results are satisfactory to the Architect, and method is in compliance with applicable codes and requirements. 2. Clean and prepare surfaces of tilt -up precast concrete wall panels to be painted by power washing surface to remove all efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. 3. Repair surfaces to be painted prior to application of prime and finish coat(s). Apply a tinted primer to the substrate to help identify surface imperfections. After the primer has thoroughly dried, patch, fill and repair surface imperfections to match and flush -out with adjacent finish texture and profile. 4. Before first paint coat is applied, spot prime nails and other exposed metal occurring in the surfaces with a rust inhibitive primer as recommended by paint manufacturer. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/PAINTING ' DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09900-4 A. The number of coats scheduled is the minimum number of coats required. Additional coat(s) shall be applied, at no additional cost to the Owner, to completely hide base material, provide uniform color and to produce satisfactory finish results. ' B. Apply coatings without thinning except as specifically required by label directions, or required by these specifications. In such cases, thinning shall be the minimum reduction permitted. C. Priming will not be required on items delivered with prime or shop coats, unless otherwise specified. Touch up prime coats applied by others as required to ensure an even primed surface before applying finish coat. D. Plumbing, Mechanical and Electrical: 1. Exterior and interior exposed water, gas, waste piping, sprinkler piping, conduit, lighting and electrical panels, telephone terminal boxes, galvanized ducts and ' insulated ducts, shall be painted in areas other than mechanical rooms, unless otherwise scheduled. 2. Paint exposed unfinished fixtures, metal ducts, switch boxes, control panels, devices, starters, junction boxes, vents, drains, an other similar items, as directed ' by Architect. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/PAINTING DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09900-5 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ' ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 F. Plaster and Gypsum Board Surfaces: 1. Fill cracks, holes or imperfections in with compatible patching material and smooth off to match adjoining surfaces. Before painting, surfaces shall be first tested for dryness with a moisture testing device. 2. Apply no paint or sealer on gypsum board or plaster when the moisture content exceeds 8 percent. Test sufficient areas in each space and as often as necessary to determine if the surface has the proper moisture content for painting. If the moisture content is between 8 percent and 12 percent, prime with alkali resistant primer. 3. If 8 percent or less, prime with specified primer. Remove the dry salt deposits from plaster surfaces by brushing with a stiff brush before painting. 3.04 WORKMANSHIP A. Apply products to achieve paint manufacturer's printed specifications for dry mil thickness B. Apply each coat of paint evenly and comply with manufacturer's drying time before ' applying subsequent coats. C. Finished work shall be uniform, match approved color, texture and coverage, and free from runs, sags, clogging or excessive flooding. Make edges of paint adjoining other materials or colors sharp and clean, without overlapping. Where varnishes or enamel is used, lightly sand, dust and clean undercoats to obtain a smooth finish coat. Sand carefully between each coat of finish on smooth surfaces for good adhesion of subsequent coats. D. Where clear finishes are required, ensure tinted fillers match wood. Work fillers well into the grain before set. Wipe excess from the surface. E. Where specific mil thicknesses are required, check thickness by the following methods: 1. Over ferrous metal - Elecometer Film Gauge 2. Other surfaces - Tooke Dry Mil Inspection Gauge 3.05 APPLICATION A. The number of coats scheduled is the minimum number of coats required. Additional coat(s) shall be applied, at no additional cost to the Owner, to completely hide base material, provide uniform color and to produce satisfactory finish results. ' B. Apply coatings without thinning except as specifically required by label directions, or required by these specifications. In such cases, thinning shall be the minimum reduction permitted. C. Priming will not be required on items delivered with prime or shop coats, unless otherwise specified. Touch up prime coats applied by others as required to ensure an even primed surface before applying finish coat. D. Plumbing, Mechanical and Electrical: 1. Exterior and interior exposed water, gas, waste piping, sprinkler piping, conduit, lighting and electrical panels, telephone terminal boxes, galvanized ducts and ' insulated ducts, shall be painted in areas other than mechanical rooms, unless otherwise scheduled. 2. Paint exposed unfinished fixtures, metal ducts, switch boxes, control panels, devices, starters, junction boxes, vents, drains, an other similar items, as directed ' by Architect. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/PAINTING DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09900-5 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 E. Spray paint prime coated (not pre -finished) grilles and registers with enamel or lacquer to match walls and ceilings. Paint materials shall not sag, run or bind movable parts of grilles, registers, louvers, baffles, and other similar items. 1. Throats of ducts shall be given one coat of flat black paint, wherever visibility of the interior of the duct is allowed through registers or other similar items. At fiber lined duct, use black latex paint. 2. Examine the Mechanical and Electrical Drawings and Specifications to determine the amount of exposed work to be painted. F. Paint exposed surfaces of every member; paint items inaccessible after installation before installation, if required to be painted. Edges, tops, and bottoms of wood doors shall be sealed and finished with the same finish as the door faces, to meet door manufacturer's warranty requirements. Verify edge color with Architect as different colors may be selected for each face. G. Paint items fitted with finish hardware after hardware has been temporarily removed. H. Heating and other equipment on or adjacent to walls or surfaces scheduled for painting, shall be disconnected, using workmen skilled in appropriate trades, and moved temporarily to permit painting of surface. Following completion of painting, replace and reconnect items. I. Each succeeding pigmented coat shall be distinguishably lighter than the previous coat. Tint prime and undercoats to a color similar to finish coat. Each coat of material applied must be inspected and approved by the Architect before the application of the succeeding specified coat; otherwise no credit for the concealed coat will be given, and the Contractor shall assume the responsibility to recoat work in question. Contractor shall notify the Architect when each coat is completed. J. Brush, wipe or roll stain in 2 coat application. Avoid lap marks by maintaining "wet -edge" continually being merged with existing liquid coverage and stop only at natural edges, turns and breaking places. K. Do not paint over Underwriters' Laboratory labels, fusible links, exposed sprinkler heads, and other similar items. L. Paint piping, electrical or other equipment, conduit, vents, and other similar items, on roof or other exterior locations as directed by Architect. M. Finish closets and the interior of cabinets with same color as adjoining rooms, unless otherwise specified. Finish other surfaces same as nearest or adjoining surfaces, unless otherwise shown or scheduled. N. Paint surface of walls which will be concealed by cabinets, chalkboards and other items attached to wall. 3.06 ADJUSTING A. At completion, do touch-up and re -paint work and leave finish surfaces in good condition 3.07 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work, remove misplaced paint and stain spots or spills. Leave Work in clean condition acceptable to Architect and in accordance with Section 01500. B. Remove oily rags and waste daily, taking precaution to prevent fire. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS rm/PAINTING DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09900-6 SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas ' GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 3.08 SCHEDULES ' A. Color Schedule: 1. Architect will provide a complete schedule of colors. Colors may be selected from various manufacturer's color pallettes. Manufacturer supplying paint shall match these colors. Contractor shall prepare duplicate set of samples of treatments for major surfaces. If a specific surface or item receiving a paint finish -does not have a specific color indicated or selected by the Architect, obtain clarification from the Architect. Do not assume the confirmation of the same color ' on the adjacent surfaces. 2. Final coat of paint shall be not be applied until colors have been approved by the Architect. B. Schedule of Finishes: Refer to the "Finish Schedule" on the Drawing for designated finishes of areas. C. Finishing of the following listed items and materials will not be required and shall be protected: 1. Stainless Steel, brass, bronze, copper, monel, chromium, anodized aluminum; specially finished articles such as porcelain enamel, plastic coated fabrics, and baked enamel, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Finished products such as ceramic tile, glass, brick, resilient flooring and acoustical tiles, board and metal tees. 3. .Pre -finished products such as wood folding partitions and doors, wood classroom and laboratory casework, bleachers and elevator cabs. 3.09 EXTERIOR PAINT FINISHES A.. This schedule uses the generic names listed in the Schedule of Paint Products. B. System 101 (Ferrous Metals): Apply to exposed steel such as beams and column connectors, metal doors and frames, grilles, light fixture standards in parking areas, metal handrails, sectional and coiling doors, canopy overhangs and other exposed miscellaneous ferrous metals that are not pre -finished. 1. 1st Coat: Ferrous Metal Primer (Red or White color as applicable to finish coats). 2. 2nd Coat: Same material as 3rd coat in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3. 3rd Coat: a. Flat: Paint - Waterborne (100% Acrylic) (if noted on Drawings). Sheen shall be 4 to 6% per a 60 degree gloss meter. b. Semi -Gloss unless noted otherwise. Enamel, Semi -Gloss - Waterbome (100% Acrylic - Non -Blocking). C. Gloss (if noted on Drawings): Enamel, Gloss - Waterbome (100% Acrylic - Non -Blocking). C. System 102 (Galvanized Metals): Apply to exposed galvanized metal such as copings, louvers and metal flashings. 1. Solvent clean metal to remove foreign matter or any coating applied by the metal manufacturer. Apply Surface Conditioner or Vinyl Wash Pretreatment (if required by paint manufacturer). 2. 1 st Coat: Galvanized Metal Primer. 3. 2nd Coat: Same material as 3rd coat as recommended by manufacturer. 4. 3rd Coat: a. Flat: Paint, Flat - Waterborne (100% Acrylic) unless noted otherwise. ' Sheen shall be 4 to 6% per a 60 degree gloss meter. b. Semi -Gloss (if noted on Drawings): Enamel, Semi -Gloss - Waterbome (100% Acrylic - Non -Blocking). C. Gloss (if noted on Drawings): Enamel, Gloss - Waterborne (100% ' Acrylic - Non -Blocking). ' DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/PAINTING DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09900-7 SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 D. System 103 (Aluminum): Apply to exterior louvers and other miscellaneous exposed exterior unfinished aluminum surfaces. 1. Solvent clean metal to remove foreign matter or any coating applied by the metal manufacturer. Apply Surface Conditioner or Vinyl Wash Pretreatment. 2. 1 st Coat: Aluminum Primer. 3. 2nd Coat: Same material as 3rd coat as recommended by manufacturer. 4. 3rd Coat: a. Flat: Paint, Flat - Waterborne (100% Acrylic) (if noted on Drawings) Sheen shall be 4 to 6% per a 60 degree gloss meter. b. Semi -Gloss unless noted otherwise. Enamel, Semi -Gloss - Waterborne (100% Acrylic - Non -Blocking). C. Gloss (if noted on Drawings): Enamel, Gloss - Waterborne (100% Acrylic - Non -Blocking). E. System 104 (Concrete Masonry Units): NOT USED F. System 105 (Concrete and Stucco): Apply to exterior cementitious surfaces as indicated or noted. Precast concrete lintels, beams, caps, sills, etc. at exterior of buildings shall not be painted, unless specifically noted. Roller apply 2nd or 3rd coat. 1. 1 st Coat: Concrete and Masonry Primer. 2. 2nd Coat: Same material as 3rd coat as recommended by manufacturer. 3. 3rd Coat: a. Flat: Paint, Flat - Waterborne (100% Acrylic) unless noted otherwise. Sheen shall be 4 to 6% per a 60 degree gloss meter. One of the coats shall be roller applied. b. Semi -Gloss (if noted on Drawings): Enamel, Semi -Gloss - Waterborne (100% Acrylic - Non -Blocking). C. Gloss (if noted on Drawings): Enamel, Gloss - Waterbome(100% Acrylic - Non -Blocking). G. System 106 (Exterior Wood): Apply to wood fascias, soffits, trim, wood posts, columns, beams and exposed trim and framing where indicated to be painted. 1. 1st Coat: Exterior Wood Primer - Waterborne (100% Acrylic) unless noted otherwise. 2. 2nd and 3rd Coats: a. Flat - Rough -Sawn Wood: Paint, Flat - Waterborne (100% Acrylic) unless noted otherwise. Sheen shall be 4 to 6% per a 60 degree gloss meter. b. Semi -Gloss - Smooth Surface Wood (if noted on Drawings): Enamel, Semi -Gloss - Waterborne (100% Acrylic - Non -Blocking). C. Gloss - Smooth Surface Wood (if noted on Drawings): Enamel, Gloss - Waterborne (100% Acrylic - Non -Blocking). H. System 107 (Exterior Gypsum Board): Apply to exterior grade gypsum board soffits. 1. 1st Coat: Exterior Gypsum Board Primer/Undercoater — Waterborne unless noted otherwise. 2. 2nd and 3rd Coats: Flat Paint - Waterborne (100% Acrylic) unless noted otherwise. Sheen shall be 4 to 6% per a 60 degree gloss meter. One of the coats shall be roller applied. I. System 108 (Sealer - Masonry Parapet Top Surfaces): NOT USED J. System 109 (Tilt -up Precast Concrete): NOT USED 3.10 INTERIOR PAINT FINISHES A. This schedule uses the generic names listed in the Schedule of Paint Products. B. System 201 (Ferrous Metals): Apply to exposed metals such as steel doors, hollow metal frames, metal beam saddles, columns, grilles and registers, stair and hand railings, ladders, and other exposed miscellaneous metals. 1. 1st Coat: Ferrous Metal Primer (Red or White color as applicable to finish coats). 2. 2nd Coat: Same material as 3rd Coat as recommended by manufacturer. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/PAINTING ' DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09900-8 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 3. 3rd Coat: ► a. Eggshell: Enamel, Eggshell. b. Semi -Gloss (if noted on Drawings): Enamel, Semi -Gloss. C. Gloss (if noted on Drawings): Enamel Gloss. C. System 202 (Interior Wood Finishes - Enamel): Apply to wood door frames, columns, exposed and concealed casework and millwork, wood -window wall construction, medium density plywood surfaces, shelving, roll -up wood doors, perforated and plain type hardboard, particleboard and other exposed miscellaneous wood and trim, except wood specified for a transparent or stain finish. 1. 1 st Coat: Enamel Undercoater. 2. 2nd and 3rd Coat: a. Eggshell: Enamel, Eggshell b. Semi -Gloss (if noted on Drawings): Enamel, Semi -Gloss C. Gloss (if noted on Drawings): Enamel, Gloss D. System 203 (Interior Wood Finish - Flat): Apply to plywood telephone backing boards and other miscellaneous softwood as noted, specified or scheduled. 1. 1 st Coat: Enamel Undercoater/Primer. 2. 2nd and 3rd Coat: Flat Paint, - Waterborne (Vinyl Acrylic) E. System 204 (Galvanized Metals): Apply to exposed galvanized metal. 1. Solvent clean metal to remove foreign matter or any coating applied by the metal manufacturer. Apply Surface Conditioner or Vinyl Wash Pretreatment (if required by paint manufacturer) 2. 1 st Coat: Galvanized Metal Primer 3. 2nd and 3rd Coats: a. Eggshell: Enamel, Eggshell b. Semi -Gloss (if noted on Drawings): Enamel, Semi -Gloss C. Gloss (if noted on Drawings): Enamel Gloss F. System 205 (Aluminum): Apply to interior louvers and other miscellaneous exposed unfinished aluminum surfaces. 1. Solvent clean metal to remove foreign matter or any coating applied by the metal manufacturer. Apply Surface Conditioner or Vinyl Wash Pretreatment. 2. 1 st Coat: Aluminum Primer 3. 2nd and 3rd Coats: a. Eggshell: Enamel, Eggshell b. Semi -Gloss (if noted on Drawings): Enamel, Semi -Gloss C. Gloss (if noted on Drawings): Enamel, Gloss G. System 206 (Gypsum Board, Plaster and Concrete - Wet Areas): Apply to gypsum board, plaster and concrete surfaces in toilet rooms, janitor rooms, kitchens, and other areas as scheduled. 1. 1 st Coat: Enamel Undercoater - Solventborne, unless noted otherwise. 2. 2nd and 3rd Coats: a. Eggshell (if noted on Drawings): Enamel, Eggshell - Solventborne. b. Semi -Gloss: Enamel, Semi -Gloss - Solventborne or Enamel - Solventborne (Epoxy -Polyester). H. System 207 (Gypsum Board, Plaster and Concrete - Non -Wet Areas): Apply to gypsum board, plaster and concrete except for wet areas. 1. 1st Coat: Waterborne Primer/Sealer. (Solventborne (Alkyd) shall be used at new untextured smooth gypsum board surfaces covered with powdery or unstable soft top joint cement) 2. 2nd and 3rd Coat: a. Eggshell: Enamel, Eggshell b. Semi -Gloss (if noted on Drawings): Enamel, Semi -Gloss C. Flat (if noted on Drawings): Paint, Flat I. System 208 (Ferrous Metal - Chemical Resistant Finish): NOT USED J. System 209 (Interior Concrete Masonry - Wet Areas): NOT USED DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/PAINTING DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09900-9 SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 K. System 210 (Interior Concrete Masonry or Plaster -Extremely Wet Areas): NOT USED 3.11 CLEAR WOOD FINISHES A. This schedule uses the generic names listed in the Schedule of Paint Products. B. System 301 (Stained and Clear Finish): Apply to wood doors, handrails and chair rails. Fill open grain hardwood such as Oak. 1. Clear Flat — Varnish - Solventborne: a. 1 st Coat: Semi -Transparent Stain - Solventborne (Oil) b. 2nd Coat: Sanding Sealer - Solventborne C. 3rd Coat: Varnish, Flat - Solventborne 2. Clear Semi -Gloss — Polyurethane Varnish - Solventborne a. 1 st Coat: Semi -Transparent Stain - Solventborne (Oil) b. 2nd Coat: Sanding Sealer - Solventborne C. 3rd Coat: Polyurethane Varnish, Semi -Gloss - Solventborne 3. Clear Gloss — Polyurethane Varnish - Solventborne a. 1 st Coat: Semi -Transparent Stain - Solventborne (Oil) b. 2nd Coat: Sanding Sealer - Solventborne C. 3rd Coat: Polyurathane Varnish, Gloss - Solventborne C. System 302 (Stained and Wax Finish): Apply to wood doors, handrails and chair rails. Fill open grain hardwood such as oak. 1. 1 st Coat: a. Semi -Transparent Stain Solventborne — Oil.) b. Lacquer -Based Stain - Solventborne 2. 2nd Coat: Paste Wax. (continued) DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/PAINTING , DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09900-10 SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas 3.12 SCHEDULE OF PAINT PRODUCTS A. Only those product which are specifically required by this Section shall be provided. Products listed in the following Schedule that are not specified in this Section are for information only. EXTERIOR System(s) Dunn- Frazee ICI PPG Sherwin Tnemec PRIMERS/UNDERCOATERS see 09900 Edwards Williams Red Ferrous Metal Primer 101 Waterborne --- 561 4020 90-708 B66-310 18 Solventborne 43-4 661 4160 7-858 B50NZ3 10-99 Galvanized Metal Primer 102 Waterborne W713 561 4020 90-712 B66W1 --- Solventborne Qd43-7 661 "4160 6-209 B50WZ30 27 Vinyl Wash Pretreatment /Surface 102,103 Conditioner Waterborne GE123 --- 88 " --- B71Y1 --- Solventborne --- Ellis 690 --- 97-687 N/A --- Aluminum Metal Primer 103 Waterborne. VV713 561. -4020 90-712 B66W1 --- Solventborne QD43-7 661 4160 6-204 B50WZ30 27 White Ferrous Metal Primer 101 Waterborne --- .561 .4620 90-712 B66W1 17 Solventborne 43-5 661 4.160 7-852 B50Z Series 10-99W Concrete and Masonry Block Filler 104 Waterborne (100% Acrylic) W305 262 4000 --- B42W46 130 Waterborne Vinyl Acrylic & Other W315 262 3010 6-7/16-90 B25W25 130 Solventborne --- --- --- 97-685/686 --- 54-660 Concrete and Masonry Primer 104-105 Waterborne W709 266 36 6-603 A24W300 151 Solventborne --- 379 --- --- B46WZ1000 66 Epoxy 2 component) W718 562 18 97 Series B70W1 00/B60V1 5 66 Masonry Surface Conditioner Waterborne W709 ' 266 36 6-808 A24-100'Series --- Solventborne 42-52 379 --- --- B46WZ1000 --- Exterior Gypsum Board Primer/Undercoater 107 Waterborne W713 168 3210 6-609 B42W41 6 Solventborne 42-1 372 2110 6-9 Y24W20 36-603 (continued) DFD ARCHITECTURE DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 C -SPECS TM/PAINTING SECTION 09900-11 SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas EXTERIOR System(s) Dunn- Frazee ICI PPG Sherwin Tnemec PRIMERS/UNDERCOATERS continued see 09900 Edwards Williams Exterior Wood Primer Waterborne (100% acrylic) 106 W708 168 3210 6-609 B42W41 6 Solventborne 42-9 372. 2110 6-9 Y24W20 36-603 Multi -Purpose Primer 101-107 W704 203 2200 72 A6 6 Waterborne (100% acrylic) W713 168 3210 90 Series B66W1 --- Solventborne 42-44 661 4160 97-689 B50WZ1 37H-77 High Build Polyamide Epoxy Primer (2 Part) --- --- --- ___ -__ 23 Waterborne (100% acrylic) --- 547 4030 98 Series B70W1 00/B60V1 5 --- Solventborne (ferrous metals) IP714 562 233H 97 -DTR B67 400 Series 66 Solventborne(galvanized metal IP714 562 201 97 -DTR B67 400 Series 66 EXTERIOR System(s) Dunn- Frazee ICI PPG Sherwin PAINT - FINISH COATS see 09900 Edwards Williams Paint, Flat (Gloss Rating 0-15 @ 85 degree gloss meter) Waterborne (Vinyl Acrylic) W201 206 2250 10 Series B42 Series --- Waterborne 100% Acrylic) 101-107 W704 203 2200 72 A6 6 Paint, Low Sheen Waterborne (100% Acrylic) W701 215 2402 76 A82 --- Solventborne --- --- --- ___ -__ 23 Enamel, Eggshell Waterborne (100% Acrylic - Non -Blocking) W705 126 2402 76 A82 --- Solventborne --- --- --- ___ Enamel, Semi -Gloss Waterborne (100% Acrylic - Non -Blocking) 101-106 W901 124 2406 78 Series A8 7 Solventborne 9 Series 628 2516 --- B55Z600 23 Solventborne (Industrial) 9 Series 628 --- 018 Pters B55Z600 23 Solventborne (Acrylic Aliphatic --- Ameron 378 95-8600 --- 73 Polyurethane - 2 Component) 450SA Series (continued) DFD ARCHITECTURE DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 M M MM i m om m e m= M r M M C -SPECS TM/PAINTING SECTION 09900-12 M M M ISM SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas EXTERIOR System(s) Dunn- Frazee ICI PPG Sherwin Tnemec PAINT - FINISH COATS continued see 09900 Edwards Williams Enamel, Gloss Waterborne (100% Acrylic - Non -Blocking) 101-106 W960 143 3028 90-374/6- B66W100 --- 8534 Solventborne (Quick Dry) QD60 648 4318 7-800/ B54Z --- 95-9000 - Series Solventborne (Silicone) 42-53 --- 475 97-480 B56-300 --- Solventborne (Industrial) 10 Series 648 4328 7-284 B54Z 2H Solventborne (Aliphatic Polyurethane - IP630 Ameron 379 97-800/95 B65-500/B60V50 74 2 Component) Amershield Series Solventborne (Acrylic Aliphatic IP 640 Amershield 389 97-800 B65-300/B60/V30 74 Polyurethane - 2 Component) - Elastomeric (Smooth) Waterborne (100% Acylic) Elastokote 216 2260 4-110 Colorflex 156 Premium Sonneborn Textured Coating, Smooth Waterborne (Vinyl Acrylic) ..W320 2047-- --- Flexcoat 180 (Sonneborn) Solventborne --- --- --- --- --- 55 Textured Coating, Medium Waterborne (Vinyl Acrylic) .W322 204 3230. Proko Flexcoat 181 (Sonneborn) Solventborne --- --- --- --- --- 52 Textured Coating, Coarse Waterborne (Vinyl Acrylic) W323 204 3230 Proko Flexcoat 159 Sonneborn Floor Paint Waterborne (Acrylic Epoxy) W810 547 4408 .98 Series B90 Series 287 Solventborne --- --- 3118 97 Series B62Z-100 291 Aluminum Paint Solventborne 42-7 Hammerite 4308 6-23ON/A B65SQ12 431-138 Aluminum Metal Waterborne --- --- --- 90 Series --- --- Solventborne --- --- --- --- DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/PAINTING DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09900-13 SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas EXTERIOR System(s) Dunn- Frazee ICI PPG Sherwin Tnemec STAIN see 09900 Edwards Williams Solid Color Stain Waterborne (100% Acrylic) W704 206 2600 77-Rez A16 Series --- Diamond (Olympic) Solventborne Oil --- --- 2700 --- A14Z Series --- Semi-Transparent Toner V101 948 --- 77-10 Minwax Helmsans --- Waterborne (Water Repellent) ONC 288 --- 77-Rez Cuprinol --- Solventborne IP631 Ameron 379 (Olympic) --- 76 Solventborne Oil --- 385 --- --- A14T5 --- Semi-Transparent Stain Waterborne (Water Repellent) WPT3 Aquaseal 2 --- 77-Rez A15T5 --- Alk d (Olympic) Waterborne --- 288 2610 --- A15T5 --- Solventborne Oil 301 --- 1 385 2710 --- A14TZ1 --- EXTERIOR Systems) Dunn- Frazee ICI PPG Sherwin Tnenec CLEAR FINISHES see 09900 Edwards Williams Spar Varnish, Gloss Waterborne --- Flecto --- --- --- --- Diamond Finish Solventborne V101 948 --- 77-10 Minwax Helmsans --- Aliphatic Polyurethane, Gloss (2 Part) Solventborne IP631 Ameron 379 95 Series --- 76 Amershield Exterior Gloss Varnish, Alkyd (Paleamber) Solventborne V121 ZAR Gloss --- --- A67V4 --- Alk d DFD ARCHITECTURE DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 M M r�_ m r� M M� M r MIMM C -SPECS TM/PAINTING SECTION 09900-14 M on M M = W== W .M r M M i r mm MM M MM SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas INTERIOR System(s) Dunn- Frazee ICI PPG Sherwin Tnemec PRIMERS/UNDERCOATERS see 09900 Edwards Williams Red Ferrous Metal Primer 201 Waterborne --- 561 4020 , 90-708 B66-310 18 Solventborne 43-4 661 4160 7-858 B50NZ3 10-99 White Ferrous Metal Primer 201 Waterborne --- 561 4020 90-712 B66W1 17 Solventborne 43-5 661 4160 7-852 650 Series 10-99W Galvanized Metal Primer 204 Waterborne W713 561 4020 90-712 B66W1 16 Solventborne QD43-7 661 4160 6-209 B50WZ30 27 Aluminum Primer 205 Waterborne W713 .561 4020 90-712 B66W1 30 Solventborne QD43-7 661 4160 6-204 B50WZ30 66 Primer/Sealer (for drywall, etc.) 206,207,209 Waterborne (Vinyl Acrylic) W101 061. 1000 6-2 B28W200- 51-792 Waterborne (Zero VOC) W500 -:066 LM9116 UC 80020 B11 --- Solventborne (Alkyd) 206,207 E28-1 367 1110 6-6 B49WZ2 66 Vinyl Acrylic Wall Sealer Waterborne 21.1 - - 063 --- 17-21 B51 W20 . 51-792 Enamel Undercoater/Primer 201-203, 206 Waterborne (100% Acrylic) W707 061' 1120 6-855 B28W101 18 Solventborne E22-1 367 1020 6-6 B49WZ2 --- Block Filler, w/ Aggregate Waterborne W304 --- --- --- --- 216 Solventborne --- --- --- --- --- 54-562 Block Filler, w/out Aggregate 209,211 Waterborne --- 262 3010 6-7 B25W26 --- Waterborne (100% Acrylic) W305 --- 4000 16-90 B42W46 130 Solventborne (Polyimide -Epoxy) 210 IP714 --- --- 97- B42 Series 54-660 685/686 Epoxy Polyester Primer Waterborne --= :-- 4030 --- --- --- Solventborne 42-44 661 4170 7-858 --- 54-562 (continued) DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/PAINTING DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09900-15 SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas INTERIOR PRIM ERS/U N DERCOATERS continued System(s) see 09900 Dunn- Edwards Frazee ICI PPG Sherwin Williams Tnemec Vinyl Wash Pretreatment/Surface Conditioner 204,205 Edwards Williams Waterborne 212 GE123 --- 88 --- B71 Yl --- Solventborne W615 Ellis 690 --- 97- B50WZ30 --- Paint, Flat 207 687/688 Concrete and Masonry Primer 211 W401 011 1210 80 Series B30W200 6 Waterborne W709 266 36 6-603 B28W300 --- Solventborne --- 379 4010 --- B46WZ1000 --- Epoxy (Two Component) W718 Amerlock 18 97 Series B70W100/B60V15 54-660 Enamel, Low Sheen 400 INTERIOR Systems) Dunn- Frazee ICI PPG Sherwin Tnemec PAINT - FINISH COATS see 09900 Edwards Williams Acoustic Paint 212 Waterborne (Vinyl -Acrylic) W615 003 SA1100 50 Series B30W700 180 Paint, Flat 207 Waterborne (Vinyl Acrylic) 203 W401 011 1210 80 Series B30W200 6 Waterborne (Low Odor/Low VOC) W501 018 1200 UC 80021 Bl l --- Waterborne (Low Odor/Zero VOC) W501 018 LM9100. UC 80021 B11 --- Solventborne --- --- 1310 --- B32WZ1101 --- Enamel, Low Sheen Waterborne (100% Acrylic) --- --- 1414 --- --- --- Waterborne (Vinyl Acrylic) W411 022 1434 6-510 B20W200 7 Waterborne (Low Odor/Zero VOC) W540 029 --- UC 80022 B9 --- Solventborne --- --- --- 7-824 B33WZ1101 --- Enamel, Eggshell 201, 204, 205,207 Waterborne (100% Acrylic) W440 022 1403: **6-411 B20W200 --- Waterborne (Vinyl -Acrylic) 1412 Waterborne (Low Odor/Zero VOC) W540 029 LM9300 UC 80022 B9 --- Waterborne (Non -Blocking - 100% Acrylic) 202 W940 126 1403 **6-411 B31 Series --- Solventborne 206 71 Series --- 1512 --- B33WZ1101 23 (**Not 100% Acrylic, but is their top of line product) (continued) DFD ARCHITECTURE DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 M r== W r r M M M M M r M C -SPECS TM/PAINTING SECTION 09900-16 r rr r� rr r� rr; rr rr rr rr rr r rr rr rr �r r� rr r� SASC Inc. ' Phoenix - Las Vegas INTERIOR System(s) Dunn- Frazee ICI PPG Sherwin Tnemec PAINT - FINISH COATS continued see 09900 Edwards Williams Enamel, Semi -Gloss 201, 204, 205,207 Waterborne (100% Acrylic) W4.50. 128 1407 6-8510 B31 WJ2 7 Waterborne (Non -Blocking - 100% Acrylic) ' 202, 211 W901 124 1407 6-8510 , B31 WJ2 . 7 - Waterborne (Low Odor/Low VOC) W550 032 1416 UC 80023 B10 --- Waterborne (Low Odor/Zero VOC) W550 032 LM9200 UC 80023. B10 --- Waterborne (2 Component Epoxy) W5748 --- 4406 16-800 B70-200/B60V25 113 Solventborne 206,209 --- '328 1507 --- B55Z600 23 Solventborne (Industrial) 9 Series 628 --- 7-844 B55Z600 23 Solventborne (Epoxy -Polyester) 'IP756 --- --- 16 Series --- 66 Enamel, Gloss 201, 204, 205 - Waterborne (Non -Blocking -100% Acrylic) 202 W960 143 3028 90-375 B21 Series --- Waterborne (2 Component Epoxy) --- 542 4408 98 Series B70 -200/13160V15 114 Waterborne (Low Odor/Low VOC) --- --- 3038. --- -- 114 Solventborne QD60 648 4308 7-800/ B54Z 2H 95-9000 Series Solventborne (Quick Dry) QD60 648 4318 7019-Ptrs B54Z --- Solventborne (Industrial) 206 10 Series 648 4328 7-812 B54Z 2H Series Solventborne (2 -Component Epoxy) 209 IP755 --- --- 16 Series B67-100 Series --- Solventborne (Polyamide-Epoxy) 210 --- --- 4508 97 Series B62Z- 83 100/660VZ70 Floor Paint Waterborne(Epoxy-Acrylic) W810 U.G.L. 4408 98 Series B90 Series 287 Solventborne --- --- 3118 7 Series B54Z 291 DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/PAINTING DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09900-17 SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas INTERIOR System(s) Dunn- Frazee ICI PPG Sherwin Tnemec STAIN see 09900 Edwards Williams Semi -Transparent Stain Waterborne (Water Repellent) WPT3 Aquasea12 --- 77-Rez -- . --- 6200 (Olynpic) Waterborne WPT3 585 --- 77-Rez Minwax --- Sanding Sealer (Olynpic) Solventborne (Wiping) 302 V108 685 1700 77-Rez Sherwood --- Solventborne(Brushing) V1 06A McClosky 1916 (Olynpic) B26V3 --- Solventborne Oil 301,302 V108 685 --- --- A48-200 --- Lacquer-Based Stain V198 --- --- --- --- --- Waterborne --- 585 --- --- --- --- Solventborne 301,302 LQ120 786 EZL --- --- --- Pigmented Solid Color Stain Waterborne (100% Acrylic) W704 206 --- 77-Rez --- --- (Olynpic) Solventborne Oil --- --- --- Semi-Transparent Toner Waterborne (Water Repellent) ONC --- --- . 77-Rez (Olynpic) Solventborne Oil --- 385 --- --- --- --- INTERIOR Systems) Dunn- Frazee ICI PPG Sherwin Tnemec CLEAR FINISHES see 09900 Edwards Williams Resin Sealer Waterborne --- McClosky --- --- --- --- 6200 Solventborne V195 McClosky 1916 77-30 Minwax Prestain --- Sanding Sealer Waterborne (Acrylic Urethane V161 McClosky --- --- --- --- Solventborne(Brushing) V1 06A McClosky 1916 77-30 B26V3 --- Varnish, Flat Solventborne V198 --- --- --- --- --- (continued) DFD ARCHITECTURE DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 M M M M M M r M M M M M M M M C -SPECS TM/PAINTING SECTION 09900-18. M M M M MIM M M M M M M M i MM MM M M M M M SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas INTERIOR System(s) Dunn- Frazee ICI PPG Sherwin Tnemec CLEAR FINISHES continued see 09900 Edwards Williams Varnish, Satin (Low Sheen) Waterborne (Acrylic Urethane) 301-2.- V164 _, Flecto%Varat 1802 77-49 A68 Series..`.. - -- hane. Solventborne (Alkyd) Defthane McClosky --- --- A66 Series --- Satin Solventborne (Polyurethane) --- 11 1902 --- A67 Series --- Varnish, Semi -Gloss Waterborne (Acrylic Urethane) V163 922 --- --.= : Minwax Polycrylic --- Semi Gloss Waterborne (Acrylic) --- . 947 --- --- --- --- Solventborne V199 McClosky --- --- A66 Series j --- Solventborne (Polyurethane) IP627 McClosky --- --- Minwax --- Polyurethane Semi Gloss Varnish, Gloss Waterborne (Acrylic Urethane) 301-4 V162 947 1808. 77-45 A68 Series --- Solventborne V197 McClosky --- --- A66V91 --- Solventborne (Polyurethane) IP627 McClosky 1908 --- A67 Series --- Spar Varnish, Gloss Waterborne --; 947 --- --- --- Solventborne V101 McClosky --- --- Minwax Helmsman --- Man'O Warr Paste Wax Waterborne 302 --- --- --- --- --- --- Solventborne --- --- --- --- Minwax Lacquer Sanding Sealer Waterborne Z6033 560 --- --- --- Solventborne 301-1,3,5 LQ101 760 LS -340 --- Clear Shield High --- Solids (continued) DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/PAINTING DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09900-19 SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas INTERIOR System(s) Dunn- Frazee ICI PPG Sherwin Tnemec CLEAR FINISHES continued see 09900 Edwards Williams Lacquer, Flat Waterborne Z6235 520H 038 --- --- --- --- Solventborne 301-1 LQ105 704 LC -384 --- --- --- Lacquer, Semi -Gloss Waterborne 301-3 --- 520HO42 --- --- T75F501 --- Solventborne LQ104 727 LC -381 --- Clear Shield Semi- --- Gloss Lacquer, Gloss Waterborne Z6034 540HO34 --- --- T75C500 --- Solventborne 301-5 LQ103 746 LC -382 --- Clear ShieldGloss --- Lacquer, Crystal Clear Sanding Sealer Waterborne Z6033 560H032 --- --- --- --- Solventborne LQ131 760M00137 LS -153 --- --- --- Lacquer, Non -Yellowing, Flat Waterborne Z6035 520HO38 --- --- T75F528 --- Solventborne LQ134 702M10062 LC -312 --- --- --- Lacquer, Non -Yellowing, Semi -Gloss Waterborne Z6141 520HO42 --- --- T75F526 --- Solventborne LQ133 728M40068 LC -311 --- --- --- Lacquer, Non -Yellowing, Gloss Waterborne Z6034 540H03X --- --- T75C525 --- Solventborne LQ132 745M90012 LC -308 --- --- --- END OF SECTION DFD ARCHITECTURE DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 C -SPECS TM/PAINTING SECTION 09900-20 M .= MM M MIM MMMMM W M M M M M M SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas ' GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 SECTION 09940 ' VENETIAN STUCCO FINISH PART 1 GENERAL - 1.01 SUMMARY ' A. Section Includes: Provide labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to furnish and install the acrylic coating and related work. System includes, but is not limited to, acrylic based wall and/or ceiling coatings having a minimum thickness of 25 mils, and ' meeting the minimum performance specifications stated herein. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical information including installation instructions, product description, and product test data conforming to the test performances required herein. Test data may be submitted in printed form from the manufacturer's standard printed material; however, if requested, Contractor shall submit specific performance test information as certified by independent laboratory analysis (as furnished by the manufacturer to support performance claims). B. Samples: ' 1. Submit samples of the selected colors and textures for Architect's review as identified in Appendix A. Provide for each sample a listing of materials and the application for each coat of material. .2. On. 12" x 12" hardboard, provide three samples of each color and texture to ' simulate actual conditions. Resubmit samples as requested by Architect until acceptable. 3. On concrete masonry provide three 4" square samples of masonry for each color/texture. ' 4. On actual wall surfaces and other interior building components duplicate finishes as selected on at least 100 sq. ft. of surface, as directed, until acceptable sample is obtained; simulate finished lighting conditions for review of in-place work. 5. Final acceptance of finish will be from samples applied on the job. ' 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Provide primers and other undercoat materials which are 1 produced or are specifically recommended by the same manufacturer as the finish materials to ensure compatibility of the system. Use thinners approved by the coating manufacturer, and use only within recommended limits. ' B. Certified Applicator: Applicator shall submit to Architect documentation indicating that Applicator has been trained and is certified approved as an installer for manufacturer's materials. ' 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to job site in original, new and unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and following information: Name or title of materials; manufacturer's stock and/or batch number and date of manufacture; contents of containers and storage instructions; application instructions; color name and number. B. Store materials not in active use in tightly covered containers. Maintain containers in a clean condition, free from foreign materials and residue. C. Protect from freezing and maintain temperatures below 100 degrees F. Keep materials stored in an orderly and organized manner to reduce the risk of error. Do not stack ' materials more than three containers high. Protect from fire hazards and health hazards. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ VENETIAN STUCCO FINISH DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09940-1 II SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ' ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 1.05 SCHEDULING AND COORDINATION A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the work of those trades for interface with the work of this Section. Coordinate schedules for installation of the work of this Section with schedules for other installations, to assure orderly progress of the total construction sequence. B. Coordination of Work: Review other sections of these Specifications in which prime paints, raw substrates, or other substances might be present to ensure compatibility of total coatings systems. Upon request from other trades, furnish information or characteristics of coating materials provided for use, to ensure compatible substrate materials and finishes are used. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIAL TYPE AND MANUFACTURER A. Furnish products of one of the following Manufacturers, except as approved by the Architect, subject to compliance with Specification requirements: 1. Seneca Architectural Products, 4010 East Raymond Street, Phoenix, AZ 85040, 602-470-1770. 2. Ora B. Hopper & Son, Inc., 302 South 30th Street, Phoenix, Arizona 85034; (602) 273-1338; Fax (602) 275-5933. 3. 4th Generation, (602) 307-5992, Fax (602) 420-9939. B.. Material Quality: Finished and fully cured (28 days) materials shall have the following minimum performance characteristics: Barcoll Hardness Index ASTM -E84 Flame Spread Smoke Contribution Federal Aviation Agency Vertical Burn Test #FAR 25.853(b) Scrubability: 200 strokes of stiff brush with soap and water Solvent Resistance: (1 hour soak) Water Detergent Ethanol Naptha Ammonium Hydroxide Ethelene Glycol Bleach (household) 409 Cleaner Paint Remover Mineral spirits Stain Resistance: (10 hour soak and wash with 409 Cleaner and water) Water Blood Urine Coffee Tea Blueberry Mustard DFD ARCHITECTURE DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 35.0 or greater 8.5 or less ASTM E84 7.0 or less 01 seconds or less 0.001 inches erosion or less No change No change No change No change Slight softening No change Slight softening Slight softening Surface softening No change No stain visible No stain visible No stain visible No stain visible No stain visible No stain visible No stain visible C-SPECS'rm/ VENETIAN STUCCO FINISH SECTION 09940-2 ' SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas ' GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 Mildew Resistance: No visible mildew after incubation for thirty days in 95 degrees F and 90% relative humidity under high contamination conditions. This test exceeds standard Military Specification MIL 8 10B. Color Pigments:All pigments shall be metal oxides containing not more than 0.06% lead based upon total dry finish weight. They shall ' be pure, non -fading. Color Selection: -As selected by Architect ' Texture Selection: Match Designer's sample. C. Other Materials: Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect. ' PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which the work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Apply materials only when surface temperature is between 65 and 100 degrees F. If dry conditions cause rapid drying of materials before proper finishes can be complete, eliminate breezes, fans, or other air movements which contribute to the problem and if necessary dampen the substrate with finely misted water just prior to application. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: 1. General: Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as herein specified, for each particular substrate condition. ' 2. Remove hardware, hardware accessories, machined surface, plates, lighting fixtures, and similar items in place and not to be finish coated, or provide masking or other protection prior to surface coating operations. Following completion of coating of each space or area, reinstall removed items. 3. Clean surfaces to be coated before applying any materials. Remove oil and grease prior to mechanical cleaning. Program cleaning and coating so that contaminants from cleaning process will not fall into wet or newly coated surfaces. 4. Cementitious Materials: Prepare cementitious surfaces of concrete, concrete block, cement and lime plaster, and gypsum board to be coated by removing efflorescent, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and waxes (form release agents). Fill and float smooth all holes, honeycombs, joints, seams, and other imperfections sufficient to prevent visibility in the finished coating. Apply one coat of a good quality block filler to concrete block. Dampen dry plaster and concrete surfaces just prior to installation of materials but wipe away any active condensation or water sufficient to cause a wet glaze. 5. Ferrous Metals: Clean free of oil and surface contaminants with non -petroleum based solvent. Prime all bare metal surfaces with a good quality rust inhibiting primer prior to application of any acrylic coating materials. 6. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean free of oil and surface contaminants with non - petroleum based solvent. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ VENETIAN STUCCO FINISH ' DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09940-3 , SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 , B. Materials Preparation: 1. Stir materials before application with a power drill and a drywall compound paddle. Stir at approximately 350 RPM for three minutes while removing material ' from all sides and bottom of the container. Stir only as much material as will be used in a four hour period or restir material left sitting in excess of four hours. Retain lid on containers until the material is in actual use. Do not leave containers open for more than one hour. If hardened material accumulates on the sides of the container, remove the material to a clean container before use. 2. Thinning: Coating materials come premixed wet and with color already in the container. Should storage or shipping expose materials to excessively high or low temperatures viscosity may be effected. Thinning may be done with small , amounts of water. See manufacturer's written instructions for thinning information. Materials which have been thinned by excess heat may be corrected by allowing the temperature to stabilize below 80 degrees F. 3. Protection: Protect work of other trades, whether to be coated or not, against , damage by coating work. Correct any damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and refinishing, as acceptable to Architect. 3.03 INSTALLATION ' A. General: Install the work of this Section in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations and pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, anchoring components firmly into position for long life under hard use. ' B. Apply coating materials in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations as required to achieve the appearance of the approved samples and performance as specified herein. Coating materials shall be used as a system which may include primers or undercoatings as required by the manufacturer's installation directions. C. Final dry film thickness shall be a minimum average of 25 mils. Coat surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. ' D. For finishes which require primer: Apply acrylic coating manufacturer furnished primer with a 1/4 to 3/8 inch nap pint roller at a coverage rate of 240 square feet per gallon. Allow to cure until firmly set (usually 1 to 2 hours). , E. For finishes which require undercoat: Primer and undercoat are not used simultaneously. Apply undercoat at a rate of 250 square feet per five gallon pail. Apply with a hopper spray to achieve visible coverage. Wet film material should be approximately 20 mils thick. Apply undercoat to a uniform level finish without holidays or runs. F. Apply finish coat(s) in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and training until all finishes match quality samples previously approved by Architect. ' G. Completed work shall be uniform in appearance and coverage. It shall be free of holidays, laps, spotting, tool marks, runs, sags, or other surface imperfections. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove masking tape and clean all adjacent surfaces at the end of each work day. Do ' not leave tape or waste materials in place for more than 36 hours. B. Upon completion of this portion of the work, promptly clean exposed portions and remove traces of dirt, grease and foreign materials. 3.05 DAMAGE AND REPAIR A. Touch up: Upon completion of the installation, visually check exposed surfaces of the ' work of this Section, and touch up scratches and abrasives to be completely invisible to the unaided eye from a distance of five feet. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ VENETIAN STUCCO FINISH DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09940-4 ' SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect finishes from casual impact for a period of 48 hours after installation. Protect from heavy traffic for a period of at least 3 days. Protect all surfaces and adjacent areas not intended to be coated and clean immediately any spillage, droppings, or other extraneous contact of the materials with other surfaces. END OF SECTION r DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ VENETIAN STUCCO FINISH DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 09940-5 ' SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas - - GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 SECTION 10200 ' LOUVERS PART1 GENERAL ' 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit Drawings showing dimensions and installation details. ' B.- Product Data: Submit data indicating design characteristics. C. Samples: Submit samples of finish and of each color. D. Certification: Submit certified AMCA rating. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Certification: Louvers shall be tested and rated in accordance with AMCA Standard 500. 1.0.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING ' A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in Manufacturer's original unopened packaging with labels intact.. ' B. Storage: Adequately protect against damage while stored at the site. C. Handling: Comply with Manufacturer's instructions. 1.04 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Take site dimensions affecting this Work. I PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS ' A. Furnish products of one of the following Manufacturers, except as approved by the Architect, subject to compliance with Specification requirements: 1. Airolite ' 2. Airstream Products Div., Penn Ventilator 3. Construction Specialties, Inc. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: Extruded; ASTM B 221, 6063-T52 alloy and temper. B. Louvers: Sight -proof, 6 inches deep, minimum 0.081 inch thick with reinforcing bosses ' fully welded to extruded aluminum channel shape frame minimum 0.081 inch thick to provide a rigid and square self supporting unit with concealed mullions as required per span and as indicated. . C. Bird Screen: 0.063 inch diameter interwoven aluminum wire mesh, 1/2 inch square ' design in aluminum frame. D. Insect Screen: 18 x 16 size, aluminum mesh. E. Aluminum Finishes: 1. After fabrication of doors and frames prepare the aluminum surfaces for finishing in accordance with the aluminum producer's recommendations and standards of the finisher or processor. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/LOUVERS ' DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 10200-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 2. Process components of each assembly simultaneously to attain complete uniformity of color. 3. Finish: 70% Fluoropolymer (PVDF), Kynar 500/Hylar 5000 paint coating conforming with the requirements of AAMA 605.2. 4. Color: As selected by Architect. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental conditions in writing to Architect. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. B. Coordination with other Work: Coordinate with other Work which affects, connects with, or will be concealed by this Work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Separate aluminum from direct contact with dissimilar metals by painting contact surfaces with zinc chromate primer and aluminum paint or with a coat of heavy -bodied bituminous paint or by non-absorptive tape or gasket. B. Install louvers in openings properly aligned and level. C. Secure louver rigid with concealed fasteners of non -corrosive metals to suit abutting materials. D. Set and tie in to flashings to ensure diversion of moisture to exterior. E. Install screens fixed to interior side of louver. END OF SECTION DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/LOUVERS DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 10200-2 , SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 SECTION 10350 FLAGPOLES PART GENERAL ' 1.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: Comply with National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturer's "Guide Specifications for the Design of Metal Flagpoles," Standard FP -1. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit Drawings showing sizes, finishes, methods of installation and accessories. B. Samples: Submit samples showing material and finish. ' 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in Manufacturer's original unopened ' packaging with labels intact. Protect finished surfaces with removable wrapping or coating which will not bond when exposed to sunlight. B. Storage: Adequately protect against damage while stored at the site. ' PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Furnish products of one of the following Manufacturers, except as approved by the Architect, subject to compliance with Specification requirements. 1. American Flagpole Division, Kearney -National 2. Baartol 3. Concord Industries ' 2.02 FLAGPOLES A. Pole: Cone tapered aluminum ground set of seamless cold drawn ASTM 8241, 6063-T6 aluminum tubing with 0.188 inch wall thickness. Height as indicated on Drawings. B. Accessories: Equip pole with 14 gage aluminum, 6 inch diameter ball, two #10 multi- filament braided polypropylene halyards, 9 inch aluminum cleats, bronze snaphooks, 2 per halyard and cast aluminum flash collar. Provide pole with cast aluminum lockbox to cover halyards and cleats. C. Finish: Manufacturer's standard clear anodized finish, meeting AA M32 -C22 -A41. D. Foundation: 16 gage corrugated galvanized foundation tube with self -centering bottom ' plate and wedges and lightning protector ground spikes, as shown on Drawings. E. Concrete: 3000 psi unless otherwise noted on Drawings, meeting requirements of Section 03300. PART 3 EXECUTION ' 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions' Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental conditions in writing to Architect. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. ' DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/FLAGPOLES DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-0773 SECTION 10350-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coat metal sleeve surfaces below grade and surfaces in contact with dissimilar materials with asphaltic paint. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install flagpole, base assembly, and fittings in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. B. Electrically ground flagpole installation. C. Install foundation plate and centering wedges for flagpole base set in concrete and fasten. Fill foundation tube sleeve with sand and compact. D. Allow concrete to cure at least 14 days before erecting pole. 3.03 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. END OF SECTION DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS rm/FLAGPOLES DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 10350-2 1 C 1 1� 1 11 1 i SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 SECTION 10400 SIGNAGE PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior identification signage. 1.02. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's brochures indicating materials and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Show sizes of members, method of construction, copy layout, and mounting details for proper mounting. Furnish template for mounting metal letters. C. Samples: Furnish full size rubbing prior to casting plaque. Submit sample letter and anchoring device. Submit selection of aluminum plaque finishes for Architect's approval. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the following: 1. ANSI A117.1 "Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People." 2. Public Law 101-336 "The Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (ADA). 3. ADA Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG). 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in Manufacturer's original unopened packaging with labels intact. B. Storage and Protection: Store items in dry, protected areas. Adequately protect against damage while stored at the site. Keep free of corrosion or other damage. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions shown on Drawings by taking field measurements. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Furnish products of one of the following Manufacturers, except as approved by the Construction Manager, subject to compliance with Specification requirements: 1. Plastic Signage: a. Best Manufacturing Company b. Vomar Products, Inc. C. Signsource d. Mountain States Specialties 2.02 MATERIALS A. Materials shall be new stock, free from defects, imperfections strength, durability, and appearance. Provide materials as shown and detailed on drawings and as specified herein. ' DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/SIGNAGE DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 10400-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 B. Fasteners: Use concealed fasteners fabricated from metals that are not corrosive to the sign material and mounting surface. C. Tape: VHB (very high bond) double -stick foam tape as manufactured by 3M. 2.03 PLASTIC SIGNAGE A. Interior Signage: All interior signage shall comply with applicable ADA requirements. 1. Base: Melamine plastic laminate, 1/8 inch thick, rated non -static, fire retardant and self extinguishing. a. Colors: As selected by Architect and in accordance with local and Federal requirements b. Mounting: Screw attach to wall or door or door frame as indicated by Construction Manager. Minimum 2 screws per sign. Height shall be 60 inches above finish floor to centerline of sign at wall mounted signs.. C. Finish and contrast: (1) Matte finish. (2) Characters shall contrast with. background by at least 20 percent. 2. Letters and Braille characters: a. Raised 1/32 inch upper case, sans serif or simple serif, and accompanied with Grade 2 Braille. Raised characters shall be at least 5/8 inch high, but not higher than 2 inches. b. Letters and numbers: Width -to -height ratio from 3:5 to 1:1, and stroke width -to -height ratio from 1:5 to 1:10. C. Text: Required quantity of each sign shall be as directed by Architect. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental conditions in writing to Construction Manager. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. B. Coordination: Coordinate with other Work which affects, connects with, or will be concealed by this Work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate sign units and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of the type described and in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions. B. Install plumb and level in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. C. Securely fasten wall mounted items to solid backing. D. Wall Mounted Panel Signs: Attach panel signs to wall surfaces using the methods indicated below: E. Silicone -Adhesive Mounting: Use liquid silicone adhesive recommended by the sign manufacturer to attach sign units. Use double -sided vinyl tape where recommended by the sign manufacturer to hold the sign in place until the adhesive has fully cured. F. Double -Stick Tape Mounting: Clean surfaces to be joined and apply double stick tape to back of wall mounted signage in continuous strips at approximate 2 inch center to center spacing between strips. Apply sign to wall surface taking care to properly align and plumb signage before removing release paper. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/SIGNAGE ' DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 10400-2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 3.03 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion of the Work, remove excess materials, equipment and debris and dispose of away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. DFD ARCHITECTURE DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 END OF SECTION C -SPECS TM/SIGNAGE SECTION 10400-3 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 SECTION 10500 ' LOCKERS PART GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit Drawings showing layout and installation details. ' B. Samples: Submit 2 samples or color chart for color selection. 1.02 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in Manufacturer's original unopened packaging with labels intact. - ' B. Storage and Protection: Adequately protect against damage while stored at the site. 1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS ' A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions shown on Drawings by taking field measurements. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Furnish products of one of the following Manufacturers, except as approved by the Architect, subject to compliance with Specification requirements: 1. Lyon Metal Products 2. Republic Storage Systems ' 2.02 LOCKERS A. Type: Standard one-person 12 inches x 18 inches x 36, double tier, with one shelf, one double -prong and three single -prong hooks. B. Body of the lockers to be 24 gage steel. Doors and door frames and end of row uprights for non -recessed lockers to be 16 gage steel. Doors to have louvers top and bottom. C. Provide consecutively numbered embossed number plates for each locker. E. Provide latching device with recessed handle with padlock attachment. ' F. Base: Closed front and ends, 6 inches high. G. Finish: Baked -on enamel, color as selected by Architect from Manufacturer's standard colors. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: 1. Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental conditions in writing ' 'to Architect. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. 2. Verify that prepared bases are in correct position and properly sized. 1 DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS Tm/LOCKERS ' DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 10500-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Assemble and install lockers in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations and approved Shop Drawings. B. Install plumb and square and bolt units together. Secure to substrate with suitable anchors to resist 100 pounds pullout force. C. Touch up minor blemishes as approved. Verify that doors and latches operate easily and properly. 3.03 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. END OF SECTION DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/LOCKERS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 10500-2 1 F 1 L 11 SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 SECTION 10520 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's data and installation instructions for each item, including dimensions and anchorage details. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply with ANSI/UL 92 and 711. B. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to ANSI/NFPA 10 and the following: 1. ANSI A117.1 "Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People." 2. Public Law 101-336 "The Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (ADA). 3. ADA Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG). PART2 PRODUCTS 21.61 MANUFACTURERS A. Furnish products of one of the following Manufacturers, except as approved by the Architect, subject to compliance with Specification requirements: 1. Larsen's Manufacturing Co. 2. J.L. Industries 3. General 4. Knox 5. Supra Products Co. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. Multi -Purpose Dry Chemical Extinguisher: 1. Capacity and UL Rating: 5 lbs., 2A-10B:C unless otherwise required by Code. 2. Tank: DOT approved steel cylinder. 3. Metal valves and siphon tube. 4. Replaceable molded valve stem seal. 5. Pressure gauge. B. Wall Bracket: Manufacturer's standard J -type for wall hung extinguishers. C. Fire Extinguisher Cabinet: 1. Model 2409.R1, Architectural Series as manufactured by Larsen's is acceptable. 2. Trim Style and Projection: Recessed, 5/16". 3. Inside box dimensions: 24 x 9-1/2 x 5 minimum. 4. Door: a. Solid b. Trim and Door (Steel): One piece, constructed of cold -rolled steel with prime coat for field applied finish as specified in Section 09900. Doors to be tubular, hollow -metal design. 5. Cabinet Signage: Vertical lettering "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" on door; color red. 6. Cabinet Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet. 5 ' DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 10520-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 15, 1999 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental conditions in writing to Architect. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. B. Coordination: Coordinate with other Work which affects, connects with, or will be concealed by this Work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install items in accordance with Manufacturer's directions. Install cabinets plumb and level at heights shown on Drawings. B. Comply with regulatory requirements and anchor securely. C. Verify that extinguishers are charged and tagged. D. Place extinguishers in cabinets and on wall brackets. 3.03 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. END OF SECTION DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES ' DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 10520-2 1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas ' GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 SECTION 10534 CAR SHELTERS PART 1 GENERAL ' 1.01 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. .Design Criteria: Steel car shelters shall be engineered to withstand the following ' minimum loads: 1. Seismic: Zone II 2. Dead Load: 10 psf 3. Roof Live Load: 20 psf ' 4. Wind Load: 15 psf 5. Soil Bearing: 1500 psf B. Application for Design Loads: Design loads shall be applied to the steel bent base plate ' and anchor points. 1.02 SUBMITTALS ' A. Shop Drawings: Submit Drawings for fabrication and erection of car shelter assemblies, which are not completely shown by Manufacturer's data sheets, certified and sealed by an Structural Engineer registered in the State of Arizona. Include plans and elevations, details ,of sections and connections showing anchorage and accessory items. B. Test Reports: Submit two copies of applicable testing reports. C. Engineering Calculations: Submit three copies of design calculations for foundations and ' structure certified and sealed by an Structural Engineer registered in the State of Arizona. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Manufacturer shall have not less than 5 years experience in manufacturing steel car shelter structures consisting of prefabricated, pre-engineered, full cantilevered design for Projects of equivalent size and complexity as required by the Drawings and Specifications. - ' B. Installer's Qualifications: Installer shall submit evidence of not less than 5 years experience installing pre-engineered car shelters. ' C. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Metal Building Manufacturer's Association (MBMA) "Recommended Design Practices Manual". 2. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) "Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings." 3. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) "Specification for the Design of Cold - Formed Steel Structural Members." D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with UBC and local building code as applicable. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in Manufacturer's original unopened packaging with labels intact. Protect finished surfaces with removable wrapping or coating which will not bond when exposed to sunlight. B. Storage: Adequately protect against damage while stored at the site. Store out of ' contact with ground and provide air circulation. DFD ARCHITECTURE ' C -SPECS TM/CAR SHELTERS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 10534-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ' ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 A. Furnish products of one of the following Manufacturers, except as approved by the Architect, subject to compliance with Specification requirements: 1. George & Sons Steel, Inc., Phoenix, AZ. 2. U.S. Prefab, Inc., Glendale, AZ. B. Specification is based on prefabricated, pre-engineered, "No -Post" full cantilever steel car shelter structures as manufactured by U.S. Prefab Inc., Glendale, AZ. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Structural Steel: ASTM A36. B. Structural Sheet Steel: ASTM A446 zinc -coated galvanized by hot -dip process. C. Sheet Steel: ASTM A525, G90. D. Steel Tubes: ASTM A500, Grade B, hot -dip galvanized. E. Bolts: ASTM A307 or A449 as required by design and structural analysis. Use of A325 or A490 bolts shall conform to the requirements of AISC Specifications. F. Sleeves: Machined from solid steel to meet the requirements of ASTM A 500, Grade B (FY=42 KSI). G. Purlin Seats and Fittings: Fabricated from ASTM A36 hot rolled steel. H. Paint: Factory applied baked polyester for roof deck and trim, and rust -inhibitive primer for structural steel. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Provide prefabricated carport structures of rigid frame, cantilever type, with frames constructed of steel. Include purlins, metal trim shapes, bolts, fasteners, and corrugated galvanized steel roof covering. Size members per design requirements. B. Provide structure with dimensions and roof slope as indicated. Frame and covering may be matched and prepunched to receive fasteners, or drilling of holes for fasteners may be performed in field. 2.04 FINISHING A. Clean ferrous surfaces of oil, grease, loose rust, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances and shop prime. Prime in accord with Manufacturer's standards. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental conditions in writing to Architect. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. ' B. Erector shall examine supports, work areas and conditions under which the Work is to be installed prior to assembly and erection. If conditions are unsatisfactory, erection shall not proceed until satisfactory corrections have been made. ' DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/CAR SHELTERS DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 10534-2 ' SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install steel car shelters and related accessories in accordance with the Manufacturer's Erection Drawings and recommendations. B. Set anchor bolts accurately by template while concrete is in a plastic state. Provide uniform bearing under base plates and sill members using a nonshrink grout when necessary. Calk base plate to foundation with sealant. Space members accurately to assure proper fitting of covering. As erection progresses, fasten and brace Work to resist dead load and wind and erection stresses. C. Isolate dissimilar materials by means of gaskets or isolating compounds. Plug improper or mislocated drill holes with an oversize screw fastener or with a gasketed washer. Sheets with an excess of holes or with holes in critical locations will be rejected. Keep exposed surfaces clean and free from sealants and foreign materials. D. Install framing true to line, level and plumb. E. Take adequate care during the erection sequences to insure members are not positioned by force or erected in a manner which causes secondary stresses. F. Provide adequate temporary bracing and supports to insure the structures stability during erection. G. Retain protective wrap on prefinished metal trim and accessories through the erection process. H. Completed structures shall comply with approved erection tolerances and Shop Drawing requirements. 3.03 PROTECTION A. During erection and until inspection, protect the structure from damage. B. Remove bent or distorted members and replace with new, undamaged members. C. Upon completion and inspection, protect the car shelter from damage during the remainder of construction on the Project and until Owner acceptance. 3.04 INSPECTION A. Completed steel car shelter structure shall be inspected by trained representative of the Manufacturer and certified by the Manufacturer that the finished product has been manufactured and erected in accordance with Manufacturer's approved erection Drawings and the Contract Documents. 3.05 CLEANING A.. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. B. Touch up paints immediately after assembly. Apply air dry touch up paint to damaged finish material handling and/or erection of the car shelter. END OF SECTION ' DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/CAR SHELTERS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 105343 1 r 1 t r SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 SECTION 10810 TOILET ACCESSORIES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the following: 1. ANSI A117.1 "Making 'Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People." 2. Public Law 101-336 "The Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (ADA). 3. ADA Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG). 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit Drawings and brochures of toilet accessory items showing sizes, construction and mounting techniques. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in Manufacturer's original unopened packaging with labels intact. Protect finished surfaces with removable wrapping or coating which will not bond when exposed to sunlight. B. Storage: Adequately protect against damage while stored at site. C. Handling: Comply with Manufacturer's instructions. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Toilet accessories shall be products of one of the following Manufacturers, except as approved by the Architect, subject to compliance with Specification requirements. -1. Bobrick Washroom Equipment Co., Inc. ,2. Bradley Corporation 3. Gamco 2.02 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel: AISI, Type 302/304, with satin No. 4 finish. Unless specified or indicated, the use of other stainless steel alloys. B. Sheet Steel: Cold rolled, commercial quality, ASTM A366. Surface preparation and metal pretreatment as required for applied finish. C. Chromium Plating: Nickel and chromium electro -deposited on metal, ASTM 8456, Type SC 2. D. Mirror Glass: FS DD -G-451, Type I, Class 1, Quality 1, 1/4 inch (thick, with silver coating, copper protective coating, and non-metallic paint covering. E. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A123, hot -dip galvanized after fabrication. F. Locks: Tumbler type, keyed alike unless specified otherwise. G. Fasteners: Theft -proof screws. Use no adhesive mountings. H. Backing Plates: 16 gage cold -rolled steel for mounting grab bars in stud partitions. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/TOILET ACCESSORIES DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 10810-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ' ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 2.03 TOILET ACCESSORIES A. Grab Bars: Bobrick B-6209.99, stainless steel, 1-1/2 inches diameter, 42 inches long, concealed mounting, peened non -slip finish, in sizes and locations as shown on Drawings. Grab bars shall support at least 900 pounds. Furnish with concealed anchors and anchor plates suited to grab bar location. B. Paper Towel Dispensers and Disposal: Bobrick B-3944 and B-38034. C. Mirrors: Bobrick B-290/1830 stainless steel frame. Provide mirror above lavatory in toilet rooms and as indicated on the Drawings. D. Toilet Paper Dispenser: Bobrick B-2840; remove stop pins. E. Toilet Paper Dispenser and Sanitary Napkin Disposal: Bobrick B-35701 at handicap stall, and B-3570, wall recessed, elsewhere as required. F. Recessed Soap Dispenser: Bobrick B-822 lavatory or counter mounted, stainless steel piston and spout. G. Hat and Coat Hook: Bobrick B-682. H. Sanitary Napkin Disposal: Bobrick B-354 or B-3544 as required. I. Toilet Seat Cover Dispenser: Bobrick B-221. J. Shower Curtain Rod: Bobrick B-6047, stainless steel. K. Shower Curtain: Bobrick 204-2, with 204-1 hooks. L. Shelf with Mop and Broom Holders: Bobrick B-224 x 30 inches. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental conditions in writing to Architect. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. B. Coordination with other Work: Coordinate with other Work which affects, connects with, or will be concealed by this Work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install items in accordance with Manufacturer's published instructions and approved installation drawings in locations as shown on Drawings, and in compliance with ANSI A117.1 as applicable. B. Secure toilet room accessories to adjacent walls and partitions in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions for each item and each type of substrate construction and as follows: 1. Attachment to Toilet Partitions: Secure at screw attachment point with sheet metal screws furnished by Manufacturer or by 3/16 inch diameter through -bolts. 2. Attachments of Recessed Accessories: Place shims between framing and cabinet at screw attachment points. 3. Attachment of Surface Mounted Accessories: At stud walls, provide concealed blocking or backing at screw points to allow attachments with No. 18 x 1-1/2 inch sheet metal screws. At solid walls, rawl plugs, expansion shields or toggle bolts shall be provided. Mirrors shall be locked to wall hangers by tightening locking screws concealed in lower frame. Soap dispensers shall be mounted with 4 inch clearance from filler top to underside of any horizontal projection. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/TOILET ACCESSORIES DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 10810-2 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 C. Grab Bars: 1. Framed wall construction: Install concealed anchor plates to studs. Attachment to studs must be sufficient to withstand a horizontal pull of 300 pounds. Accurately position and fasten before wall finish is applied. After wall surface is finished, secure concealed mounting plate to anchor plate using stainless steel machine screws furnished by the Manufacturer. 2. Toilet Compartments: Through -bolted connection to anchors. D. Seal wall penetrations with sealant as specified in Section 07900 to prevent moisture penetration through joints around fixtures. Jt 3.03 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. END OF SECTION ' DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/TOILET ACCESSORIES DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 10810-3 I SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 SECTION 11235 MISTING SYSTEM PART GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Misting system and related work. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Project Requirements: Mist system shall be designed to provide mist on all three sides of shade structure, with nozzles every 24" on center. System shall operate at 1,200 psi. Pump module to be installed on roof and tubing to be concealed as much as possible. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit in accordance with the requirements of Section 01340 - Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers literature describing products required for the Work, together with specifications recommended by manufacturer. 1�. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Subcontractor qualifications: Perform the work of this Section using a subcontractor having at least 5 years experience in this type of work and in projects of this size. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. 1.05 MAINTENANCE A. Maintenance Agreement: Installer shall provide a maintenance and service agreement for monthly service for a 3 year period, stating guaranteed costs, for future spring start- ups and fall shutdowns for review by Owner upon project closeout. Monthly service shall include: 1. Cleaning and changing filters. 2. Changing pump oil 3. Cleaning and changing nozzles. 4. Adjusting nozzle atomization to customers choice. 5. Year end shutdown (back flush system). 6. Spring start up (tune, readjust pressure). B. Owner shall reserve the option of accepting or rejecting maintenance agreement. C. Spare equipment and tools: Provide one nozzle cleaning tool and 5 spare nozzles. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Specifications are based upon products manufactured by The Island Company, Las Vegas, NV (702) 364-2443. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/MISTING SYSTEM DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 11235-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Aluminum Channel to conceal atomization line. B. Stainless Steel Ball Valve for individual trellis control. C. Nozzle Spacing: 24 inches on center with multi -flow heads. D. Pump Module: 1. Pressure: 1200 psi. 2. Rate: 2 GPM 3. Electrical Requirements: 110/115 Volt, 20 amp. E. Water Feed Line: 3/4 inch. F. Accessories, connectors and fasteners: As required. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report in writing with a copy to Architect, conditions detrimental to Work. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. B. Electrical: 110/115 volt, 20 amp to pump location. C. Plumbing: 3/4" water supply to pump with ball valve. D. Installer shall verify that water inlet volume, pressure and supply line size are adequate for system. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install misting system in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and as follows: B. Nozzles shall surround all sides of covered area and shall point outward to create a cool air curtain around covered area. C. Pump shall be securely mounted at location indicated on drawings. D. Electrical connections from panel to pump, remote switch for pump shall be provided in accordance with requirements shown on shop drawings. E. Water supply shall be provided in accordance with requirements shown on shop drawings. END OF SECTION DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/MISTING SYSTEM DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 11235-2 f SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG I ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 SECTION 13121 a PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDINGS PART GENERAL 1.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: 1. Building structure frame types: a. Clear span rigid frame (solid web or open web rafter) type with straight or tapered sections designed in accordance with AISC Type 1 construction. Roof slope: As indicated on Drawings. Column bases: Designed as pin connected. b. Clear span frames (solid web or open web rafter) with straight column sections designed in accordance with AISC Type II construction. Column bases: Designed as pin connected. C. Multi -span rigid frame (solid web or open web rafter) with straight or tapered sections designed in accordance with AISC Type 1 construction. Interior column spacing: As indicated on the Drawings. Column bases: Designed as pin connected. 2. Design of structural steel sections and welded plate members: Based on applicable AISC Specifications as determined by the manufacturer. 3. Light -gage, cold -formed structural members and exterior coverings: Base design on applicable sections of AISI Specifications as determined by the manufacturer. 4. Steel bar joists: Base design on SJI standards. 5. Design of primary and secondary structural framing as well as roof and wall covering: In accordance with manufacturer's standard and based on provisions of the specified code. 6. Primary and secondary structural framing as well as roof and wall covering: Designed for applicable loads and combinations of these loads as indicated in MBMA Design Manual. 7. Bracing in the plane of the roof and vertical wall bracing: Round rods or angle bracing as determined by the building manufacturer. Bracing: Located such that it does not interfere with window or door openings. a. In walls where cross bracing interferes with openings, portal braces or portal frames may be used. 8. Design Loads: Design in accordance with 1998 edition of California Building Code. a. Live Load: 20 PSF with tributary area reduction. b. Wind Load: Basic Wind Velocity: 70 MPH C. Seismic Load: Zone 4 9. Deflections: a. Live Load: Roof Purlins: Span/150 Roof Joist Span/240 b. Wind Load: Wind Girt Span/240 10. Connections: a. Bolted moment connections: Design in accordance with accepted industry standards utilizing flush plate design methods or extended plate design methods as determined by the manufacturer. b. Field connections, made with high strength bolts: Made in accordance with AISC structural joint specifications. Recommended method of ` installation: "Turn -of -Nut" method. 11. Foundations: a. Foundation loads, anchor bolt diameters, and anchor bolt patterns: Determined by the building manufacturer. Footing sizes, anchor bolt lengths, and method of transferring lateral and uplift forces from the anchor bolts to the concrete foundation: Determined by the Structural Engineer. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDINGS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 13121-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 12. Metal siding and roofing: Design for loads in accordance with the referenced code. B. Performance Requirements: 1. Metal siding and roofing: Designed, fabricated and erected to withstand the loading conditions without loss of weathertightness without permanent distortion and without damage to any part of the installation. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, design data and erection instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings showing layout, dimensions and construction details. C. Samples: Submit samples showing roof and wall panel material and finish. D. Certificates: Submit manufacturer certification that products furnished meet specification requirements. E. Contract Closeout Submittals: Submit the following in accordance with Section 01770. 1. Project Record Documents: 2. Operating and Maintenance: a. Warranty: 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Steel fabricators: Engaged in steel fabrication for the past 10 years; have ICBO approval as a steel fabricator, and. be a member of the Metal Building Manufacturers Association; have on staff a qualified Professional Engineer registered in the State of Arizona in charge of engineering 2. Welders: AWS Certified in the positions and type of welding they will be performing during fabrication. 3. Erection: By an erector with a minimum of 5 years experience in the erection of pre-engineered buildings. B. Regulatory Requirements: Current edition of the following codes and standards apply: AAMA Specification for Prime Windows AISC Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts AISC Manual of Steel Construction, Allowable Stress Design AISC Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings AISI Cold -Formed Steel Design Manual AWS D1.1 Structural Welding code SJI Recommended code of Standard Practice for Steel Joists and Girders SDI 100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames MBMA Metal Building Systems Code of Standard Practice MBMA Recommended Design Practices Manual UBC Uniform Building Code (1988 or 1991 Edition) 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original unopened packaging with labels intact. Protect finished surfaces with removable wrapping or coating which will not bond when exposed to sunlight. B. Storage: Adequately protect against damage while stored at the site. C. Handling: Comply with manufacturer's instructions. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDINGS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 13121-2 iJ SASC inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 1.06 WARRANTY A.. Furnish 3 -year warranty covering materials and workmanship, and manufacturer's standard warranty covering weather -tightness. r PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Furnish products of one of the following manufacturers, except as approved by the Owner, subject to compliance with specifications requirements: 1. Varco-Pruden Buildings Div.m United Dominion Industries. B. Specifications are based on Varco-Pruden Buildings. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Structural: 1. Structural steel: Generally conform to ASTM A529, ASTM A572, and ASTM A36. 2. Cold -formed structural steel: Generally conform to ASTM A570 or A607 and have a minimum yield strength of 50 KSI. 3. Bolts and nuts: Conform to ASTM A325 for high strength bolts, and ASTM A307 for common bolts. 4. Anchor bolts: Designed using allowable loads of A36 threaded parts per AISC. B. Metal Roofing and Siding: 1. Roofing: As specified in Section 07610 2. Siding: As indicated on. Drawings. C. Sealants, Mastics and Closures: 1. Tube sealant: Synthetic elastomer based material which becomes tack -free in less than 2 hours at 75 degrees F., but remains flexible. a. Service range: -30 degrees F. to 160 degrees F. b. Color: Grey or bronze. 2. Tape mastic: Preformed butyl rubber based compound. a. Service range: -30 degrees F. to 160 degrees F. b. Color: White or light grey. 3. Panel closures: Ethylene -Propylene -Diene -Monomer or equivalent closed cell strips formed to match panel configuration. E. Insulation: 1. Roof Insulation: a. Insulation: Consist of 0.6 pcf density fiberglass blankets installed over purlins/joists. Blanket tabs: Attached to each other by pull-through and staple methods. Vapor integrity provided by faced fiberglass blankets. b. Facing: Unfaced. 2. Wall Insulation: a. Insulation shall consist of fiberglass blankets between the wall girts and wall sheeting. Blanket tabs shall be attached to each other by pull- through and staple methods. Vapor integrity must be provided by a laminated facing. b. . Facing: 1 Exposed: Vinyl -Scrim -Polyester 2. Concealed: Unfaced F. Roof Vents: 1. 10 -foot ridge vents with 9 -inch or 12 -inch diameter throat as required. Vents shall be fabricated by a recognized manufacturer and shall include necessary flashing to make them weather -tight. 2. Factory painted and factory assembled units complete with bird screen and cord operated damper. Each vent to provide minimum of 620 CFM air movement at a temperature differential of 10 degrees. Vents: Fabricated by a recognized manufacturer and include necessary flashing for weather -tightness. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDINGS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 13121-3 SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 G. Doors and Frames: 1. Personnel doors: 1-3/4 inches thick, and constructed of 20 gage galvanized steel in accordance with SDI 100. Provide 18 gage face sheets for mortise locks and exit devices. 2. Door frames: 16 gage pressed galvanized steel with reinforced and mitered corners. 3. Finish: Clean and chemically treat doors and frames for corrosion resistance and good paint adhesion. Apply two coat (prime and finish) baked on finish paint to all exposed surfaces. Prime and finish coat are colors as selected by Architect. 4. Weatherstripping: Weatherstrip openings at jambs, head and sill. Meet or exceed water and air infiltration standards of S.D.I. 115 and S.D.I. 116. 5. Finish hardware: A minimum of (a) one key in -knob cylindrical lockset per opening; (b) one astragal and one pair surface bolts per double door opening and (c) 1-1/2 pair full mortise hinges per leaf. One hinge per door leaf: modified so hinge pin is non -removable when door leaf is in closed position. 6. Hardware preparation: Comply with SDI 100 and locate so door'and frame are non -handed. Doors with cylindrical lock preparation: Type 1, Style 2; doors with mortise lock or panic device preparation: Type 2, Style 2. 7. Specify glass and glazing for doors in accordance with Section 08800. Glazing: Provide flush panel, half glass or narrow lite type, as shown on Drawings. H. Windows: 1. Windows: Manufacturer's standard steel or aluminum frame windows, complete with weatherstripping and accessories. Provide frames and sash with a continuous thermal break. Furnish insect screen for operating vents. 2. Type: AAMA 302. 3. Glazing: As specified in Section 08800. 4. Finish: AAMA 603 pigmented coating. Louvers: 1. Type: Fixed blade type; self -framing self -flashing with integral head. 2. Material: 18 gage galvanized steel with galvanizing conforming to ASTM A525 coating designation G-90 with 1.25 ounces zinc coating per square foot. 3. Provide fixed and operable with exterior mounted, removable insect screen. Operable louvers: Weather-stripped blades and 15 feet of pull chain with dogging clip. Minimum free area, fixed and operable: 65 percent. 4. Finish: Oven baked prime coat and baked enamel finish coat. Color: Manufacturer's standard. K. Plastic Parts: 1. Produced from either fiberglass chopped strand roving reinforced resins, fiberglass woven roving reinforced resins, or 1/8 inch thick thermoformed ABS (Acrylonitrile-Butidene-Styrene) materials. Use for parts such as corner caps, peak caps, and certain facade parts. L. Gutters: 1. Eave gutters: Pre -finished, roll -formed 26 gage including gutter straps, fasteners and joint sealant. 2. Eave gutter downspouts: 4 inches x 5 inches x 10 -foot lengths, downspout elbows and downspout straps, color matched to the wall panel. 3. Multi -gutters and valley gutters: 16 gage, cold -formed steel. Joints are field welded or mechanically fastened. Downspouts are not the responsibility of Varco-Pruden. M. Roof Ventilators: 1. Gravity ventilators: 20 inches diameter throat with damper, operating cord and bird screen; factory assembled. Vent bases: Configured to match the roof panel. Provide insulation retaining ring for the interior when specified. 2. Sectional/continuous ridge gravity ventilators: Provide in 10 -foot lengths with a 9 - inch [12 -inch] throat opening. Fabricate from 24 gage galvalume. Provide damper with chain, worm gear operator and bird screen. Vent base flashings: Design to fit roof panel. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDINGS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 13121-4 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 N. Roof Curbs: 1. Curbs: Welded units fabricated for shingled installation with roof panels. Fabricate from minimum 18 gage Galvalume coated steel. Clean and treat welds with a protective coating compatible with the Galvalume substrate. 2. Exposed curb flanges: Pre -drill for correct fastener locations. Upper and lower curb flanges: Integral welded inside and outside cell closures compatible with the roof panel profile. 3. Provide each curb with support framing compatible with the roof panel and insulation system on which it will be used. Curb framing: Compatible with the thermal expansion and contraction properties of the roof. 4. Finish: Field paint a specified in Section 09900. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Fabrication: Based on approved Drawings in accordance with AISC Code of Standard Practice. B. Prefabricate steel members into subassemblies of the largest practical size suitable for transportation, handling and field erection. Field cutting, welding and drilling shall be kept to the minimum. C. Light gage cold formed sections shall be manufactured by precision roll or brake forming. D. Detail and fabricate structural steel in accordance with the MBMA Code of Standard Practice. E. Detail and fabricate anchor bolt assemblies in accordance with AISC. F. Shop paint items not receiving a factory finish. Shop primer: Nominal 1 mil. thick and conform to Federal Specifications TT -P -664c and TT -P -636c. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental conditions in writing to Owner. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. B. Coordination: Coordinate with other work which affects connects with, th, or well be concealed by this Work. 3.02 ERECTION A. Erect building in accordance with the MBMA Code of Standard Practice. B. Side laps for siding and roofing: one full corrugation. C. Install accessories for roofing or siding as necessary for a complete installation„ and as shown. Provide cutouts and flashing for vents, ventilator ducts,s roof hatches and all �1 other penetrations as shown and required. D. Caulk joints as shown and required for a weathertight installation. Touch up field -cut edges of roofing and siding, including penetrations, with manufacturer's coating compatible with sheet finish. E. Doors and windows: Install in accordance with the manufacturer's directions and approved shop drawings. Install frames to be self -flashing. Doors and windows: operate freely and easily, be properly aligned and balanced, and be true and square with openings. F. Apply sealants, mastics and closures in accordance with manufacturer's directions to ensure a weathertight building. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDINGS �' DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 13121-5 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 G. Fully lubricate operating parts after installation and the assembly tested and adjusted to demonstrate smooth operation to the Owner. 3.03 TOUCH-UP PAINTING A. Structural steel connections and all areas damaged subsequent to shop painting: repaired, cleaned, and touch-up painted, prior to roofing/siding installation. B. Touch up damaged or stained areas of roofing, siding, and accessories with manufacturer's coating in accordance with manufacturer's current published instructions. 3.04 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion of the Work, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave Work in clean. END OF SECTION DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDINGS DFD PROJECT NO. 98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 13121-6 SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 SECTION 13123 CHEMICAL STORAGE BUILDING PART GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Prefabricated chemical storage building as shown on Drawings and as specified herein. 1.02 SUBMITTALS PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Chemical Storage Building: Provide prefabricated steel building, Model #24, as manufactured by Safety Storage , Inc., 800-344-6539. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive work and report detrimental conditions in writing to the Architect. Commencement of work shall be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install prefabricated building on concrete pad as indicated on Drawings and in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 3.03 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion of the Work, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave work in clean condition. END OF SECTION DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/CHEMICAL STORAGE BUILDING DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 13123-1 A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, design data and installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings showing layout, dimensions and construction details. C. Certificates: Submit manufacturer certification that furnished products meet specification requirements. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original unopened packaging with labels intact. Protect finished surfaces with removable wrapping or coating which will not bond when exposed to sunlight. B. Storage: Adequately protect against damage while stored at the site. C. Handling: Comply with manufacturer's instructions. 1.04 WARRANTY r . A. Furnish Manufacturer's standard warranty. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Chemical Storage Building: Provide prefabricated steel building, Model #24, as manufactured by Safety Storage , Inc., 800-344-6539. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive work and report detrimental conditions in writing to the Architect. Commencement of work shall be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install prefabricated building on concrete pad as indicated on Drawings and in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 3.03 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion of the Work, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave work in clean condition. END OF SECTION DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/CHEMICAL STORAGE BUILDING DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 13123-1 Pj SASC Inc. Phoenix • Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG I ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 SECTION 13125 2, ABOVE GROUND STORAGE TANK 1.04 WARRANTY A. Furnish 30 year Manufacturer's warranty. PART PRODUCTS. 2.01 MATERIALS ' A. Tanks: 1 Specifications are based on products as manufactured by Convault, 800-222- 7099 2. Above -ground double-wall 2,000 gallon tank shall be manufactured per U.S. 142 and installed per N.F.P.A. 30. 3. Primary tank shall be U.L. listed. Secondary tank shall be protected with concrete. 4. Internal tank shall be manufactured with 3/16 inch ASTM A-36 steel. 4. One tank shall be provided with Diesel Package. 5. Both tanks shall be provided with the following: a. Emergency vent. i b. Automatic gauge: Morrison 918 clock gauge with alarm. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS rm/ABOVE GROUND STORAGE TANK '� DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 13125-1 PART GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Above ground fuel storage tank as shown on Drawings and as 1� specified herein. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, design data and installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings showing layout, dimensions and construction details. C. Calibration Charts: Submit copies of manufacturer's latest calibration charts. D. Certificates: Submit manufacturer certification that products furnished meet specification requirements. E. Contract Closeout Submittals: Submit the following in accordance with Section 01770: 1. Operating and Maintenance: a. Warranty 2. Electrical and Fire Department "green tags". 3. Fire Department permit. 4. As -built drawings showing all utilities. 5. Tank gauging chart 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original unopened packaging with labels intact. Protect finished surfaces with removable wrapping or coating which will not bond when exposed to sunlight. B. Storage: Adequately protect against damage while stored at the site. C. Handling: Comply with manufacturer's instructions. 1.04 WARRANTY A. Furnish 30 year Manufacturer's warranty. PART PRODUCTS. 2.01 MATERIALS ' A. Tanks: 1 Specifications are based on products as manufactured by Convault, 800-222- 7099 2. Above -ground double-wall 2,000 gallon tank shall be manufactured per U.S. 142 and installed per N.F.P.A. 30. 3. Primary tank shall be U.L. listed. Secondary tank shall be protected with concrete. 4. Internal tank shall be manufactured with 3/16 inch ASTM A-36 steel. 4. One tank shall be provided with Diesel Package. 5. Both tanks shall be provided with the following: a. Emergency vent. i b. Automatic gauge: Morrison 918 clock gauge with alarm. DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS rm/ABOVE GROUND STORAGE TANK '� DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 13125-1 SASC Inc. Phoenix - Las Vegas GREG NORMAN CLUBHOUSE & MAINTENANCE BLDG ISSUE DATE JULY 26, 1999 C. &-gallon overfill container with release valve. d. Pressure -vacuum vent. e. Pump rated at 18 GPM, dispenser, meter, filter and register. f. Hose retractor, hose with automatic nozzle and breakaway fitting. g. Fill pipe and cap, aluminum drop tube. h. Interstitial monitor. i. Pre -cast concrete steps with wrought iron railing. B. Fueling Equipment: 1. Fill -Rite Futura Model #702 dispenser as manufactured by Tuthill, shall be tank mounted, weatherproof model with integral pump, meter and register, modified to accept an automatic shut-off nozzle. 2. Nozzle: O.P.W. Model 1611 AV, 3'-0" by 4'-0", vapor recovery adapter. 3. Hose Swiver: O.P.W. 45 4. Breakaway Fitting: O.P.W. #66 5. Hose Retriever: O.P.W. 57-0614 with clamp. 6. Diesel tank shall be provided with 12 -foot, 3/4 inch I.D. diesel fuel hose. 7. Fill Cap: O.P.W. 62 TT, locking type 8. Fuel Fileter: CIM-TEK 800 HS -30, 30 micron hydrosorb spin -on, pip - mounted filter. C. Interstitial Monitoring: Continuous monitoring system to detect the presence of hydrocarbons, water or dry conditions at the sensors. System shall be suitable for monitoring secondarily contained systems and equal to Pneumercator LC 1000-1 with LS 600 -LD probe. Audible alarm shall register 85db minimum. Provide power source to the control panel from adjacent building. Sensor line shall be run in 3/4 inch conduit underground minimum is 18 inches deep. Conduit shall be marked "intrinsically safe". D. Level Gauge: Provide an analog type direct reading fuel gauge; "Sculley" golden gallon, reading in inches. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive work and report detrimental conditions in writing to the Architect. Commencement of work shall be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install tank on concrete pad as indicated on Drawings and in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 3.03 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion of the Work, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave work in clean condition. END OF SECTION DFD ARCHITECTURE C -SPECS TM/ABOVE GROUND STORAGE TANK DFD PROJECT NO.98215/SASC 99-07-3 SECTION 13125-2